Home

UM SWD EN Think & Do

1. tated de 5 27 5 3 1 9 91 5 27 5 3 2 XDI SSSION ene 5 28 5 3 3 Gall EXDIOSSIOE 5 29 5 3 4 Interaction of Call and Begin Blocks 5 30 5 3 5 o bchart Design SUMMAN a 5 31 5 3 6 Subchart Runtime Characteristics 5 31 5 37 Whento Use SUDCNANS 5 32 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 1 Think amp Do 5 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Flow Charts 5 Flow Charts This section provides an in depth discussion of the flow charting features of Think amp Do 5 1 Flow Chart Types and Categories Think amp Do has a two level flow chart hierarchy implemented with two types of flow charts Standard flow charts Subcharts You use standard flow charts to define a project If your project has only one flow chart it must be a standard flow chart Standard flow charts can call subcharts much like a main program calls subroutines Standard and subchart type flow charts can pass variables back and forth Note that in this manual we use the term flow charts to mean either the standard or subchart type 5 2 Basic Flow Chart Blocks The first block in a flow chart is the starting point of execution at runtime By default the proper flow chart starting block is at
2. 6 68 6 3 14 Configuring an eges iau a 6 74 6 3 15 Trend Control Development 6 74 6 3 16 Trend Control Runtime 6 87 6 3 17 Configuring ActiveX Control 6 89 6 3 18 Configuring NET Control 6 93 6 3 19 Configuring Grid 6 97 6 3 20 Using and Creating Symbols 2 6 104 Setting Screen Attributes eai bere 6 112 wieder rU 6 114 Additional Worksheets 6 115 6 6 1 Alarm Worksheets 6 115 6 6 2 Math 6 121 6 6 3 6 122 6 6 4 VVOIKSIIGGU 6 124 6 6 5 Scheduler VoIKSleelt 6 126 6 6 6 Trend Worksheets 6 127 JSM 9 T 6 130 6 7 1 E 6 131 6 7 2 alobal Procedules 6 131 6 7 3 GaP 0 29 91 055 95 2 020 952000 0 02 0 00 002 10 ac
3. 7 7 7 11 T TAGS E E 3 3 ACCESSING dE da dust ed bue did 6 6 CFO QUIN 6 9 6 5 Target systems 1 8 Technical Service 1 11 Teehnical SUD DOM 1 11 Time and dale 7 11 7 13 Timer data uA 7 7 7 12 6 8 4 9 W Wall DIOC 4 14 5 26 Watch WINDOWS 10 6 Watchdog uiii o eren aie 3 16 sd E prd dea 1 8 As embedded controller 1 9 Target options c 9 8 WIDIPLEG 9 5 2364
4. 10 13 Moton 5 18 Move Block Exchanging Strings with other types 7 35 Moving a number to discrete outputs 7 21 Moving analog values 7 22 Moving array 7 25 Moving bits and scalar values 7 19 Moving different data 7 19 Moving discrete inputs to a number 7 20 Moving multiple data items 7 18 Moving ranges of String data items 7 35 Moving same data types 7 17 2364 en B Moving with inverter order 7 18 Shifting and rotating 7 24 SUMMA sehen is 7 23 Using with String data items 7 34 Move 4 14 5 21 7 16 7 25 Multiple selection 4 13 Namirg a projecten 2 5 Note ins 5 8 EMON O Tr 5 8 Number data type 7 7 GOUNMING EURO ET 7 15 O Object Finder dialog 6 7 online change S s seii toe
5. 5 4 The Calculation Block Expression tab 5 5 The Call Block Expression 5 7 Note Properties dialog b heo axe ta Denys 5 8 The Communication Block Expression 5 9 The Compare Block Expression 5 10 The Control Block Expression tab 5 13 The Decision Block Expression 5 15 A Do Loop consists of Do Loop block linked to a Compare block 5 17 Do Loop block showing Maximum Loop Coun 5 18 2364 en B Section 6 2364 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Typical subsystem and a motion control systems design 5 19 The Motion Block
6. 3 16 4 General Programming 4 3 4 1 4 4 4 2 Exploring Flow Charts and 4 5 4 3 Creating a Flow SG 4 6 4 4 Changing Flow Chart Settings 4 7 4 5 PIOW VIEW es echt oad ease 4 9 4 6 Displaying Multiple Flow 4 12 4 7 FION C 4 13 4 8 Flow Chart Block 5 0000 4 13 4 9 Connecting Fow Chant 4 16 2364_ PHOENIX CONTACT Think amp Do 4 10 Editing Flow Chart Block Expressions 4 17 4 11 Entering Block Description 4 18 4 12 4 19 4 13 Scripting Languages in 4 28 CoS Ue 5 3 5 1 Flow Chart Types and Categories 8 5 3 5 2 Basic ne BU 5 3 5 3 US
7. 10 3 LAUNCAINGAADD WACK CM a 10 3 19 10 Wale WINDOWS Cock su Oslo 10 5 10 1 3 Custom Watch 5 10 6 10 7 4 5 10 7 10 1 5 Using FlowView with AppTracker 10 8 10 2 Using FlowView in Monitor 0 10 9 10 21 10 10 10 2 2 Flow Chart Execution 10 11 10 3 Edit MOJE Sep 10 13 10 4 Simulation ROW ehan S eee 10 13 10 41 SIAC eren ev De ruego e ema meis 10 14 10 4 2 Disabling Simulation for Real 10 15 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 10 1 Think amp Do 10 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Debugging Projects 10 Debugging Projects Think and Do provides interconnected tools that help you debug that is identify problems in projects during development This section describes how to launch and use these tools They are AppTracker EasyTrac FlowView in Monitor Mode 10 1 AppTracker is a tool included with Think amp Do It is a stand alone application that can run even if the development tools i
8. 5 19 The Move Block Expression 5 21 PID Toop block 5 23 The PID Block Expression 5 23 The Run Program Block Expression 5 24 The SQL Block General 5 25 The Wait Block Expression 5 26 Calling flow chart passes values to subcharts via parameters 5 27 The Begin Block Expression tab defines parameters and locals 5 28 The Call Block Expression 5 29 The Screens Explorer bar in ProjectCenter 6 3 Use ScreenView to create and edit HMI screens 6 5 Object Properties Check 6 7 Object Finder dialog 6 7 The Select Index dialog 6 8 The Member selection dialog 6 8 The New dialog 6 9 The Screen Tags dialog 6 10 The Standard 6 12 Zoom drop down selection 000000 6
9. PR 6 134 Background script page 6 135 The Data Item grid displays all tags of a particular data type 7 3 Use a label array with string values that correspond to data values 7 9 The drop down arrow displays a table with initial values 7 10 Timer data items are available to different blocks 7 14 AppTracker watch window with timer variables visible 7 15 The Move Block Expression 7 17 The MSB and LSB are specified in the range fields 7 20 To move a number to a series of output bits specify MSB LSB 7 21 The Calculation Block Expression 7 25 lOView includes a Sign Extend option 7 30 E Em 7 31 Scaling equation in the Calculation Block Expression tab 7 33 The SQL Block dialog box helps construct SQL statements 7 37 The SQL Block 7 39 The SQL Block Tag Mappings 7 42 The SQL Block Fillers 7 44 The SQL Block Sorting 7 45 The resulting SQL in the
10. 3 9 3 4 2 Citing an VO MOQUE EE 3 10 3 4 3 Deleting an WO 3 10 Mapping I O Points to Data 3 11 scanning Monitoring VO 3 13 Saving the 3 14 Tips on Toolbar Functions 3 14 Watchdog Timeout Default I O States 00 3 16 3 9 1 Startup Shutdown Output State 3 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 1 Think amp Do 3 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Drivers Devices and Tags 3 Drivers Devices and Tags This section discusses the techniques required to define input output and internal data items used in control programs and HMI screens Think amp Do uses a common tagname da tabase for all and variables throughout the project 3 1 Specifying Inputs Outputs and Data Items All variables in the control system may be classified into two simple categories External Inputs and Outputs or any tagnames mapped to external I O These clude I O bases motion axes or serial port devices Internal internal variables for storage calculations and manipulation All data items can have meaningful tagnames of up to 30 characters All data types are for internal use in a Think amp Do project However you can map Inputs Outputs Counters Numbers Floats Strings and Comm da
11. 6 39 Sample Grid 6 40 ODIJecEPEFODerties GF 6 40 Object Properties Combo 6 41 The Data Sources dialog 6 42 Object Properties Radio Button 6 43 The radio button Advanced dialog 6 44 Object Properties Check 6 46 The check box Advanced dialog 6 47 Object Properties List BOX E DP a Lut iMd 6 50 The Messages Configuration dialog box 6 51 Object Properties Smart 6 53 The smart message Configuration dialog box 6 54 Object Properties 6 57 The pushbutton Configuration dialog 6 59 6 59 The Align and Distribute 6 60 Aligning ERN 6 61 Aligning objects 6 62 236
12. 6 3 S OCON 6 3 6 2 1 Expanding the 6 6 4 6 2 2 Setting Startup Screen 6 4 6 2 3 Renaming Duplicating Deleting or Printing a Screen 6 4 6 2 4 Opening 6 4 ScreenView Development 6 5 6 3 1 Creating and Using ERA IEEE 6 5 6 3 2 JOD reer enn 6 10 6 3 3 e M 6 11 6 3 4 6 11 6 3 5 Using the Standard 6 12 6 3 6 Execution Control Toolbar 6 13 6 3 7 Using the Bitmap 6 14 6 3 8 Using the Dynamic Objects Toolbar 6 16 6 3 9 Using the Mode TOo0lDAr 13 UE hen raodo 6 24 6 3 10 Using the Static Objects Toolbar 6 26 6 3 11 Using the Active Objects 6 34 6 3 12 Using the Align and Distribute Toolbar 6 60 09 13
13. 1 4 1 3 Staring TANK 1 5 1 4 mm 1 5 1 5 oyster Golcebls suot 1 6 1 6 Phoenix Contact Technical 1 11 2 Cheating we eect 2 3 2 1 otaning a NOW m 2 3 2 2 Selecting a Runtime Target Type 2 8 2 3 Specifying Inputs Outputs and Data 2 10 2 4 Creating Control Program 2 10 2 5 Creating an Operator SCIOGrl 2 enc Ec 2 12 S MEE DIOS IIIS e and M Elec er cp ee aati 3 3 3 1 Specifying Inputs Outputs and Data 222 3 3 3 2 CONTIG UIT ache eases eel 3 5 3 3 Adding an Diy OM 3 7 3 4 Connecting to I O Devices 3 8 3 5 Mapping I O Points to Data 3 11 3 6 Scanning and Monitoring De ee Ru ice eases 3 13 3 7 saving the VO Configuratio 3 14 3 8 THD SOM Toolbar indies Soo COS da SUR east qute etie rt 3 14 3 9 Watchdog Timeout Default I O States
14. specifies a border line style by clicking on None Solid Dashed Etched Raised or Sunken Color specifies a border line color by clicking the Color button to open the Color di alog box Click the color to select it and then close the dialog box Weight specifies a border line width by typing a number representing the line width in pixels into the text box provided Fil specifies whether to fill the rectangle by clicking No Fill or Fil f you select the Fill option specify a fill color by clicking on the Color rectangle When the Color dialog box displays click a color to select it and close the dialog box Color specifies a fill color by clicking the Color button to open the Color dialog box Click a color to select it then close the dialog box Caption opens the Caption dialog box This is where you can edit the text that can be written inside the rectangle object Caption Caption Estem translation Fonts Align Multiline Wrap Auto Format Auto gray Cancel Figure 6 36 The Caption dialog box Caption specifies the text that you want to show inside the rectangle object in this text box PHOENIX CONTACT 6 33 Think amp Do Extern translation optional enables translation of the caption when a translation file is specif
15. 6 97 The Grid Data Class Tag dialog 6 98 The Runtime View pop up dialog 6 98 The Grid Data Class Tag dialog 6 99 The Grid Columns dialog 6 100 The Grid Advanced dialog 6 102 Symbola ecuaciones to vicc eh 6 105 Symbol placed a screen E pues Lut Ru p Redes 6 105 Object Properties Linked Symbol 6 106 Symbol Properties dialog box for the linked symbol 6 106 Symbol Properties dialog box with custom properties specified 6 107 Creating a Master 6 107 Symbolin Symbol Edo site Br p i 6 108 Object Properties Check 6 108 Object Properties Check Box with a custom property specified 6 109 Symbol Properties showing a custom property to define 6 109 Object Properties Check Box with a custom property specified 6 110 A default custom property in the Symbol Properties dialog box 6 110 Object Properties Check Box with all custom properties specified 6 110 The Symbol Properties dialog box for editing tooltips 6 111 The symbol Object Properties dialog box showing a tooltip 6 111 The Screen Attribu
16. 7 18 7 6 3 Moving Multiple Data Item 7 18 7 6 4 TEE 7 23 7 6 5 Shifting and Rotating Arrays oeeie 7 23 7 6 6 Moving Array Elements 7 25 Using the Calculation BOCK at acetic 7 26 7 7 1 Building a Calculation 7 26 7 7 2 Expression Display Conventions 4 0 0 1 7 27 7 7 3 PLOT Math e osse 7 27 7 7 4 Basic 7 28 7 7 5 Bitwise 2 7 29 7 7 6 el ie UOTIS ceca 7 29 Handing Analog 7 30 7 8 1 7 31 7 8 2 scaling Analog 7 32 7 35 7 9 1 Using Move Blocks with 65 10001 7 35 7 9 2 Exchanging Strings With Other
17. Dashed Line Figure 6 27 Object Properties Open Polygon 2364 2364 Es Closed Polygon Tool Line Tool Operator Screen Techniques Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the polygon Line specifies a border line style by clicking the No Line Solid Line or Dashed Line button Color specifies a border line color by clicking the Color button When the Color di alog box opens click on a color to select it and then close the dialog box Weight specifies the borderline width in pixels by typing a number representing the line width into the text box Closed Polygon Object Click the Closed Polygon tool to draw a closed polygon using a border the specified foreground color To draw a closed polygon in the drawing area Click the left mouse button to set the starting point of the polygon Move the cursor to a new location and click again to place the second point Repeat this process until you create the desired polygon shape Double click or right click to stop drawing the polygon To view the object properties double click on the polygon object Dru e IM The Object Properties dialog box is displays as follows Object Properties a Replace Hint Closed Polygon Border Fill Type Solid f No Fill di Color t Fil Color m Weight
18. 5 Y o S 5 gt gt Valid move Current Date Fixed Integers 1 Register 1 Counter 1 Number Float const Vimus IE ome fa P N Fags DEDE bm 7 Can move up to 2 4 8 13 32 or 64 data items 8 Invalid move PHOENIX CONTACT 7 23 2364 en B Think amp Do 7 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 6 5 Shifting and Rotating Arrays The discussion of the Move block to this point has shown how to move a data item or range of items to another data item or range of data items The Array data type includes unique elements of the subtypes Byte Flag Float Number String and Timer The Move block is even more powerful when used to manipulate arrays In addition to moving data to or from arrays you can manipulate data items within an array with the Shift and Rotate functions Shift The Shift function moves each value to the adjacent data item toward a specified end left or right of the array The value of the data item at the opposite end of the array becomes zero Rotate The Rotate function moves each value to the adjacent data toward a specified end left or right of the array In this case the value at the opposite end of the array is replaced with the data item where the rotation began The figure below depicts the
19. Good Error From PC Serial Ports Bar Code Reader Generic Serial Communication COMI 9600 8 1 None Status bar 4 Click the Scan button on the toolbar This enables the Runtime target s serial port to communicate externally The Serial Port Scanning dialog box Figure 8 8 appears which allows manually transmitting and receiving characters to from the device Serial Port Scanning DER Selected Device Info Name BarCode Reader Serial Part Settings COM 9600 Mone 6 1 Received Data ASCII Hex Transmit Data Clear text after sending ASCII Chart Help Figure 8 8 The Serial Port Scanning dialog box for manual communication Type command or status request to the external device in the Transmit Data field You may have to refer to the documentation for the external device at this point Note that for many devices carriage return and line feed CRLF characters are required to complete a command Press lt Enter gt on the PC keyboard and Think amp Do supplies the CRLF If only CH is required enter the ASCII value for CR 2364 8 9 Think amp Do 8 10 PHOENIX CONTACT Characters received from the external device appear in the Received Data field in the di alog box While using the Serial Port Scanning dialog box you may need to refer to an
20. Figure 6 14 The Dynamic Properties toolbar The tools in the Dynamic Properties toolbar are described below Command Property Click the Command tool to add the command dynamic to a selected object or group of ob jects The command dynamic lets operators click on the object or press a pre defined key to execute the command at runtime Double click on the object to view its object properties Object Properties Replace Hint Command On Down On while On Up On Right Dawn d Type Expression Built in Langue Figure 6 15 Object Properties Command The Command dynamic provides one tag for each one of the events supported by it Notice that more than one event can be configured simultaneously for the same Command dynamic Down executes the command script once when the user clicks on the object with the left mouse button While keeps executing the command script continuously while the mouse pointer is pressed on the object The period in milliseconds of execution for the com mand script is setin the Rate field from the Configuration dialog box except for the VBScript option which is executed as fast as possible On executes the command script once when the user releases the left mouse but ton on the object Right Down executes the command script once when the user clicks on the object with the ri
21. 10 3 2 PHOENIX CONTACT EXDIGSSIO IS x 4 17 Freeze DIOOCK siete in tester Ee dM 4 13 Motion 000 0 2 5 18 Move 5 21 7 16 7 25 Order Of execution 4 7 PID PLOCK NM 5 23 EU PregramDlo6 5 24 SIMULATION 4 8 10 18 SQL Express block 5 25 Stepped execution 10 11 Unused a a IER Ne 4 8 Walt ta te eit eap exe 5 26 FlowView Orientation 4 9 Forcing 10 7 Freeze 4 13 Function MM LR CP HERR 7 35 PE 7 35 Alate CEP 7 35 zi mme E 7 35 7 36 7 35 7 36 Mi eet P 7 35 7 36 jeg met 7 35 7 36 cg p RENTES 7 35 7 35 Functions OS TP Cre 7 29 CO ect al eR cid 7 29 COSECANl 7 29 COULANG GNU PEE 7 29 9 7 29 eic tact 7 29 7 29 m M 7 09
22. Tagname Condition Operator Delete 2 Cancel Help Figure 5 2 The Enable Block Expression tab AND and OR Operator in the dialog box provides for additional Boolean condi tions in the expression AND has greater precedence than OR in other words AND ex pressions are evaluated before OR expressions and then they are evaluated from top down Think amp Do Runtime evaluates the Enable block every scan before executing the flow chart based on the position of the flow chart in the flow chart list see Chang ing Execution Order on page 4 6 The flow chart only runs if its expression is TRUE at the start of the scan 2364 en B 2364 xz Cale Calculation block Button Flow Charts On the first scan or whenever the Enable block expression transitions from FALSE to TRUE flow chart execution starts at the Enable block exit Otherwise execution starts where it left off the previous scan Table 5 1 defines all possible Enable block combinations This table shows valid data item types and the conditions that appear in the Condition drop down list For example it is possible to test to see if an Input is ON or OFF Table 5 1 Valid Enable Block Expressions Data Type Array Comm Input Output Timer X valid 5 2 2 Calculation Block The Calculation block provides comprehensive math capabilities It operates on a variety of
23. 4 7 4 4 3 Renaming Copying Deleting or Printing Flow Charts 4 7 4 5 FIOWVIEW Orientation 4 8 4 5 1 Adding Flow Chart Blocks to a Flow 4 9 4 5 2 Turning the Grid OR orbe he 4 9 4 5 3 Increasing the Number 4 9 4 5 4 eigene Pools mp 4 10 4 6 Displaying Multiple Flow 4 11 4 7 4 12 4 7 1 inl muri EHE 4 12 4 8 Flow Chart 4 12 4 8 1 EADIE BIOGK Ct T TRY 4 12 4 8 2 SOCK d X E 4 13 4 8 3 Types Or ACIOIT BIOCKS sir t o e 4 13 4 8 4 Types Of Branching BIOCKS onde 4 13 4 8 5 nq 4 15 4 9 Connecting Flow Chart 4 15 4 10 Editing Flow Chart Block Expressions 4 16 411 Entering Block DeSCcrplloli ec EVER e Rx ee 4 17 412 uni aa 4 18 4 12 1 Screens as Part of a 4 18 4 12 2 Creating Operator 4 19 4 12 3 ScreenView Development Environment 2 47 4 2 4 19 4 12
24. 7 30 Toolbar functions qose crues 3 14 tei 5 13 EONO 5 14 e 7 15 Customer SUBDOIT ont tote 1 11 CUT CODY P ase utei meet 4 13 Data items Adding cecal 7 4 Data types and 7 6 Deleting find and replace 7 4 EXPO a 7 3 Data TV DCS be etter eats 7 6 Database 5 5 25 7 37 7 46 Date Time 7 11 8 23 DDE server 8 18 CONNU P cm 8 20 8 16 LAUNCHING 8 19 1 Think amp Do Writing tagnames from Excel 8 22 Debugging 10 3 10 15 Simulation flow charts 10 13 Decision ERI T 4 14 5 14 ttt Hr 5 15 Summa EET 5 15 Derived functions 7 29 Development 5 1 7 DOVIC CS Eu uris 3 3 ee 1 4 Do Loop 5 17 Draw
25. Font Align Read T ag sE pr m Security g write Tag No Line dr 5 Zl Line Weight Figure 6 54 Object Properties Smart Message You can use this dialog box to specify the following parameters when selected selects the smart message object type The object type sets the behavior of the object during the runtime and the features supported by it e Message Display default e Multistate Indicator e Multistate Pushbutton e Value selects the type of values used to index the message list e Boolean provides two valid states Use this selection when you want to display either one of two different messages based on a boolean value 0 or 1 e Integer default provides 500 valid states Use this selection when you want to display different messages based on specific values from an Integer tag e LSB least significant bit provides 32 valid states 32 bits in an integer value Use this selection when you want to display different messages based on which bit from an integer tag is set If more than one bit from the Integer tag is set simultane ously the message associated with the least significant bit that is set value 1 will be displayed If Multistate Pushbutton is the Smart Message type only 16 different messages can be associated with the object even for Integer or LSB Value types Read Tag Expr specifies the name of an integer o
26. Math and Data Operations Finding and Replacing Tagnames in the Data Item Grid To find data items follow these steps 1 Onthe ProjectCenter menu bar select the Edit Find menu 2 Inthe Find dialog box enter the tagname as the search string Specify the search direction and select Match case if required 4 Click the Find Next button Press the F3 key to Find Again using the same search string and settings To find and replace tagnames in the Data Item grid follow these steps 1 Onthe ProjectCenter menu bar select the Edit Replace menu 2 Inthe Replace dialog box enter the tagname as the search string in the Find What field 3 Enterthe new text in the Replace with field Select Match case if required 5 Click Find Next Replace or Replace as needed p 7 1 1 Initial and Retentive Values The Initial column in the Data Item grid applies to most data types At startup the Runtime project initializes all data items to the initial value in the tagname database except for data items marked as retentive The retentive status has priority over any initial value ex cept for the very first time a project is run Data item values may be configured as retentive or non retentive The term retentive de scribes saving the value to disk whenever the Runtime project closes or prior to a power down if a UPS is used see Note below Retentive data i
27. RM 7 29 SOCAN a 7 29 7 29 7 09 7 29 mss UT EM 1 5 1 6 OD aba dt eod Orid Eus 1 5 HMI screen See Operator Screen 2364 en B VO 3 5 Adding driver 3 7 Filldown 22 22 3 12 Mapping 3 11 3 13 Scanning and monitoring 3 13 leor c P 3 5 7 18 Initial tagname 7 5 Input data 7 7 Instant Recall 9 8 9 12 NSE oom PE 7 37 K Keyboard 1 5 KEYNS P 1 4 L Left String function 2 2222 7 36 Een String 7 36 Local SVSIOITISu 1 10 3 11 Math Block Basic operators HE 7 27 Expression display conventions 7 26 Scientific functions 222 7 29 Math runtime errors 7 27 Menu selections iiic 1 4 NG LIS 4 9 7 35 Monitor and Edit
28. adapter Tagnames System U Figure 3 8 Physical I O points map to logical I O points any sequence To map the input or output module points 1 Select a module in lOView 2 Inthe Tab panel select the I O Mapping tab 3 Click the cursor in the Logical ID column of the first row 4 Type the logical ID number desired to define for example if an input module is select ed you might enter 0 as the first logical ID and then press the lt Enter gt key The Logi cal ID following the example 1 0 appears along with the corresponding tagname defined in ProjectCenter see Adding Data Items page 3 4 A convenient way to map I O points is to double click any cell in the Logical ID or Tag name column and lOView displays the Data Item grid ProjectCenter to selection of the desired tagname from the tagname database To automatically copy a logical ID and tag name to the I O mapping table double click the first column of the Data Item table or select the row and click the OK button in the dialog box Since many projects use a simple straight through mapping lOView provides an auto complete function called Fill Down The Fill Down feature automatically enters sequential logical IDs and tagnames To use Fill Down to complete I O mappings Fil D 1 Enterthe first Logical ID number in the top cell of the Logical ID column dad 2 Select the entr
29. 3 4 3 Deleting an I O Module To delete an I O module or device follow these steps 1 Select the device or module in lOView 2 Select the Devices Remove menu or click the Remove Devices toolbar button to delete the device or module without any confirmation 2364 en B Drivers Devices and Tags Selected module I O Mapping tab selected 3 5 Mapping I O Points to Data Items After selecting the input module click the I O Mapping right most tab at the bottom of the View window The tab view Figure 3 7 displays the I O mapping information for the se lected module above it Think amp Do OView Sortation Example tio Configuration 24 Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Window Help amp aan 71721 Good Missing Base Module or Any Other Extra Base Module Duplicate Base or Module Mismatch Ethernet Slot 2 Slot 2 EtherNet Base Total Bases 1 Control E ler H4 EBC Base 1 pza 16 Discrete In Simulatori 16 Discrete In Simulatori_ 1_B1 3 16 Discrete In Simulatori 11 B2 4 16 Discrete In Simulatori 11 B3 H amp 16 Discrete In Simulatori 11 B4 Discrete In Simulaton 11 B5 Board Info Board Status Mapping Module Info Module Status Mapping For Help press F1 Figure 3 7 lOView showing the I O Mapping tab for selected module The I O Mapping tab of the lOView window presents information about the selected mod u
30. Figure 3 4 The Add I O Driver dialog box and its driver listing Phoenix Contact is constantly adding new drivers and device types to stay current with the industry s latest products Visit www phoenixcontact com to check the latest news on supported I O 3 Thenextdialog box may prompt for board number serial port number etc depending on the I O type 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 3 7 Think amp Do 4 Click the OK button lOView displays an image of the I O adapter as shown in Figure 3 5 multiple cards appear in a tree structure lOView also displays board information related to the I O card in the lower pane of the window where you may edit some of the parameters Generally it s a good idea to leave all of the parameters at their default settings unless you know for certain that they require changing see online help for details Think amp Do IOView Sortation Example tio Configuration Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Window Help fab el fa ef e Tla a sse Board info on the controller Serial Driver controller driver I O scanner card or CE Runtime target found Refresh Grid INTERBUS Phoenix Contact Board Number HOST Watchdog Timer Disabled Board Status Mapping Module Infa Module Status Mapping 120 Mapping For Help press F1 Figure 3 5 IOView displays an image of the I O scanner card or Runtime target 3 4 Connecting to I O
31. Figure 6 2 Use ScreenView to create and edit HMI screens 6 3 1 Creating and Using Tags In ScreenView you use tags to display state results of calculations alarm points and so forth In ScreenView all tags are organized according to their origin application internal or shared Application and internal tags originate in ScreenView while shared tags originate in the Think amp Do Data Items editor The following is a description of the different ScreenView tag types Application tags are user defined screen tags created for displays to read from and write to field equipment for control auxiliary tags to perform mathematical calculations and so forth nternal tags are system tags predefined by ScreenView Internal tags have predeter mined functions time date acknowledge alarms storage of the logged on user name and so forth You cannot delete or modify these tags but you can access their values from any ScreenView task 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 5 Think amp Do 6 6 PHOENIX CONTACT Shared tags are created in the Data Items editor and imported into the ScreenView en vironment You cannot edit shared tags in the ScreenView environment but you can modify these tags in ProjectCenter Consequently you can configure shared tags for any ScreenView task just as any other tag Understanding the Screen Tag Syntax Observe the following guidelines when naming a screen tag You can use letters
32. Section 5 This section informs you about Flow charts blocks and how to use them Creating and using subcharts Mc cm 5 3 5 1 Flow Chart Types and Categories 5 3 5 2 Basic Flow Chart 2 444 204 5 3 5 2 1 Enap DIOCK MNT SE 5 4 5 2 2 Calculation 5 5 5 2 3 CAN BOCK Emm 5 7 5 2 4 INOS ERE 5 8 525 COMMUNICATION BIGCK a 5 9 5 2 6 COMP Ale a 5 10 5 2 7 CONTO C a a C Fut RETRE 5 13 5 2 8 819 5 15 5 2 9 Do Loop BIlOCK 5 17 SANO MOTION BIOCK T 5 19 Ow WOME BIOC Ks 5 21 S212 PID BOCK 5 23 Sue 818 25 oma enses ou OE E 5 24 iie alee 5 25 oue l9 boc 5 26 5 3 SING SUBDEMAING
33. You are not required to enter the protocol type in the URL field When you select a protocol type from the Hyperlink Type list ScreenView automatically adds the protocol s prefix to the URL address Disable field specifies a value greater than zero that disables the hyperlink com mand property for the selected object s Security field specifies a security level for the object s If a user logs on and does not have the required security level Think amp Do disables the hyperlink command for the object s BarGraph Property Click the BarGraph tool to add bar graph properties to a selected object then double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties BarGraph da Replace Hint BarGraph Propert 2 y Tag Espressian EX ve E faving Direction Up f Vertical M asinum Value 100 Center t Horizontal Foreground Color m t Down Figure 6 17 Object Properties BarGraph Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters field specifies a tag or expression that evaluates the bar graph level You also can click the icon to browse your directories for an existing tag or expression Minimum Value field specifies a numeric constant or a tag value that defines the min imum value used to calculate the height if vertical or width if horizontal o
34. tion ds tabe Heres 7 37 4 11 PID Block for Process 5 too testari 7 47 9 EER 8 3 8 1 serial Pert GommilbieatloliS xcix cat exer neko eiecti ioa eb 8 3 8 2 Using SEIN e c 8 10 8 3 Using DDE SEVER 8 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364_en_B Table of Contents 8 4 Setting Up Remote 8 23 9 B ullding ang 5 9 3 9 1 Buding eer ere tae tare 9 3 9 2 ae 9 4 9 3 Adjusting the Seal IBIerVal ssi pus eap os qp dab 9 5 9 4 Stopping a RUNNING tape EXER FERE 9 6 9 5 RUNNNO REMOS OC CUS E 9 6 9 6 Think amp Do CE Watch for Windows CE Targets 9 9 9 7 Instant Recall for Windows CE 9 12 10 Es 10 3 ole RO 10 3 10 2 Using FlowView in Monitor 10 9 10 3 JEdIUMOGOG E ee 10 13 10 4 Simulation FlOW
35. 8 23 Remote 0 22 00 02 1 10 Hemote ode hc pote 1 10 9 6 Retentive tagname values 7 5 ROUI DIOC Kesan 5 27 Right String function 7 36 mietzulge Eid cci ic 7 24 POW VAC RE 4 9 R n Program DloGK pote a 5 24 Running a 9 4 On remote target platforms 9 6 Runtime SONWOAIGO aeree cou xx Rd Ru te LR MEE 1 9 FRUITING Tab TT 1 7 l idlsje o I 9o cc 2 8 5 Scaling analog 7 32 Scan time Adjusting the 9 7 CompoHells 9 5 9 7 Scan based 7 12 Scientific math functions 7 29 Screen aspect Fallout iae 6 5 SCO Da cm coc 4 10 Selecting blocks and connections 4 13 Serial 8 3 31 9 STG 8 8 oeral driv r cS 8 3 Serial port 8 8 8 6 Status data items 8 7 neers 7 24 Simula
36. E E Legend Toolbar f Fill Advanced Figure 6 39 Object Properties Trend Control The main features provided by the Trend Control object are Display of multiple pens simultaneously Support for different Data Sources such as Tag Batch Database and Text File A Capability to generate X Y graphs from the configured data sources please refer to Ap pendix A for an example of an X Y chart Simultaneous display of an unlimited number of data points This feature might be lim ited by the hardware used since available memory and performance will vary Built in toolbar which provides interfaces for the user to interact with the Trend Control object during the runtime Bullt in legend which displays the main information associated to each pen linked to the object Zooming and auto scaling tools Horizontal and vertical orientation For information on configuring and using the Trend Control see Trend Control Develop ment Interface on page 6 74 and Trend Control Runtime Interface on page 6 87 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 35 Think amp Do Activex Control Tool 6 36 PHOENIX CONTACT ActiveX Control Object Click the ActiveX Control tool to open the Insert ActiveX Control dialog box You use this dialog box place ActiveX components on your screen When the dialog box opens see Figure 6 40 it contains a list
37. File Format Binary e Default path lt Application Path gt Hst GGYYDDMM HST where YY Two last digits of the year MM Month DD Day Think amp Do provides the HST2TXT EXE and TXT2HST EXE programs which enable you to convert trend history files from binary hst to text txt and vice versa For more information about these programs see the Converting Trend History Files from Binary to Text and Converting Trend History Files from Text to Binary topics in the online help Database enables the Database Configuration button which displays the Database Configuration dialog box e Database type specified in the Database Configuration dialog box e Default table name TRENDGGG where GGG is the Trend worksheet number for example TRENDOO 1 for Trend worksheet 001 Database Configuration opens the Database Configuration dialog box where you can enter the requisite settings to link Think amp Do to an external SQL relational database for the purpose of saving the trend history Save On Trigger check box and field when selected and a tagname is specified saves trend samples when the specified tag changes Tag change can be an event from the Scheduler Save On Tag Change check box when selected always saves the trend sample when a value change occurs in any of the tags from that group 6 128 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Advanced displays t
38. For more information on how to use FlowView see Section 4 General Programming Techniques For a complete description of flow chart programming see Flow Charts on page 5 3 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 2 11 Think amp Do 2 5 Creating an Operator Screen Think amp Do provides more than just PC based control with flow charts it includes a full fea tured operator interface or HMI Human Machine Interface Use ScreenView to create op erator screens Windows CE target Runtime systems some devices such as the WinPLC do not have direct screen output available to its operating system 2 5 1 HMI Overview The final output of the development work is a screen or series of screens These appear in a window on the PC at Runtime The purpose of a screen is to communicate important in formation to a machine operator or process engineer It also provides an opportunity for op erator controlled input Screens typically include The current state of the machine or process such as Idle Run or Stop A Alarm conditions if they exist Production data such as number of parts percentage defects downtime reasons and trends Diagram of process on screen diagram to help orientate the operator ScreenView is a full featured HMI or operator interface design package which helps create screens that really communicate In addition to standard drawing constructs the screen ob ject shape toolbars provide an a
39. Simulation Creation Execution Sima sted Inputs Modification Subcharts Description Unused Notused Simulated Figure 10 12 Configuring a simulation flow chart To use simulation capability in a flow chart Control Block 1 Place a Control Block on the drawing page Double click the block to edit its expression Click the Action field and select Turn ON Bit from the list Click the Type field and choose Input from the list Double click the field to bring up the Data Item grid After choosing a data item return to FlowView I 2364 Debugging Projects The Move Block also has added capability when its flow chart is a simulation type The ex ample below shows a number value being moved to sixteen discrete inputs Bit_16 to Bit_1 This method simulates analog input values Move Block Expression D Properties From Data type Number Starting data item Simulated Analog In Ending data item To Data type Input Starting data item Bit 15 Ending data item Bit 1 Cancel Help Figure 10 13 Configuring simulated analog input values You may consider temporarily using part of an operator screen for simulation data This provides a place to enter process values in real time so simulation flow charts just read the data input and write them to actual input data items In de
40. Sortation Example CFG Run Status Running Last Built 03 31 39 PM Thu Jan 24 2008 Force Status No Items Forced Build Version 42 3 Status Simulated Run Status Running Unlocked Security Status Unlocked Force Status No Items Forced Build Version 18 0 120 Status Simulated Project Load Status OK _ Details Error Status Array Index Error Runtime Computer MAHLER Last Logic Solve Time ms 5 0 EN 50 Debug Computer Last Scan Interval 49 0 50 Last Logic Solve Time ms 0 50 Last Scan Interval 50 Avg Logic Solve Time ms 0 50 Avg Scan Interval ms 49 0 50 Peak Scan Interval 51 Avg Logic Solve Time 0 50 Scan Interval 50 50 Peak Scan Interval ms 50 Project Operations For Help press F1 Figure 9 7 Runtime windows for Certified PC and Windows CE 9 5 2 Windows CE Runtime Settings Windows CE targets can store two types of project files Project Runtime This file provides everything the operating system needs to run the project This compiled code cannot be directly edited Project source Source files may be optionally stored on the Windows CE target The files are compressed using a compressed file format Having a copy of the source files on the Runtime target is a great convenience no more looking for the disk or keepi
41. 9 7 Runtime windows for Certified and Windows CE 9 8 Runtime settings for Windows 9 9 The Think amp Do CE Watch Think amp Do Station tab 9 10 The Think amp Do CE Watch CE Station Selection dialog box 9 11 The Instant Recall dialog 9 13 AppTracker WIDIOWS siis aeos artes cce n iesus os tuo Nang ep 10 3 AppTracker Flow Chart Execution Path 10 4 AppTracker Project Explorer pane 10 4 The Chart tab lists data items related to the selected flow chart 10 5 Values of tags that are out of scope appear with diagonal bars 10 5 The Statistics tab provides a summary of system data items 10 6 AppTracker Custom Watch window 10 6 FlowView opened by 10 9 FlowView Preferences Block Colors tab 10 10 The Breakpoints dialog 10 12 Config ring sirmulated IQ iiia egt pui eae epit de 10 14 2364 en B 2364 Figure 10 12 Figure 10 13 Configuring a simulation flow chart Configuring simulated analog input values 10 15 PHOENIX CONTACT 15
42. A PID block has a dialog box with several tabs to configure These are covered in detail in the online help and PID for Process Control User Manual This document is installed as part of the standard Think amp Do setup 5 2 13 Run Program Block The Run Program block lets you start other Windows programs or batch files under the flow chart control This is one of the most powerful aspects of having a PC based control plat form The Run Program Block Expression tab See Figure 5 17 has parameters that specify the program path arguments runtime process parameters and an error value You may also specify these parameters indirectly using string data items The external program runs while the flow chart continues normal execution The Run Program block can start a custom C or Basic program or any executable file Run Program Block Expression D Properties Program Path Browse m CAPrint exe Pragram Arguments T ext jaco ata Runtime Process Parameters CREATE_DEFAULT_ERROR_MODE CREATE_NEwW CONSOLE CREATE_NEW_PROCESS_GROUP LREATE SEPARATE ww VOM LREATE SHARED ww VOM CREATE_SUSPENDED LREATE UNICODE ENVIRONMENT DEBUIG ONLY THIS 55 Error Value Number data item Program Error Cancel Help Figure 5 17 The Run Program Block Expression tab The flow chart design must take into account the execution time of the program it calls
43. Blue codes of any of the 143 standard colors creating a custom color Colors Standard Custom Colors Cancel Current Figure 4 19 The Colors Custom tab 3 Click the OK button to apply the selected color to the component that is being edited 2364 4 25 Think amp Do Color Icon 4 Depending on the component that you are editing the Fill Effects option may be avail able from the pop up interface see step 2 above Clicking this link displays the Fill Ef fects dialog box which lets you apply gradient colors with different styles and variants Fill Effects Start E End ESSERI ance Styles Variants Horizontal j Vertical j Sample t Diagonal up t Diagonal down f From comer f From center f Conical Conical comer Figure 4 20 The Fill Effects dialog box 5 Selecttwo colors in the Start and End fields select an option from the Styles group and then click the OK button to apply the fill effect to the component For applications that run on the Windows CE operating system the Fill Effects interface is available only for the Rectangle object Although Fill Effects is a useful tool for enhancing the look and feel of your screens the operating system takes a longer time to fill an object with fill effects than with plain colors You should develop criteria for using the feature without d
44. Cancel button cancels any changes made during the current configuration session If the block had an existing configuration when the dialog was displayed all previous config uration data is preserved This button is NOT available when in Online Monitor or Online Monitor and Edit modes 7 38 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Math and Data Operations Validate The Validate button updates all existing choices in the SQL Block dialog box and vali dates selections and entries It does not save the data to the block configuration and does not close the SQL Block dialog box This choice is NOT available when in Online Monitor or Online Monitor and Edit modes The SQL dialog box has five tabs Use one or more of these to build a valid SQL re quest Each tab and its contents are described in the next several sections 7 10 2 General Tab The SQL Block General tab provides options to select the database name the query specify the query type and select type tables to query and status flags The General tab defines the top level SQL request type and the number of records ac cessed SOL Block SOL Statement not 52 Change DB General Tag Mappings Filters where Sorting Order By SQL Statement SOL Request Type SELECT Type f SELECT Get data from DE Get single record Get first record INSERT Put data in DB 27 Get multi
45. SQL Statement tab 7 46 7 47 Think amp Do can communicate with many different devices 8 3 IOVIOWANIFIOOW 22 255 Totis eel cadena duet ones 8 4 The Add Serial Device dialog box 8 5 lIOView Module 8 5 Serial Port Settings Module Info 8 6 Serial port Module Status Mapping tab 8 7 Serial port IO Mapping 8 8 The Serial Port Scanning dialog box for manual communication 8 9 The OPC Server controls Think amp Do projects on a Certified PC 8 10 The OPC CE Server controls Think amp Do projects on Windows CE 8 1 1 The Think amp Do OPC Server dialog box 8 12 The OPC Server Settings dialog 8 13 PHOENIX CONTACT 13 Think amp Do Section 9 Section 10 A 14 PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 8 13 Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 8 19 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Figure 8 23 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 10 1 F
46. Think amp Do 6 74 PHOENIX CONTACT When finished click the OK button to close the Advanced dialog box 6 3 14 Configuring an Event Use the Alarm Event Control screen object to view a list of all logged events Use the follow ing steps to configure this object 1 Click the Alarm Event Control tool to add alarm event control object to your applica tion screen 2 Double click on the new object to open an Object Properties dialog box Object Properties si Replace Hint Control E Type Event Columns Show gridlines Show header Exttranslation WE Figure 6 80 Object Properties Alarm Event Control 3 Click the Type combo box drop down arrow and select Event or Alarm History Event from the list Use most of the same parameters to configure Event objects and Alarm History objects The only difference is that the Selection Group and Priority filters are disabled for the Event type object For details see Configuring an Alarm on page 6 68 6 3 15 Trend Control Development Interface This section describes the development interface and all the settings available to you as you configure the Trend Control object on the screen Although the Trend Control object supports flexible configurations to meet the specific needs of your application most of the settings are set by defaults based on the most com mon interfaces Therefore in many c
47. Writing Tagname Values from Excel Tagname values can be set from within an Excel spreadsheet This is a little more ad vanced You need to write a Visual Basic routine that calls the DDE Poke application which writes a value to another Windows based application the Think amp Do project You ll also need some way to execute the routine for example by clicking a button created on the spreadsheet For example to place an ActiveX Command button on the first cell of the spreadsheet name it CommandButton1 and create the following subroutine Private Sub CommandButton1 Click Set PokeTagname Worksheets Sheet1 Range a2 Set PokeValue Worksheets Sheet1 Range a3 DDE Channel Application DDEInitiate tnd2dde data Application DDEPoke Channel PokeTagname PokeValue Application DDETerminate DDE Channel End Sub 2364 en B 2364 Communications Also put the name of the desired tag to set in cell A2 and the value to set it to in cell A3 When you click the button the subroutine executes and sets the tagname to the value See Excel documentation for more information 8 4 Setting Up Remote Communications You can set up communications between two desktop PCs to remotely run or debug a proj ect see Figure 8 23 The local PC the development system is the one running the devel opment tools The remote PC the Runtime system is the one running the project You can send changes
48. dialog box 6 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Messages opens the Messages Configuration dialog box Messages Configuration Messages Text Foreground Text Blink Estem translation Auto Format Cancel Figure 6 53 The Messages Configuration dialog box Use the parameters on this dialog box as follows e State read only displays the index of individual messages ScreenView num bers this field based on the Read Search Tag type you selected Boolean provides two valid states labeled 0 and 1 Integer provides 255 valid states labeled 1 to 255 LSB provides 32 valid states 32 bits in an integer value labeled O to 31 e Messages specifies the string value message displayed in the list box object You can use tags in messages using the tag syntax e Value specifies a message value matching the specified Read Search Tag value Also the same value written to the write tag f you specify LSB for the Value field ScreenView uses the value specified in the State field for both the Read Search Tag and the write tag e Text Foreground specifies a color for the message text foreground When the Color dialog box displays click on a color to select it and close the dialog box e Text Blink when selected causes the message to blink once per second when it displays Fonts opens the Font dialog bo
49. dialog box to specify the following parameters for the orthogo nal line Line specifies a line style by clicking the No Line Solid Line or Dashed Line but ton Color specifies a line color by clicking the Color button When the Color dialog box opens click a color to select it and then close the dialog box Weight specifies the line width in pixels by typing a number representing the line width into the text box Ellipse Object Co Click the Ellipse tool to draw ellipses chords arcs and rings see the following figures Ellipse Tool Figure 6 30 Oval Chord Arc and Ring The Ring style is particularly useful when you are creating plumbing drawings To create an ellipse use the following steps 1 Click in the drawing area and drag the mouse cursor to create an oval shape 2 Release the mouse button to stop drawing the oval 3 Use the Object Properties dialog box to change the shape to a chord arc or ring 6 28 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Rounded Rectangle Tool a 4 Operator Screen Techniques Double click on the object to view the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Ellipse Style Line Ellipse t Alo Line Color m hos Fill Solid Line t Mo Fill 2 2 Color Dashed Line Figure 6 31 Object Properties Ellipse Use the Object Pro
50. is displayed during the run time data configured in the Value column of the first row from this file is irrelevant This row must always be configured regardless of the object type even for Multistate Pushbutton Only the Text Message and Value columns are mandatory The other columns are optional and the default values will be used if you do not specify any value for them see table fields Text FG Text BG Rec FG Rec BG and Transparent can be configured with the code of the color associated with it The code can be entered direct ly in decimal format e g 255 or in hexadecimal format using the syntax value e g 0000FF fields Text Blink Rec Blink and En Transparent can be configured with Bool ean values or 1 0 Unchecked 1 Checked or with the keywords FALSE or TRUE FALSE Unchecked TRUE Checked Example Error Message 0 16777215 1 8421376 16777215 1 error bmp 0 0 Message Zero 0 0 16777215 0 8421376 16777215 0 0pen bmp 65280 1 Message Ten 10 0 16777215 0 8421376 16777215 0 closed bmp 65280 1 Message Twenty 20 0 16777215 0 8421376 16777215 0 0 0 Message Thirty 30 0 16777215 0 8421376 16777215 0 0 0 Use the Smart Message editor Data Source is Static to configure the messages val ues and colors To do so select the configuration copy it and paste it into an Excel work sheet
51. 1 Figure 6 28 Object Properties Closed Polygon Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the polygon Line specifies a border line style by clicking the No Line Solid Line or Dashed Line button Color specifies a border line color by clicking the Color button When the Color di alog box opens click a color to select it and then close the dialog box Weight specifies the borderline width in pixels by typing a number representing the line width into the text box Fil specifies whether the polygon is filled click No Fill or Fill If you enable the Fill option you can specify a fill Color by clicking on the Color but ton When the Color dialog box displays click a color to select it and close the dialog box Line Object Click the Line tool to draw an orthogonal line in the drawing area as follows 1 Click the left mouse button to set the starting point of the line 2 Dragthe cursor to adjust the line size 3 Click again to place the object PHOENIX CONTACT 6 27 Think amp Do 4 To view the object properties double click on the object The Object Properties dialog box displays as follows Object Properties da Replace Hint Line Line t No Line Color f Solid Line m t Dashed Line Figure 6 29 Object Properties Line Use the Object Properties
52. 2 if internal string buffer overflow Error 3 if string written to data table is truncated because it is longer than the maximum length specified in the data view grid Error 4 if illegal offset into string See Notes on Reading Error Data on page 5 for information on decoding this error SYS 42 ConversionError Indicates the flow chart block the error code and the flow chart number where the last error occurred Conversion errors are generated when converting between different data types and the destination is too small for the value being written to it See Notes on Reading Error Data on page A 5 for information on decoding this error SYS 43 Write Your flow chart or screen can set this bit 1 to cause HetentiveData the runtime project to save retentive data items to disk The runtime system automatically resets this bit after saving the retentive data SYS 44 Reserved44 Read only Reserved for internal use 5 5 45 Reserved45 Read only Reserved for internal use SYS 46 ExtendedFunction Block error code and chart number where last error BlockError occurred Error O if timeout Error 1 to 15 if erroris returned from extended block See Notes on Reading Error Data on page A 5 for information on decoding this error SYS 47 Screeninput All HMI screen data entry is ignored when this value Ignored 1 5 5 48 Reserved48 Read only Reserved for internal use 5 5 49 Reserved49 Read only Reser
53. 7 36 7 9 3 Using the Calculation Block with 7 36 7 9 4 Comparing and Sorting 7 38 SoL Database eh See tained EE 7 39 FAQs SAL Block OVEN IOW e 7 39 7 1 2364 Think amp Do 102 General TaD 7 40 TAOS Mapping 7 44 7 0 4 Whole 7 45 7 10 5 Sorting Order By 7 47 LAOS 7 48 Block for Process 2 444 244 en 7 49 7 2 2364 Math and Data Operations 7 Math and Data Operations 2364 This chapter discusses how to use variables and constants in Think amp Do It begins with an overview of how to view data items and includes details on math functions and string han dling It also includes information on how to use SQL and PID blocks 7 1 Exploring Data Items Data items are a central part of every project they are the variables and constants that con tain project data Data items have tagnames which are names you assign as part of a proj ec
54. Align specifies the alignment for the caption of the button Color specifies the color for the button Multiline permits the caption of the button to be shown in more than one line when checked Wrap Text when checked the object automatically wraps the text when necessary A l Auto gray out turns the caption of the button to gray when the Command dynamic ap plied to the button is disabled by the Disable field 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 31 Think amp Do 6 32 PHOENIX CONTACT Text Tool Text Object Click the Text tool to create text objects as follows 1 Click in the drawing area When a cursor displays you can type a line of text 2 After entering the text string double click on the new text object to view the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Text Caption E Align Center Border Transparent Fonts Background iw Estern translation Figure 6 34 Object Properties Text Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following orthogonal line parameters Caption specifies a text string by typing a caption in the text box Align aligns the text by selecting Left Center or Right from the combo box Fonts specifies a font style for the text by clicking the Fonts button When the Fonts dialog box displays you can specify the following parameters e
55. Communications In the example shown in Figure 8 16 the DDE server transfers data from the flow chart to another Windows based program which then formats the data and prints it This is a typical Think amp Do DDE Server application Compiled flow chart based program program Figure 8 16 Use DDE to communicate with other Windows based programs The DDE server can access remote Windows CE Runtime systems The following example shows a local system with Microsoft Excel accessing a remote Windows CE system Microsoft Excel spreadsheet Figure 8 17 Use Excel and DDE to access a remote Windows CE system The DDE executable file is located in the following path C Program Files Phoenix Contact ThinkKNDo BIN TND2DDE exe 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 8 17 Think amp Do 8 3 1 Introduction to DDE Servers The acronym DDE stands for Dynamic Data Exchange The basis of DDE is a communica tions protocol that allows one Windows based application to send data and commands to another The DDE protocol is part of Microsoft s overall Windows environment design This manual uses the word application in this DDE server discussion to describe a 8 18 PHOENIX CONTACT Windows based program and not the Think amp Do project The DDE server is simply a program to let other applications read and write data from to the database in a running Think amp Do project Think amp Do software includes the TND2DDE
56. Desc Second column Desc 21 pess I Allew sort in runtime Cancel Figure 6 77 The Alarm Event Control Filters dialog box Use the Group field to filter alarm messages by one or more user group s Type the Group number into the text field for example 1 You also can use a comma or a dash to specify more than one group for example 1 3 5 6 Usethe Selection field to filter alarm messages by the Selection text configured on the Alarm worksheet Usethe From and To parameters in the Priority group to filter alarm messages based on priority Type values into the text fields to delimit the priority range Use the Message and or Username text fields the Search col umns group to specify criteria for filtering alarm messages Type atagname message and or user name into the text field for which you want Think amp Do to search Usethe parameters in the Interval group to filter alarm messages by the last x number of messages Latest or based on a period of time Period Usethe parameters in the Initial Sort group to set the default sorting order Select a column type from the Column combo boxes and select Asc or Desc from the drop downs to sort in ascending or descending order Click the Allow sort in runtime check box to enable the sort to occur during runtime Configure tagnames string tags between cur
57. Explorer bar showing the Flow Chart explorer 4 5 Heirarchical sublist list collapsed left expanded right 4 6 Name Flow Chart dialog 4 7 Select the Unused or Simulation check box to move a flow chart 4 8 FlowView showing a new Flow 4 9 Zoom tools in FlowView eese nennen nen 4 11 Open multiple flow charts in FlowView each with its own window 4 12 Decision Compare and Do Loop blocks appear as diamonds 4 15 Sample flow chart with flow lines connecting all blocks 4 17 Compare Block Properties tab 4 18 Use the Screen Attributes dialog box to set up a new screen 4 20 ScreenView development environment 4 21 ScreenView Explorer 4 22 The Object Properties dialog box 4 22 The Replace dialog 0 0 420 20 4 23 The Colors dialog 4 25 The Colors 4 25 The Fill Effects dialog 4 26 Every new flow chart opens with a predefined Enable block 5 4 The Enable Block Expression
58. Logical ID column do one of the following Enter the logical ID number of an existing Comm data item Bring up the Data Item grid and select or define a Comm data item just double click the tagname field Enter the Comm data item tagname and return to lOView In our example the logical ID is COM 1 but itis more convenient to refer to it by the name of the attached device BarCodeData This is stored with the project along with all other data items 1 Code Reader Comm COM 1 BarCodeData Board Info Board Status Mapping Module Infa Module Status Mapping gt Figure 8 7 Serial port I O Mapping tab 8 1 6 Testing Communications After configuring the communications port we recommend doing some simple tests Think amp Do s lOView can perform single transactions by command To conduct a basic serial port check 1 Besurethe communications cable RS 232 RS 422 etc is connected to the external device and that the device is powered and ready 2 Click the Connect button on the toolbar in lOView This only connects Think amp Do to the serial port in the Runtime target not the external device 2364 en B Communications 3 Verify the status bar in the serial device graphic is green status okay If a red status bar indicates an error check to see if that serial port actually exists or if there are inter rupt or address conflicts etc Correct any conflict before continuing the test
59. PHOENIX CONTACT 2 1 6 Data Item Explorer The Data Item Explorer bar fourth on the list shows folders categorizing project data items or variables For a complete discussion of data item types see Tagname Data Types and Formats page 7 6 Data Types LL 1 Axis 121 Byte Comm L Counter 1 Flag 1 Float E Input Number Output Register Sting 28 Timer Data Logging Project Docs Figure 2 7 The Data Items Explorer bar 2 1 7 Other Explorer Bars The Data Logging and Project Docs Explorer bars provide additional capability dis cussed in later chapters 2 2 Selecting a Runtime Target Type When creating a project it is essential to select the type of target for the project at Runtime For many users it will be the same PC on which they are developing the project Others may have remote or embedded controllers To select the Runtime target 1 Click the Project Explorer bar see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 The project information displays in the main ProjectCenter window 2 Inthe Runtime Settings group see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 choose the proper Runtime target from the drop down list If you select one of the Windows options there are additional available options You can choose to have CE Watch run automatically whenever the project runs see Think amp Do CE Watch for Windows CE Tar
60. Push Like Radio Radio T When the value of the tag configured in Feedback is equal to the value of the tag config ured in True Value the state is setto TRUE When the value of the tag configured in Feed back is equal to the value of the tag configured in Tri State the state is set to TRI STATE When none of these conditions are satisfied the state is set to FALSE If the Feedback field is left in blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be used as the Feedback tag The Tri State field must not be configured with the same value as the True Value field nor with an empty string value PHOENIX CONTACT 6 45 Think amp Do Table 6 4 Radio Button Tri State Value Returns Value written to the tag configured in the Tag field when the Current Status user clicks on the object FALSE Value configured in the True Value field TRUE Value configured in the Tri State field TRI STATE Value configured in the True Value field Check Box Object The check box object is useful to create interfaces where the users can chose one option from multiple options on the display Follow these steps to use a check box object 1 Click the Check Box tool to create a check box object on your screen Check Box 2 Click in the drawing area and drag the mouse cursor to draw the check box its la Object Tool bel 3 Release the mouse button when the object is the size you
61. UM SWD EN Think amp Do User manual OGD OO GD GD OGD OO 0D INSPIRING INNOVATIONS User manual UM SWD EN Think amp Do Designation UM SWD EN Think amp Do Revision B Order No This user manual is valid for Designation Version Think amp Do 8 1 PHOENIX CONTACT Order No 2013 06 17 2364 en B Internet Subsidiaries Published by Please observe the following notes User group of this manual The use of products described in this manual is oriented exclusively to qualified application programmers and software engineers who are familiar with the safety concepts of automa tion technology and applicable standards Explanation of symbols used and signal words hazards Obey all safety measures that follow this symbol to avoid possible in This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury jury or death There are three different categories of personal injury that are indicated with a signal word DANGER This indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will re sult in death or serious injury WARNING This indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION This indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury This symbol together with the signal word NOTE and the accompanying text D alert the reader to a situation which may cause damage
62. and then click the OK button The Address fields for Yes and No in the Compare and Decision block Proper ties tabs permit entry of a block number without drawing a connection 3 Toview all block descriptions on the flow chart instead of expressions select the View Block Descriptions menu 2364 en B General Programming Techniques 4 12 Operator Screens Think amp Do provides more than just PC based control with flow charts it includes a full fea tured operator interface or HMI Human Machine Interface Use ScreenView to create op erator screens The remainder of this chapter focuses on the unique features that you need to know to develop HMI screens Windows CE target Runtime systems some devices such as the WinPLC do not have direct screen output available to its operating system The final output of the development work is a screen or series of screens These appear in a window on the PC at Runtime The purpose of a screen is to communicate important in formation to a machine operator or process engineer It also provides an opportunity for op erator controlled input Screens typically include current state of the machine or process such as Idle Run or Stop A Alarm conditions if they exist Production data such as number of parts percentage defects downtime reasons and trends Diagram of process on screen diagram to help orient the operator Sc
63. noise If this field is left in blank the alarm be come normalized as soon as its condition is no longer true Dead Band Time Each alarm maintains a time stamp of the last signifi Combo gt Time Stamp Value cant activity along with the value of the tag at that time You can select the type of activity that updates the time stamp Activation Norm default The time when the dead band ended that is when the alarm be comes activated or normalized Last Tag Change The time when the value of the tag last changed during the dead band Start Condition The time when the dead band started 6 6 2 Math Worksheets Math worksheets let you implement additional routines to work with the basic functions of different ScreenView tasks A Math worksheet contains a group of programming lines that Think amp Do executes as a Background task during runtime You can configure the Math worksheet to provide free environments for logical routines and mathematical calculations needed by the project For these purposes the ScreenView scripting language is very sim ple and easy to use ScreenView sequentially increments the number that identifies the Math worksheet for each newly created worksheet Use one of the following methods to create a new Math worksheet Right click on the Worksheets folder and then select New Math from the pop up menu Select the File New Worksheet Math menu PHOENIX CONTACT
64. Be aware of potential problems with executing Run Program every scan It s easy to inadver tently start a program every scan 5 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 Flow Charts 5 2 14 SQL Block The SQL block provides a dialog box that helps you construct SQL queries for database ac cess 1 7 An enterprise enabled Think amp Do project is one that integrates factory floor control with en terprise level operations and databases related to custom orders inventory parts procure SL ment warehousing shipping and so on The SQL block gives Think amp Do the ability to com municate in realtime over large corporate networks to enterprise systems SQL Block Double click a SQL block to display its expression dialog box see Figure 5 18 which has Button the following tabs General configures the request type record type and query result data items Tag Mappings map record fields to project tagnames Filters Where specify operators and conditions for field names Sorting Order By specifies field names and the sorting order SQL Statement displays the resulting SQL statement cannot be directly edited use the tabs to change the SQL statement 501 Block SQL Statement not Change DB General Tag Mappings Filters where Sorting Order By SQL Statement SDL Request Type SELECT Type f SELECT Get data from DE f Get single record Get first record INSERT Put data in
65. Build and run the project as you normally would When running the project from ProjectCen ter the project actually runs the remote Runtime system using devices that are con nected to the remote system You can connect to a project that is already running on the re mote system If connection and communications are very slow the first time you connect to the Runtime system just disconnect and reconnect to it Performance will be normal All normal online editing and debugging functions work over remote connections You can also run lOView and make offline changes to the I O configuration Because lOView is actually run on the development system you are not able to connect to the I O in real time and create or scan a new configuration 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 8 25 Think amp Do 8 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Building and Running Projects 2364 9 This section informs you about 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Building projects Running projects Executing on remote systems and on Windows CE targets E 9 3 Building a mee T 9 3 IRE 9 4 Adj sting the SCAN intervals 9 5 Stopping a Running 9 6 FUMING amp cc cc CEN 9 6 9 5 1 SOUS RE rora aa 9 7 9 5 2 Windows CE Runtime
66. Compiled Another Program program Figure 8 9 The OPC Server controls Think amp Do projects on a Certified PC 2364 Communications TNDCEOPC EXE Controls Think amp Do projects running under Windows Application Server OPC Client Figure 8 10 The OPC CE Server controls Think amp Do projects on Windows OPC is a standard for communications between software applications The focus is on con trol applications field devices and office automation systems See www opcfoundation org for more information 8 2 1 OPC Client Applications For most applications OPC is a faster and more robust communications link than DDE The OPC Server can handle requests from multiple clients to one Think amp Do project Many pro cess control applications for example Wonderware Intellution GE Cimplicity and Honeywell PlantScape are already OPC compliant For an application to work with an OPC Server it must specifically include OPC client func tionality To use such an application with Think amp Do you will need to map local Think amp Do tagnames to tags in the OPC client See the documentation that shipped with the application for details on mapping Most applications require that you create a property sheet for each tagname whose value is to be retrieved by the server Some terms used in OPC server conventions are ProglD OPC server program ID
67. Do brackets denote array indices Arrays in Think amp Do have either a number value or a fixed integer tag that serves as the in dex The data types available to form an array are Byte Flag Float Number String Timer A single array must consist of data items of only one type The array itself is a single data item of the Array data type The Data Item grid array definitions in ProjectCenter deter mines how you reference array elements such as Level 0 Level 1 etc For example 2364 en B Math and Data Operations by defining the data type as Float the array contains only Float type data items Finally the array size determines the number of elements in the array Since the first index of an array is 0 the maximum index number is size 1 If the project needs to access or display name labels that correspond to an array of scalar values consider creating a string array of the same length as the values array Then use corresponding array index numbers to use the appropriate name labels in conjunction with the values see Figure 7 2 Level Array Tagnames Level Level 1 X Level 2 X Level 3 Day Array Tagnames Figure 7 2 Use a label array with string values that correspond to data values 7 3 1 Defining Arrays To define an array follow these steps 1 In ProjectCenter click the Data Item Explorer bar and then click highligh
68. Do DDE Server Initialised Waiting for DDE Requests Logo is animated during DDE requests Peek Clear Meg Log Figure 8 18 The DDE Server dialog box The logo is animated when DDE requests from a client application are occurring If the logo animation stops the requests have stopped However the link may still be open PHOENIX CONTACT 8 19 Think amp Do 8 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 3 5 Configuring DDE Server Click the Configure button to configure DDE Server The Configure dialog box Figure 8 19 opens Configure Think amp Do DDE Server Update Interval Rate ms eo 20 to 32000 Cancel Reconnect Interval Hate sec 30 1 to 32000 Figure 8 19 The DDE Server Configure dialog box You can set the following Table 8 4 DDE Server Configuration Options Update The rate at which the server sends changing Milliseconds 20 32 000 Interval data to clients Reconnect The amount of time the server will wait before Seconds 1 32 000 Interval trying to reconnect to the Runtime system 8 3 6 Reading and Writing Tagname Values Peek and Poke You can use a Think amp Do DDE Server dialog box to read peek at a data item value in a project This feature is especially useful during project development since it does not re quire configuring a client application to make DDE requests To do a DDE server Peek 1 Fromthe Think amp Do DDE Server dialog box click
69. Local and remote systems communicate using Windows built in messaging called DCOM Distributed Component Object Model This is included as part of Microsoft s Windows XP Vista 7 operating systems To implement a local remote connection both PCs must be configured for this connection Just follow the instructions in Setting Up Remote Commu nications on page 8 23 2364 Before You Begin 1 6 Phoenix Contact Technical Service If you have a question about the Think amp Do and can t find the answer in this manual or the online help system contact Phoenix Contact Technical Service by phone fax e mail or the Web Our staff will give you the advice you need to get the most from the Think amp Do We suggest that you try to duplicate the problem before calling Technical Service During this process write down each step that you perform and any error messages that appear To obtain the best possible support please be at your computer when you call and have the following available This manual The version number on your Think amp Do CD The serial number on your license You can view this by selecting Start Programs Phoenix Contact Think amp Do System Hardware Key Information to display the Head Hardware Key window Windows version number and Service Pack level To find this information select the Control Panel and double click the System icon Information about your computer
70. Peek The Peek dialog box Figure 8 20 opens If the Think amp Do project is not running DDE Server launches the Runtime window from which a pre built project must be opened 2 Type the tagname to check in the field provided Match the syntax of the actual tag name exactly 3 Click the Read Now button If the Think amp Do Runtime project is active and the tag name is valid its value is displayed Note that the Peek display is a single snapshot of the value Click the Read Now button to get fresh data Think amp Do DDE Peek Topic data Relay 1 Quit Value Figure 8 20 The DDE Server Peek dialog box 2364 Communications The Think amp Do Peek tool is handy for resolving problems if a client application is unable to read a tagname value Also check the message log window as well Some client applications are not able to pass through tagnames that include spaces in the middle of them Use the underline character _ as an alternative character Be sure to es tablish tagnames appropriately if planning on allowing a client application to read the val ue through DDE Server The client may have a tagname syntax requirement For example Excel requires single quotes around tags with spaces 8 3 7 Reading and Writing Tagname Values with External Programs Use an Excel spreadsheet or another Windows based DDE compliant application for ex ample Visual Basic
71. Popup style windows Border selects a border style Choose None default specifies no border and does not allow a title bar or resizing Thin specifies a thin border window that cannot be resized during runtime Resizing specifies a normal border that can be resized during runtime Don t Redraw specifies a tag or value to control how screen dynamics are refreshed Specifying a value higher than zero disables all screen dynamics Screen Logic area when selected executes mathematical functions in one or more of these events On Open While Open On Close After enabling an event click on the corresponding button to open a dialog box where you can enter the following information Tag specifies a tagname to receive a return value from the Expression column Expression specifies a mathematical expression or function to be performed The return value is applied to the Tagname field Trigger While Open dialog box only Type a tag to work as a trigger any value change to execute this worksheet If you leave this field blank Think amp Do exe cutes the worksheet in the minimum time slice your system can perform PHOENIX CONTACT 6 113 Think amp Do 6 5 Screen Groups The Screen Groups folder combines individual display screens from the Screens folder into groups that appear concurrently on the display screen at runtime This lets you create a display that uses common components such as a
72. Preview Figure 6 13 The Edit Image dialog box Erase Area Click the Erase Area tool to remove a selected area from the screen Change Colors Click the Change Colors tool to change the transparent fill color for a selected area Before you can use this tool you should have already specified a fill color Fill Color tool se lected a transparent color Select Transparent Color tool and defined the area to fill Select Area tool Select Transparent Color Click the Select Transparent Color tool to specify a transparent color referenced by the Change Colors tool Toggle Transparent Color Click the Toggle Transparent Color tool to cause the color selected using the Select Trans parent Color tool to become transparent for bitmaps selected in the Bitmap Screen Editor You can use the Copy lt Ctrl gt lt C gt and Paste lt Citrl gt lt V gt commands to exchange bit map pictures between ScreenView s Bitmap Screen Editor and any other bitmap editor for example Paint Brush PHOENIX CONTACT 6 15 Think amp Do gt Property Tool 6 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 3 8 Using the Dynamic Objects Toolbar Use the Dynamic Properties toolbar to apply dynamics to objects or a group of objects Dy namics enable you to modify object properties on the fly during runtime according to tag values Some dynamics also enable you to execute commands or insert values Set points to the tags
73. ProgID ThinkKNDo OPCDA 1 for a Certified PC Runtime ThinkNDoCE OPCDA 1 for CE Runtime DataType tagname This is the item naming convention used by the Think amp Do OPC Server For example a counter with the tagname PartCount is designated in the OPC client as Counter PartCount CEstationname DataType tagname Windows CE systems use the tag mapping format of CE station name DataType Tagname For example a WinPLC might be accessed by WinPLC1 Output Relay1 This format easily allows an OPC client running on a Certified PC to access the Think amp Do Windows CE OPC Server ThinkKNDoCE OPCDA That server can then get tagname values from many Windows CE units for example ten WinPLCs on a network 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 8 11 Think amp Do OPC tagnames permit alphanumeric characters as do Think amp Do tagnames Some appli cations are case sensitive or have case requirements for tagnames Check the documen tation for the client application you are using OPC clients may need to access data from a Think amp Do project on the local system same PC as the client or on a remote Runtime system such as Windows CE Runtime systems or another remote PC If your Runtime system has not been configured for remote com munications you may need to set up remote communications before using the OPC Serv er see Setting Up Remote Communications on page 8 23 8 2 2 OPC Explorer The Canadian company M
74. Starting data item is the MSB The Ending data is the LSB PHOENIX CONTACT 17 21 Think amp Do Moving Analog Values Analog values begin as numbers signed or unsigned by the proper mapping in lOView analog channel may have 8 12 or 16 data bits with or without a sign bit Bipolar voltage inputs typically use sign bits Once converted to a number analog data can be handled as any other number Floating point representation is especially useful when representing data in real world engineering units for operator interface and data entry Converting and scaling raw analog data to floating point data items in engineering units is very useful See Handling Analog Values on page 7 30 for details on how to map scale and convert analog values 7 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Math and Data Operations Move Summary 7 6 4 The following table defines all possible Move Block combinations Moves that are valid for individual data items are also valid in arrays You may also move data to Inputs when the flow chart is a Simulation type Move Block summary 4 Table 7 _ 2 A 5 5 5 55554 2 4 4 99998995090909090990999900 A SERRE SDS SESS SESS _ SERRE Seo gt gt 2 gt 2s fe fs fs fs es Le fs Js fs fs a
75. The loop executes the blocks you insert within it each scan until the Compare block ex pression is satisfied TRUE if the loop exit is Yes FALSE if the loop exit is 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 5 17 Think amp Do block s within the Do Loop cannot have an exit point that connects to another point outside the Do Loop In other words the Compare block at the bottom of the loop is the only valid loop exit point Tochange the Compare block to a Decision block right click on the Compare block and then select Change this Compare block to a Decision block from the pop up menu Be aware that looping an extremely large number of times can cause logic solve time to exceed the specified scan interval for the project The Do Loop has a user defined maximum loop count defaultz1 as a safety exit to prevent an infinite loop at runtime You should not use it as a normal loop exit method To set a maximum loop count 1 While in Selection Mode double click the Do Loop block to open the Do Loop Block Expression tab 2 Enter the maximum value in the field provided and click the OK button After defining the Maximum Loop Count the Do Loop block displays that value as shown in Figure 5 11 Figure 5 11 Do Loop block showing Maximum Loop Count 5 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 Flow Charts 5 2 10 Motion Block Think amp Do s integrated motion control provides a programming interfac
76. Think amp Do 6 106 Both the Edit Paste From and Insert Linked Symbol menus begin navigation with the Application Symbol folder see Figure 6 107 on page 6 105 To reach the System Symbols folder navigate to the drive Program Files Phoenix Contact ThinkKNDo HMI Symbol folder Once the symbol is inserted you can manipulate it like any other object in the screen You can align and distribute it with other objects and you can apply dynamic properties to it However the first thing to do is complete the custom properties for this instance of the Mas ter Symbol Specifying Custom Properties To specify custom properties for a symbol follow these steps 1 Double click the symbol to open the Object Properties dialog box for the symbol Object Properties 2 Replace Hint Linked Symbol Name CheckBoxes sym Use linked size Category Display properties fram categories Property Value Optian 1 Option Caption optioni Tag Figure 6 109 Object Properties Linked Symbol 2 Click the Expand button to open the Symbol Properties dialog box The dialog box that appears displays all available custom properties for the symbol Symbol Properties Category Property Option1 Caption Optioni Tag Option2Caption Option 1 2 Option3Caption Option 1 Option3Tag RectangleCaption Caption Displ
77. Think amp Do A 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 Section 1 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 2364 4 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Table 6 7 Table 6 8 Table 6 9 Table 6 10 Table 6 11 Table 6 12 Table 6 13 Table 6 14 Table 6 15 Table 6 16 Table 6 17 Table 6 18 List of Tables Manual Conventions for Keyboard Command 1 5 FCI D gt OUNCES m Er 1 6 Object Properties dialog box properties 4 23 Object Properties Replace dialog box parameters 4 24 Valid Enable Block Expressions 5 5 Valid Compare Block 5 12 Valid Decision Block 5 16 MOVES 5 22 Begin and Call Block Parameter Relationships 5 30 Available Grid Data Source 6 40 Radio Button Normal Mode States 6 45 Radio Button Normal Mode States 6 45 Radio Button Tri
78. To edit the screen script for a screen right click on the screen and then select the Screen Script menu to display the screen script in a tab in the ScreenView workspace This interface can be used to execute logic on the following events based on pre config ured subroutines Screen OnOpen The code configured within this sub routine is automatically exe cuted just once when its screen is open Screen WhileOpen The code configured within this sub routine is automatically ex ecuted continuously while its screen is open The rate in which this sub routine is called depends on the performance of the platform where the application is running PHOENIX CONTACT 6 135 Think amp Do Screen OnClose The code configured within this sub routine is automatically execut ed just once when the screen is closed The variables and procedures declared in this interface are available for the VBScript inter faces of the screen where the screen script is configured Do NOT change the name of the pre configured sub routines If you do the system will be unable to them automatically The procedures and or variables created in this interface have local scope they can be accessed only from the specific screen where they are implemented For an example see the VBScript Screen Scripts topic in the Think amp Do help 6 136 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Math and Data Operations Section This section informs you abo
79. array elements by clicking View Arrays Automatically menu If the project has a lot of ar rays you may want to disable this feature to improve update times App Tracker automatically saves custom watch windows with the project for use the next time the project is opened 10 1 4 Using AppTracker With AppTracker you can observe and change data values in the running project to help debug problems and verify logic Data Formats Data values can be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal From the AppTracker main menu click View Decimal or View Hex menus All data items are displayed in the watch window in the same format Forcing I O With a Chart or Watch tab selected you can force an input output or flag data item to a specified value The term force has special meaning and usefulness in digital control sys tems While debugging a project the ability to override the current value of a data item can speed up the process To force a data item value select it in the Watch window and then pull down the Edit menu Three options are available Table 10 1 Force Options Force Turns on a data item sets 1 continuously This overrides any flow charts or screen objects attempting to change the value Force OFF Turns off a data item sets 0 continuously This overrides any flow charts or screen objects attempting to change the value Unforce Cancels the effect of either a Force ON or a Force OFF f
80. box and the Legend Plate Color if an indicator or the Button Color if a button e Caption specifies text for the top middle and bottom lines by position of the but ton Alternatively if the button style includes an indicator the legend plate e Fonts opens the Font dialog box which you can use to specify or change the message font characteristics for each state e Text Blink specifies whether the text you specified blinks and how fast it blinks for each state None no blinking default Slow and Fast Unlike a blinking color blinking text appears and disappears e Write Value fields specify a value When the pushbutton is in the appropriate state or Closed ScreenView writes this value to the tag specified in the Tag Exp field Object Properties dialog box 6 3 12 Using the Align and Distribute Toolbar The Align and Distribute toolbar provides tools that allow you to edit screen objects e B e Boe aa Figure 6 59 The Align and Distribute toolbar Resize Tools Use the following toolbar options for resizing Click the Resize width tool to set the width of all selected objects to the width of the last object selected the object with the filled handles You can use the Resize width tool to resize one selected object by setting its width equal to its height Click the Resize height tool to set the he
81. data types with either simple arithmetic or transcendental functions such as sine log etc By editing the Calculation Block dialog box see Figure 2 2 you select the math opera tions the block performs as well as the data types of the two operands and the result Calculation Block Expression Properties Calculation noe Hevea Mabie Validate Math builder Operators Data items Basic math Add to calculation ES EX EJ Edd Data item Bitwise Functions and mot sor s gt gt Math l Cancel Help Figure 5 3 The Calculation Block Expression tab PHOENIX CONTACT 5 5 Think amp Do 5 6 PHOENIX CONTACT The Calculation Block Expression tab features a Calculation field The Calculation field lets you enter an equation producing one result which can be a function of several vari ables The result and variables which comprise the expression must be defined in the tag name database You may define the tagnames in advance or just click Find drop down button to go to the Data Item Grid to create and or select the variable You can also use the Data Items group to enter or select data items Follow these steps 1 Select the data item from the drop down list 2 Doone of the following Enter the data item name in the Data Item field While typing Think amp Do att
82. each time they Zoom In off click on the Trend area Zoom Out Allows the user to zoom out each time they 0 Zoom Out on click on the Trend area 1 Zoom Out off 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 87 Think amp Do Table 6 12 ScreenView Toolbar Icons Cancel Zoom Cancel the Zoom selection When the Activa tion Tag changes Launches an embedded dialog box where the user can modify the Legend main set tings value e g tog gles this com mand is exe Legend Properties cuted Pen Style Launches an embedded dialog box where Don user can modify the style of the selected Add Pen 2 s a dialog box where the user can add a new pen to the Trend object Hemove Pen Removes the selected pen from the Trend object Multiple Switches the Y scale to Multiple Sections 0 Multiple Sec section for each pen or Single Section all tions on 1 Multi pens share the same Y scale section ple Sections off Cursor Turns the cursor ruler to visible or hidden O Cursor on 1 Cursor off Auto Scale Changes the Y axis scale to fit all values When the Activa from the pens that are currently being tion Tag changes monitored value e g tog gles this com mand is exe cuted Sections Legend specifies the commands available in the embedded Legend Available cpom mands are described in Table 6 13 Table 6 13 ScreenView Legend Icons ECCL BL Selection Launches a dialog
83. make sure the target station runtime station has the same ActiveX properly registered The Think amp Do application files in clude links to the ActiveX controls however the installation of these controls on the target station must be executed manually Consult your ActiveX provider for further information about how to install When configuring applications with ActiveX for CEView make sure that the ActiveX con trol used in the application is supported on the platform Windows CE operating system and process type where you intend to run the application Consult your ActiveX provider for further information about the supported platforms 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Double click the ActiveX control to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties da Replace Hint ActiveX Control Control Windows Player vWindowsMediaPlayer Enable Focus Property Pages Configuration Figure 6 41 Object Properties ActiveX Control The Object Properties dialog box displays the name of the ActiveX control Generally each ActiveX control is either a dll or a ocx file registered in your local computer You must assign a name alias to the ActiveX control for the application in the Name field e g MyControl This name is used to reference the object when configuring the ActiveX func tions in the ScreenView scripting language Do not configure two ActiveX control
84. 1 797 308 64 bit IEEE 2147483648 2147483647 Data items that belong to an array have the properties of their data type See the appro priate row on the chart for the array s data items To enable counters select the Project Settings menu in ProjectCenter and then check the Enable Counter data type check box 2364 2364 Math and Data Operations You can write to inputs in simulation mode and with AppTracker 7 2 1 Data Type Descriptions The following list describes the data types in the table above Knowing this information is important in choosing the best data type for each tagname in the project A general guide line is to choose the data type that preserves the accuracy or format of the data it contains Array The Array data item specifies an indexed range of data items of type Byte Flag Float Number String or Timer The elements in an array are unique to that array and are not members of the standard data types by the same name Array elements are only accessible to flow charts and screens via the array s tagname and index number of the element for ex ample Array Index where Index is an integer constant or number Axis Axis data items represent motors axes to which motion commands are applied They must be mapped to physical I O in lOView If they are not mapped the specified motion command does not operate at project Runtime Byte Byte data ite
85. 13 The ToolBar c 6 13 Tine Bitmap toolbar 6 14 The Edit Image dialog 6 15 The Dynamic Properties 6 16 Object Properties 6 16 Object Properties Hyperlink sees 6 17 Object Properties BarGraph 6 18 Object Properties Text 1 6 19 Object Properties 6 20 The Color Limits dialog 6 21 Object Properties Position 6 22 Object Properties 2 6 23 Object Properties Rotation Property 6 23 The Mode toolbar udeiusect Gre ipae doit turer ata ours adant 6 24 PHOENIX CONTACT A 9 Think amp Do A 10 PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure
86. 2 3 Renaming Duplicating Deleting or Printing a Screen To rename duplicate delete or print an existing operator screen 1 Move the cursor over the name of the screen inthe Screens explorer pane 2 Right click and select the desired action from the context menu Before creating a new screen in a new project it s best to name the project first by saving it to a new directory Think amp Do allows only one project per directory 6 2 4 Opening a Screen open an existing screen double click the screen icon graphic by the name of the screen or the name itself in the Screens Explorer bar 6 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques 6 3 ScreenView Development Environment ScreenView appears in an independent window that provides a complete screen develop ment environment The drawing area is the work space for placing screen objects Figure 6 2 This section describes the major elements of the development environment Title bar be iew Menu bar ScreenView Sortation Example pdb Edit View Project Window Help x 10 OR Z7 Ns mM LI OW Qu Screens 5 1 MAIN a Screen 0 Screen Groups Worksheets Alarm001 Mathi 25 Recipel 25 Reporti ScreenView Schedulerl Trend Explorer jg Scripts Toolbars gt cx EB IX Toolbars X 631 Y 223
87. 8 3 5 Configuring DDE Server 8 20 8 3 6 Reading and Writing Tagname Values Peek and Poke 8 20 8 3 7 Reading and Writing Tagname Values with External Programs 8 21 Setting Up Remote 8 23 8 4 1 ert oa usse cn duces 8 24 8 4 2 Development System Setup 8 8 25 8 4 3 Synchronize PC Time of Day 5 8 25 8 4 4 Connect to the Remote System 8 25 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 1 Think amp Do 8 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Communications 8 Communications 2364 Add Driver Button Think amp Do projects can communicate with a number of external devices and with other pro grams A project can read the status of and control other devices through the Runtime tar get s serial port and expansion slots It can also read from and send information to other pro grams using one of several communication standards 8 1 Serial Port Communications The serial communications COM port on the Runtime target provides a convenient way for a Think amp Do project to communicate with various external devices These include bar code readers weigh scales message displays and printers While most I O systems use dedi cated high speed PC interface cards Think amp Do can also utili
88. Alarm Event double click on the object to open the Alarm Event Control Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Marm Event Control Type a H Fonts Filters wn Alarm Online m Columns Advanced E Sign Show gridlines Show header i Exttranslation WK Figure 6 73 Object Properties Alarm Event Control Available configuration options in this dialog box for alarm events are Show gridlines displays gridlines in the object Activation Time Tag Name Message With Grid Without Grid ib Activation Time Tag Name Message Figure 6 74 Displaying a Grid on an Alarm Event Control 2364 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Show Header displays a header on the object 4 Activation Time Tag Name Message With Header Without Header Figure 6 75 Displaying a Header on an Alarm Event Control Win selects a background color for the alarm control object Click the color box to open the color palette pop up then simply click a color to select it Ext translation enables the external translation of alarm messages when a translation file is specified via scripting E Sign prompts the user to enter the Electronic Signature before executing the dy namic VK defines a Virtual Keyboard type used for this object You need to enable the Virtual Keyboard option using the Project Settings Runtime Deskt
89. Background BMP Width 1279 Top D 0 Height 997 Lett m 5 0 Hide Runtime Properties Screen Logic Style Replace Partial Border Mone Don t redraw Focus W Hecerve focus on open Tab Order 0 Figure 6 122 Screen Attributes dialog box Share tab order with other screens Use the parameters on the Screen Attributes dialog box as follows Description specifies a description of the screen attribute for documentation purpos es The text you enter in this field displays in the status bar by default located at the bottom left of the screen when you are in Run Application mode Background Picture area specifies the following parameters for the background e Enable background check box when selected enables the use of background bit maps The default is unselected e Enable Background combo box lets you select one of the following Windows 2K XP Vista background options e BMP e JPG e DXF e PCD EPS e PNG e FAX e TIF e FMF e TGA e FPX e WMF e IMG WPG 2364_en_B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Windows CE supports BMPs only Size area allows specification of an integer number in the Width and or Height boxes to specify the size in pixels of the selected window Location area allows specification of an integer number in the Top and or Left fields to specify the location of the window in
90. Center Horizontally amp a Tool is a Before Center After Center Horizontally Horizontally Figure 6 65 Centering objects horizontally Click the Evenly distribute horizontally tool to put an equal amount of horizontal space H between a series of objects two or more For an example see the following figure a a Rel Evenly arzoni m gt 9 Horizontally Tool Before Evenly After Evenly Distributing Horizontally Distributing Horizontally Figure 6 66 Distributing objects horizontally 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 63 Think amp Do Evenly Distribute Horizontally Tool u Flip Horizontally Tool l 6 64 PHOENIX CONTACT Click the Evenly distribute vertically tool to put an equal amount of vertical space be tween a series of objects two or more For an example see the following figure gt a e Before Evenly After Evenly Distributing Vertically Distributing Vertically Figure 6 67 Distributing objects vertically The distribution tools may move the last object selected with solid handles by no more than a few pixels to equally space all of the objects Flip Horizontally Tool Click the Flip Horizontally tool to invert the selected object horizontally The object rotates around an imaginary line through its horizontal center until it is a mirror image of the original object For example see the following figure oe od Before F
91. Color 1 m WE Disable Figure 6 45 Object Properties Grid Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the Grid Data Source selects the data source type The object supports three data sources as shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Available Grid Data Source types Text File Displays data from a text file in the ASCII or Unicode format e g CSV text files Class Tag Displays values from a Class Tag where the members of the tag are fields columns of the Grid object and each array position is one row of the grid object Not currently supported Database Displays data from an SQL Relational Database using ADO ActiveX Database Object to exchange data with the database 5 when selected the user will be prompted to enter an electronic signature be fore entering or modifying data on the object VK selects a Virtual Keyboard type used for this object The option Use Default se lects the default Virtual Keyboard configured on the Project Settings Runtime Desk top interface You can also specify a different virtual keyboard for this Grid object 2364 en B 2364 Combo Box Tool Operator Screen Techniques Security specifies the security system access level required for the object dynamic Disable specifies an expression in this field to disable data in
92. Contact Technical Service 1 11 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 1 1 Think amp Do 1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Before You Begin 1 Before You Begin Welcome to Think amp Do Version 8 an integrated control environment that lets you do more with a given PC platform It supports development deployment and operation of high value automated control systems for material handling and manufacturing Like all Phoenix Contact products Think amp Do provides an intuitive open architecture environment that readily integrates with hardware and software components from virtually all major suppliers Projects created with Think amp Do integrate seamlessly with enterprise information systems to provide valuable data about system operation Major components of Think amp Do are ProjectCenter provides ready access to all project elements and the fully integrated tagname database using the Data Item Explorer FlowView where you create control logic ScreenView where you create HMI screens View used to configure project a fast graphical debugger Runtime Engine provides a robust deterministic project execution environment Think amp Do makes it easy to target your project to the Microsoft Windows operating sys tem that best suits your needs Whether you create a project for a Windows based PC or Windows CE based system scaling for a different
93. Data Value 10 8 2364 en B B Index A 4 3 Administrator privileges 8 23 Analog value 7 32 Analog VAISS cise s idet 7 22 7 30 AppTracker Chart TAD csse eee 10 5 o Og fe 10 10 vc 10 7 T 10 3 Monitor and Edit 10 13 Monitoring a 7 15 Statisties LAD MET 10 6 Stepped flow chart execution 10 11 Watch WINGOWS P 10 6 7 7 p T 7 9 Shift and rotate 7 24 Uriderstenailhi ien Ente 7 8 AXIS dala tVDO eie 7 7 Beg p 5 27 Begin 1 111222 5 28 Interaction with Call block 5 30 Bitwise operators cessere 7 28 Block COMING AS NEED 4 18 Multiple selection eese 4 13 4 13 Boolean operators 7 28 Branching Mt TE 4 3 BICAKDOINUS 10 11 Byte
94. Dem amp mam Module View O bases concentrators Field devices Ethernet flor 0 Slot 2 Slot 2 EtherHet Control Board View Total Bases 1 ler I O Controller 4 O scanner INTERBUS Base 1 cards Board 1 e Motion cards Windows CE target systems Refresh Grid fAutomattiondirect com Ethernet 9 i Timeout Value for Retries ms 10 Hetries On Communication Error Base Watchdog Action Watchdog Timeout Yalue ms 1000 Zero Last StartUp ShutDown Output State Configuration Check At Startup Ho Always Scan Yes No BE O 2449 Bnard Status Mapping Module Infa Module Status Mapping 120 Mapping For Help press F1 Figure 3 3 lOView window includes a board view module view and tab view The general steps required to configure and map an network are 1 Ifa scanner card is available install it in the PC along with the required driver software that came with the card 2 Add the appropriate driver for the I O network or scanner card associated with the Board View I O controller the I O controller may be an I O scanner or network card or a Windows CE Runtime target 3 Dooneofthe following devices are available a Connect the scanner card to the I O devices on the network and build a phys ical network 3 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 Drivers Devices and Tags b Use Auto Discovery
95. Do uses to increase and decrease the object size Reference combo boxes select one of the following reference points to determine how the object increases size horizontally and vertically e Left is the left corner of the object e Right is the right corner of the object e Center is the center of the object e Top is the upper corner of the object e Bottom is the lower corner of the object Rotation Property Click the Rotation tool to rotate a line Double click on the line to open the Object Prop erties dialog box Object Properties E m Bd Tag Espression 0 Range Rotation degrees Miniman Start Left Top Maximum End 0_ Figure 6 23 Object Properties Rotation Property PHOENIX CONTACT 6 23 Think amp Do Selection Tool Bitmap Editor Tool B Fill Color Tool 6 24 PHOENIX CONTACT Use this dialog box to specify the following parameters Tag Expression field specifies a tagname or expression to associate with the selected line Think amp Do reads the value represented on the screen using this variable or ex pression Range area specifies Minimum and Maximum tag values used to move the line throughout the screen according to the established condition Rotation degrees area specifies starting and ending values to specify how many de grees to rotate
96. File New Subchart menu Fromthe FlowView main menu select the File New Subchart menu 2 Either action displays a dialog that prompts you to name the subchart After naming it the subchart appears in the Subchart folder in ProjectCenter s Flow chart explorer and an empty subchart appears in FlowView 5 3 1 Blocks for Subcharts When creating a subchart the first block must be a Begin block and the last one a Return block FlowView creates these blocks for you Naturally the remainder of the subchart you create must go between and connect to these two blocks There can be only one Begin and Heturn block for a subchart they cannot be copied pasted or deleted The properties of the Begin block determine how the subchart communicates with flow charts that call it In discussing subcharts we use the word parameters in a special sense Figure 5 20 shows a representation of how data values pass between calling and called programs as parame ters Flow charts call subcharts and pass parameters by reference or value When passed by reference the subchart is actually reading and writing the data item used by the calling flow chart When passed by value the subchart receives the value of the calling parameter at the time of the call The subchart uses a local copy that does not directly impact the calling flow chart s data When the subchart reaches its first loopback point its execution pauses for the current scan The call
97. Font typeface e Font style e Size e Effects e Color e Script e Border specifies a text border by clicking the Border box To select a border color click the Color rectangle When the Color dialog box dis plays click a color to select it then close the dialog box Background specifies a background color by clicking the Color button When the Color dialog box displays click a color to select it then close the dialog box Transparent check box enables check this option to not show the background color Disable uncheck to show the background color Extern translation optional enables translation of the text when a translation file is specified via scripting 2364 en B 2364 Rectangle Tool Operator Screen Techniques Rectangle Object Click the Rectangle tool to create rectangles as follows 1 Click in the drawing area and drag the mouse cursor to draw the rectangle 2 Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the size you want 3 Double click on the object to view the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Rectangle Border Fill Type Solid No Fill d Color fe Fill Color m Weight e Caption Figure 6 35 Object Properties Rectangle Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the orthogo nal line
98. Grid Data Text File dialog box to enter the name of the text file that holds the data points see Data Source Text File on page 6 97 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Points The Points button on the Trend Control Object Properties dialog box launches the Points dialog box Figure 6 83 The Trend Control Points dialog box The value of each data point can be represented the Trend Control object as a pen during the runtime You can select which data points will be visible during the runtime add remove pens to the chart regardless of how many data points you associate with the Trend Control object The properties of each data point are Point specifies the Data Point ID Each data Point has a unique ID which is assigned automatically when the data point is created in this interface Label specifies the label associated with the Data Point can be displayed on the Leg end during the runtime providing a short reference to the user for each data point Color specifies the color of the pen used to draw the values of the Data Point on the Trend Control object Data Source specifies the data source that holds the values for the data point The Data Source Tag is available by default See Data Sources for further information about how you can make additional data sources available for the object Tag Field value depends the Da
99. Mapping For Help press F1 Figure 3 6 IOView showing the Module Info tab for selected module 3 4 1 Manually Adding an I O Module To manually add an I O module or device follow these steps 1 Select the driver in the Board view of the lOView 2 Click the Devices Add menu or click the Add Devices toolbar button to display the Add Insert Device Type dialog box This dialog box has one or more drop down lists depending on the type of driver the device connects to 3 Choose the device from the drop down list and make any other selections required 4 Click the OK button to display a picture of the device module in lOView Add Device Button PHOENIX CONTACT 3 9 Think amp Do Remove Device Button 3 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 4 2 Editing an I O Module To select a module and view its I O configuration follow these steps 1 Click the module image in the module view pane of lOView When selected the module outline has a red border 2 Click the tabs in the tab view area to see information about the selected module The four colored bars above the I O base form a legend to help interpret the indicator status bars located on each module Each module s status bar is green if the selected module is okay The image of the base in the figure has more slots than the base which is used in the I O system lOView uses the maximum slot count when the base status information does not include slot count
100. Mid source start location len where Result is the string data item that receives the substring source is the string to be searched start location is the zero based position in the source string where the substring begins len is a fixed integer or number data item that determines the number of characters in the substring result If len is less than or equal to zero it defaults to the remaining length of the source string If the start location is greater than the length of the source string the function returns a NULL string The start location and len parameters may independently be either a number a con stant or a function entered in the expression Left and Right Functions The Left and Right functions extract and return the N left most or right most characters from a string as a substring The number of characters N is specified in the substring The format of the expression in the Calculation field is Hesult Left source num or Result Right source num where Result is the string data item that receives the substring found source is the string to be searched num determines the number of characters in the substring result Len Function The Len function returns an integer equal to the length number of characters of a string data item The format of the expression in the Calculation field is Result Len source where Result is the number data item
101. ON or OFF 5 Click the OK button Yes No Path Selection By default the connection that goes out the bottom of the Decision block is the Yes path the exit on the right is the No path The Decision Block Expression tab permits adding a block Description and swapping the positions the Yes and No exit paths another way is to right click a block and then select Swap Yes No Connectors from the pop up menu Entering the block Number in the Yes or No group explicitly sets or modifies the target block of the Yes or No connector Decision Block Summary Table 5 3 defines all possible Decision block combinations Moves that are valid for individ ual data items are also valid in arrays You may also move data to Inputs when the flow chart is a Simulation type PHOENIX CONTACT 5 15 Think amp Do Valid Decision Block Comparisons Table 5 3 Can move up to 2 4 8 13 32 or 64 data items poms PEERED ERED EBD ES ED 0 vn Reo SESS SES 20 BERR SSE _ BEES SERBS OSS Ree __ ETE TEETER EDEN SS CVC _ SERRE SSE SESE SESS hehehehehehe PERE bpe h e 22 e e s _ eeehe eere eei 5 O o S 5 m gt
102. PC use data for the topic name When the client needs to connect to a remote Windows CE target use the network name of the target Windows CE Runtime station for the topic name Table 8 1 DDE Server Address Structure Windows CE Device TND2DDE 2364 en B 2364 Communications The client program uses these three pieces of information when requesting data from the server application Each of the three are progressively specific in the addressing conven tion Some examples of DDE addressing follow Table 8 2 Client and server applications on a local Certified PC agnam TND2DDE ProductionTotal Formulas such as the Excel type create an address with field separators TND2DDE Data ProductionT otal Table 8 3 Client and server applications for a remote Windows CE system Excel TND2DDE ProductionTotal Formulas such as the Excel type create an address with field separators In this example the client is accessing a remote WinPLC named WinPLC1 TND2DDEIWinPLC1 ProductionT otal 8 3 4 Launching the DDE Server You can start the Think amp Do DDE server by selecting Start Programs Phoenix Contact Think amp Do DDE Server The main dialog box Figure 8 18 opens when starting DDE Server It lets you Configure the server View the status of Think amp Do data items Clear the message log Quit exit the program ira Think amp Do DDE Server Think amp
103. Raw analog values value 0 to 4095 3201 2120 F Block The diagram above shows the data path from the analog input to the scaled value Analog outputs work the same way but in reverse Use Float floating point data items to store scaled values because they preserve fractional numbers and can represent extremely large or small quantities Note that data items including Floats do not store in engineering units that s simply a result of having a quantity that relates to standardized units Scaling can be done a single Calculation block using the equation for a line y b where x is the raw analog value y is the scaled value m is the slope of the line b is the offset or y intercept point In the example above you compute the slope m by evaluating _ Ay _ 212 32 _ 0 04396 The y intercept point b is 32 The graph below plots the line equation 0 04396 x 32 212 0 Float 32 0 0 Number 4095 raw analog Input 2364 Math and Data Operations Plug the equation into a Calculation block as shown in Figure 7 12 Calculation Block Degrees_F 0 04396 Temp_Input 32 E 8 Expression Properties Calculation Find henress F 0 04196 pemp Input Se E 2 Validate Math builder Operators Data items Basic math Type Number Add to calculation
104. Scheduler worksheet is divided into two areas Header area top section which contains information for the whole group Body area bottom section where you define each tag expression and condition for the group Use the header parameter on this worksheet as follows Description specifies a description of the worksheet for documentation purposes 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Use the body parameters on this worksheet as follows Event selects an event type from the following e Calendar generates time bases greater than 24 hours For example you can define an event that prints a report every Friday at a specific time sure to complete the Date field if you want a specific date for event execution e Clock generates time bases smaller than 24 hours intervals in minutes or sec onds This function is frequently used with trend graphics For example you can define a tag that will be incremented each hour e Change relates to a change in value of a tag in the Trigger field Trigger specifies a tag that starts a change event related to a change in tag values When the Trigger tag changes Think amp Do returns the value specified in the Value field to the tag This field is used only by the change event Time specifies a time interval in which an event must occur when used by the clock hours 0 to 23 minutes 0 to 59 and seconds 0 to 59 You also can use this field t
105. Series of bits S aiarwalue In this example Think amp Do moves eight bits it doesn t have to be just eight into a single number The individual bits represent a range of eight adjacent data items of the same data type These could be flags or I O points etc The Move block action assigns the proper bi nary value to each bit when it moves the data It is not necessary for the series of bits to have a particular binary weighting that is 2 where x is the position number of the bit counting from the right and starting with zero The Move applies the weighting to the result when the data moves See Move Summary on page 7 23 for the number of data items that can be moved be tween various data types PHOENIX CONTACT 7 19 Think amp Do 7 20 PHOENIX CONTACT Moving Discrete Inputs to a Number In the following example the MSB and LSB notations define a range of bits data items within the entire range of data items of that type This range does not have to begin end on byte or word boundaries so a lot of flexibility exists The Move extracts the data items within the specified range 00000101 assigns the binary weighting and produces the correct re sult 5 FROM TO MSB LSB 1 1 1 0 Series of bits Scalar value Suppose you have an 8 bit speed sensor input on discrete inputs 1 0 to 1 7 You will need to bring the bits in as an 8 bit number The Move Block Expression tab in Figure
106. Settings 9 8 Think amp Do CE Watch for Windows CE Targets 9 9 9 6 1 Security Menu nennen nnns 9 12 Instant Recall for Windows CE Target 9 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 9 1 Think amp Do 9 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Building and Running Projects 9 Building and Running Projects Build Project Toolbar Button 2364 This chapter shows how to prepare a project to build and then run it Note that this chapter discusses running a project not just a flow chart Running a Think amp Do project means run ning all of its flow charts HMI screens and other optional associated programs For more information on HMI screens see Section 6 Operator Screen Techniques It cov ers data entry and many other topics on HMI screen creation 9 1 Building a Project Before running a project you must build an executable version of it That s also called com piling a project To compile a new project 1 Open the project in ProjectCenter If the project is already open save it before continuing 2 Select the Project Build Project menu or click the button on the toolbar Build com piles only changed components to save time in large projects Alternately select the Project Rebuild menu Rebuild All recompiles the entire project The Think amp Do Project Build dialog box appears It
107. State Value 6 46 Check Box Normal Mode 6 48 Check Box Normal Mode Value Returns 6 48 check box Normal Mode 5 5 6 49 Check Box Tri State Value 2 2222 6 49 Smart Message CSV File 6 55 Data Source Settings Source Type Actions 6 76 Period Properties Depend Data 6 81 Screen View Toolbar ICONS 3 2 Ee 6 87 ocreenView Legend 6 88 ActiveX Poperty 24 nnns 6 90 PCUNGX ACTIONS ite Proto tala ee a 6 90 ActiveX Scan Polling 5 6 91 NET Framework Poperty 6 94 NETFramework ACUOFIS a Fa beta Se 6 94 PHOENIX CONTACT 17 Think amp Do Section 7 Section 8 Section 10 A 18 PHOENIX CONTACT Table 6 19 Table 6 20 Table 6 21 Table 6 22 Table 6 23 Table 6 24 Table 6 25 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Ta
108. Table 6 24 Default Database Field Name Examples The Trend task can accept only up to 240 tags in a single worksheet If you manually con figure more than 240 tags in the same worksheet then the Trend task will generate an er ror when you start the finished application 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 129 Think amp Do 6 130 PHOENIX CONTACT Setting the Trend Database Follow this procedure to set the trend database 1 Inthe ScreenView Explorer double click the applicable trend to display the Trend worksheet see Figure 6 133 Trend1 Description History Format Database Configuration Advanced iv Save On Trigger Save On Tag Change Tag Mame Dead Band TagSin 0 000000 TagCos TagRampllp TagRampDown Tagivavellp TagivaveDown Figure 6 133 Trend worksheet 2 Use the History Format drop down list to select Database 3 Click the Database Configuration button This opens the Database Configuration di alog box 4 Enter applicable data in this window and then click the OK button when you are fin ished 5 Select the File Save menu to save the changes to the Trend When using the trend table with a relational database the fields saved in the History Trend are described in Table 6 25 Table 6 25 Trend History Fields Time_Stamp TimeStamp TimeStamp Date and Time when the data was saved lt Tagname gt Integer or Real ScreenView creates one fi
109. Then you can save the Excel worksheet as a CSV file using the File Save As menu This procedure provides you with a user friendly interface for configuring the color codes Pushbutton Object Click the Pushbutton tool to create a pushbutton object using the Command dynamic ob ject property with an object or pre configured pushbuttons ScreenView provides the follow ing pre configured button types all of which mimic the standard panel buttons of the same name Momentary default buttons change state Open or Closed when pressed and re verts to its initial state when released This button type always displays in its normal po sition when the screen opens 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Maintained buttons change state Open or Closed when pressed but does not revert to its initial state when released The operator must press the button again to change its present state This button type maintains its state across screen changes Latched buttons change state Open or Closed when pressed and remains in this state until released by changing the Reset tag ScreenView also provides the following button styles Rectangular with a faceplate and indicator light A Rectangular without a faceplate or indicator light default Rectangular with a 3 D Rectangular with a floating appearance To add one or more pre configured buttons to a screen 1 Click the Pushbutton tool
110. Windows programs or batch files under the flow chart control Com Communication blocks permit a flow chart to communicate directly with an exter nal device through a serial port on the PC Motion Motion blocks provide integrated motion control Integrated motion control pro vides convenience and time savings during system design since you avoid having to link external motion programs with the project 4 8 4 Types of Branching Blocks Branching blocks both Decision and Compare blocks perform a test and determine which of two paths to take after the test Each branching block has one entry point and two exit points indicating Yes and No paths from the block By default the bottom connector is the Yes path and the right side is the No path 2364 en B 2364 General Programming Techniques A Do Loop is branching construct that includes a Compare block at the beginning and end of the loop You place any number of action blocks between the beginning and ending Do Loop blocks Do Loop only has exit Branches to blocks outside the Do Loop aren t permitted The standard orientation of flow chart is top to bottom for ease in reading Both Decision and Compare blocks appear as diamonds in the flow chart while the Do Loop appears as a pair of diamonds see Figure 4 10 a Figure 4 10 Decision Compare and Do Loop blocks appear as diamonds Decision blocks examine the state of a data ite
111. allows full testing and debugging of flow charts and screens in advance provided the simulation accurately duplicates the process Think amp Do allows design of simulation flow charts to respond to real mode flow charts written for a project When the machine or process is not present simulation flow charts act as a substitute Sim ulation flow charts read outputs being controlled by the real mode flow charts and write input values H When simulating I O you must simulate all Real and simulated I O cannot be mixed PHOENIX CONTACT 10 13 Think amp Do 10 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 10 4 1 Using Simulation Identify which flow charts and subcharts are simulation flow charts 1 Inthe ProjectCenter main window select Simulated in the Build Modes group Figure 10 11 Build Made t 0 Figure 10 11 Configuring simulated I O 2 n ProjectCenter click the Flow Charts Explorer bar 3 Expand the Flow Charts folder and click the flow chart to configure or add a new flow chart 4 For individual simulation flow charts click the Simulated check box for the flow chart Figure 10 12 In the Flow Charts explorer the flow chart moves to the Simulation category Think amp Do ProjectCenter Sortation te File Edit View Project Debug Tools Window Help Project 21 EIE Flowchart A Flowchartz see em Standard 123 All abc
112. and submenu selections follow an ellipsis after the main menu for example File Print menu There are a few hypertext links to Web pages They appear as underlined text such as www phoenixcontact com When viewing this manual in Adobe Acrobat hypertext links also appear as blue text Clicking one of these links launches the web browser and attempts to connect to the link 2364 Before You Begin 1 2 2 Keyboard Commands Key names are shown as Alt Ctrl lt Enter gt or Home You ll find keyboard com mands key combinations and key sequences as shown in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Manual Conventions for Keyboard Command Keystroke s Description KEY1 KEY2 A plus sign between key names means to press and hold the first key KEY1 and type the second key KEY2 For example lt Alt gt lt F4 gt means to hold down the lt Alt gt key press the lt F4 gt key and then release both the lt Alt gt and lt F4 gt keys KEY1 KEY2 A comma between key names means to type the keys individually in the sequence shown For example if instructed to type lt R gt lt Enter gt type the letter lt R gt release it then press the lt Enter gt key 1 3 Starting Think amp Do After installation an entry appears under Start for Think amp Do To start follow these steps 1 Select the Start Programs Phoenix Contact Think amp Do ProjectCenter menu This initiates
113. and capability The Win dows CE version of the OPC Server has a Settings dialog box Figure 8 13 that has the priority settings plus a list of available CE Runtimes Settings Priority Options Realtime CE Target Connections High C Above Normal Normal C Below Normal C Low Cancel Help Figure 8 13 The Windows CE OPC Server Settings dialog box Options This list shows available CE Runtimes By default it has all available CE Runtimes selected and available for OPC related communication You can choose to select only those you want to avoid unnecessary connections Press the Ctrl key and click on entries in the list to toggle their selection 8 2 4 Configuring a Project as an OPC Client A Think amp Do project can easily function as an OPC client As an OPC client the project can initiate read and write operations for data in another Windows based application That ap plication may be on the PC where the Think amp Do project is executing or it can be on another computer on the network Note that the OPC server in this case is not the Think amp Do OPC or Think amp Do CE OPC Servers which are part of Think amp Do In this case the vendor of the other Windows based program being accessed supplies the OPC server Applications communicating with the Think amp Do OPC Client must include OPC server functionality Refer to vendor documentation to configure other OPC servers In order to conf
114. and position the mouse pointer on the screen 2 Click and drag to create adjust the size of the rectangular button 3 The button size and text font characteristics determine how much text you can display and how much area you can touch on a touch screen You can resize the button and change the font characteristics later to permit longer messages to be shown in a given space 4 Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Alternatively you can right click on the pushbutton object or highlight the object press the lt Alt gt lt Enter gt keys and select Properties from the resulting pop up menu to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Momentary Tag Esp E Sign Normally Open Indicator Contig Shift E Al w Ext Trans Utd c Sa Disable Security n Figure 6 56 Object Properties Pushbutton You can use this dialog box to specify the following parameters specifies the pushbutton type Momentary default Maintained or Latched State specifies a default state for the pushbutton Normally Open default or Nor mally Closed Click the button to toggle between its default and non default state according to its specified Type For example in the button s initial state it may conform to character istics specified in the Open area of the Configuration dia
115. array tag configured in this field provides the values that will be inserted This field must only contain an array tag although it can be of any size Save on data change when selected the values are updated on the data source Text File or Database as soon as the user enters a new value on the grid during the runtime This option is disabled when the Data Source type is Class Tag because the values are automatically updated in the tags as the user changes the value of the cells in the grid Enable Slider Resize if this box is not checked the user is unable to scroll the list by dragging the slider button or to change the cell s size during the runtime Conditional Check box when selected the user cannot uncheck a check box on the Grid during the runtime unless all preceding check boxes in the same column are al ready unchecked This option is especially useful when you want to oblige the user to follow a pre defined sequence This field is not available when the Data Source type is Class Tag PHOENIX CONTACT 6 103 Think amp Do Show Header when selected the header of the Grid object is visible during the run time displaying the label of each column Show gridlines when selected the gridlines of the Grid object are visible during the runtime Ext translation when selected the text displayed by the Grid object will be translated when a translation file is specified via scripting Dis
116. box where the user can replace the data point associated with the selected pen on the legend Hemove x Removes the selected pen from the Trend object Hide m When checked the selected pen is visible otherwise it is hidden Pen Style E Launches an embedded dialog box where the user can modify the style of the selected pen Scale 41 When this box is checked the Y axis scale is visible otherwise i itis hidden The scale can be hidden only when the Multiple Sec tions option is off Scroll bar specifies that the user can slide through the X axis values according to the period configured for this scale Time specifies that the user can modify the Duration as well as the Start Date Time and or the End Date Time for the data displayed on the object Changing these values will affect the tags associated with the X axis scale if any 6 88 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques 6 3 17 Configuring ActiveX Control Objects After inserting the ActiveX control see ActiveX Control Object on page 6 36 double click the ActiveX control to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint ActiveX Control Control Windows Player vWindowsMediaPlayer W Enable Focus Property Pages Configuration Figure 6 92 Object Properties ActiveX Control Click the Configuration button to configure the ActiveX control This display
117. by right clicking and toggling the column names or hovering the mouse pointer over More Columns and then select one of the columns in that cascade list Other operations available include copy and paste which lets you create a duplicate tag name with a sequential number appended automatically You can change a tagname by clicking in the field and overtyping the current name and you can delete tags by right clicking and then selecting the Delete Line menu 6 3 2 Title Bar The title bar located along the top of the ScreenView window displays the ScreenView icon the product name and the name of the active project if any The title bar also contains the following three buttons from left to right Minimize button when clicked minimizes the window Resize Maximize button when clicked toggles between the following two options e Resize tiles the window e Maximize maximizes the window to fill your computer screen Exit button when clicked automatically saves the database and then closes Screen View If you modified any screens or worksheets ScreenView prompts you to save your work This button function is similar to selecting the File Exit menu 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 6 3 3 Menu Bar The ScreenView main menu bar contains the following menus File Contains options that let you manage application files Edit Contains options that let you m
118. chart Click the ASCII Chart button to open the chart Both decimal and hex values are listed along with all 255 characters PC ASCII symbols If a character is selected from the ASCII chart it is appended to the send string Notice that the Serial Port Scanning dialog box displays the Receive Data field in either ASCII characters or as hex values The proper setting depends on the format and content of message from the external device Sometimes just trying both settings will reveal pre cisely the information being sought Important Be sure to check that the read or write operation is done and that the system is checked for timeout and operation errors Finally you will need flow chart logic to handle error conditions For information on using the Communications Block see Communication Block on page 5 9 After a project has a serial port configured in IOView and an external device is at tached flow charts can be written and screens created that communicate with an external device using the tagname assigned to the Comm data item 8 2 Using OPC Server The Object Linking and Embedding OLE for Process Control OPC Server is similar to the DDE server but uses newer technology and is more suited for process control Think amp Do includes two OPC Servers TNDOPC EXE Controls Think amp Do projects running on a Certified PC Think amp Do OPC Server flow chart Windows
119. configured in the same Group of Objects When pressing the Replace button after selecting the Group of Objects option in the Object Properties dialog box the replace feature affects all objects and dynamics which are part of the selected Group of Objects However when pressing Replace button after selecting a specific object or dynamic e g Button Color etc the replace feature affects ONLY the selected object or dynamic Color Interface You can edit the color of a component with the Color interface 1 Click the Color icon in the toolbar 2 Doone of the following Click the desired color from the twenty that display when the pop up box opens Color Icon ten More Colors Fill EFFecks The selected color will be applied to the component that you are editing 4 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en General Programming Techniques Click the More Colors link if you want to apply a different color This displays the Colors dialog box which shows the 143 standard colors from your operating system If the color you want is available her you can select a color and then click the OK button Colors Standard Custom Colors Current Figure 4 18 The Colors dialog box Touse a color that isn t available on the Colors Standard tab click the Custom tab You can then edit the Hue Sat Lum or Red Green
120. connection with the Ctrl key pressed deselects that object without deselecting any others 3 Perform the action such as cut copy move or delete 4 7 1 Cut Copy Paste After selecting the object s use the cut lt Ctrl gt lt x gt copy Ctrl2 c and paste lt Citrl gt lt v gt shortcuts to speed up flow chart development or use the menu selections from the Edit menu With multiple flow charts open it is possible to cut copy and paste from one flow chart to another 4 8 Flow Chart Block Introduction This section provides a brief introduction to flow charts For a more complete discussion see Section 5 Flow Charts To place a new flow chart block on the page follow these steps 1 Inthe toolbar click the icon of the block type to place 2 Click in the desired location on the drawing page 4 8 1 Enable Block The Enable block always appears at the top of a flow chart It allows the flow chart to begin executing It can contain an expression that conditionally activates the flow chart while the project is running To develop the control program add flow chart blocks below the Enable block 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 4 13 Think amp Do 4 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 8 2 Freeze Block The Freeze block upper right corner of flow chart page does not connect to other flow chart blocks When configured its expression can conditionally freeze or resume a flow chart ex ecution 4 8 3 Types of Action B
121. directional convention of Shift Rotate Left and Right for an example array of five data items Beginning ge Jr values Array 0 Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Array 4 ND Array 0 Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Array 4 ht 20 Array 0 Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Array 4 ee NE UM Array 0 Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Array 4 left zu Array 0 Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Array 4 Be The examples show a shift or rotation by one position assuming that each operation shown starts with the beginning values The Move block lets you shift or rotate by multiple positions to make data manipulation even faster and easier The Move block makes the Shift and Rotate functions available to the Array data type To configure a shift or rotate operation 1 Place a Move block onto the drawing area and double click the block to edit its expres sion 2 Inthe From group use the Data type drop down list to select Array This displays Move Shift and Rotate option buttons 3 Click the Shift or Rotate option as needed 4 Inthe Starting data item field enter the array name with no index number such as Levels or use the Find button to select the array tagname the project s data item table 5 Click the shift rotate direction Left or Right radio button 2
122. displays the dialog box shown in Figure 8 12 Settings Priority Options Realtime Display This development tags t High Close server if no runtime present Above Mormal Normal t Below Normal E o MOTE Server will nat clase if development tags are displayed Cancel Help Figure 8 12 The OPC Server Settings dialog box The available options are Priority Select a priority for OPC Server operation relative to other Windows tasks The default setting is Normal Display Development tags Selecting this check box the default creates a struc ture of tags under a This folder that are available during design and Runtime This is a valuable technique that lets you access tags during development and have them available at Runtime This refers to this development project if the Runtime isn t ex ecuting or this Runtime project if the Runtime is executing When the project is not executing OPC Server returns a Bad status to any connected OPC client that re quests a data item in the This structure With this check box cleared tags are only available to the OPC Server when the Runtime is executing Close Server if no Runtime present Selecting this check box causes the OPC Serv er to close if Think amp Do Runtime isn t executing on this PC PHOENIX CONTACT 8 13 Think amp Do 8 14 PHOENIX CONTACT The Windows CE OPC Server has a somewhat different layout
123. drag it to resize the object Tochange the shape of an open or closed polygon click on a handle and a boxed square displays at the base of your cursor Drag the handle to move its position and change the shape of the polygon All objects with dynamic properties and Group of Symbols objects including most sym bols and library objects have multiple Object Properties dialog boxs and properties Use the drop down list on the Object Properties dialog box select the View Proper ties menu to access these different dialog boxs and properties Also if you resize a symbol or group of objects ScreenView resizes all objects within the symbol or group accordingly Align Center and Distribute Tools When you select a series of objects two or more you can align those objects based on the location of the last object selected As you select objects solid handles display on the last object selected and the handles on all previously selected objects become empty unfilled boxes In all of the figures provided the rectangle represents the last object selected J Lg CI Align Left Tool Use the following alignment tools to align a series of objects Click the Align left tool to align all selected objects to the left edge of the last object selected For an example see the following figure ei a Before Align Left After Align Left Figure 6 60 Aligning objects left PHOENIX CON
124. e Format launches a dialog box for configuring the format of the labels displayed by the Y axis Legend The Legend button on the Trend Control Object Properties dialog box displays the Leg dialog box Legend Visible Properties Label amp Width pixels Align Maximum size 2 Number of Items 32 Selecked Item HEN Figure 6 89 The Trend Control Legend dialog box Show legend when selected the embedded legend is displayed during the runtime This interface provides useful information associated with the pens currently linked to the object Available Visible specifies fields displayed in the legend during the runtime You can add fields to and remove them from the Visible box using the gt gt and lt lt buttons respectively Moreover you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order in which the fields are displayed in the legend during the runtime Properties specifies properties for the field highlighted in the Available or Visible box Label specifies a label for the field displayed during the runtime e Width specifies the width for the field in pixels during the runtime e Align specifies the alignment of the data displayed in the field Available during runtime when selected the user can show or hide the field dur ing runtime Maximum size defines the size of the legend in terms of nu
125. exe which provides this DDE server function The client is the program re questing data and the server is the program providing it However both the client and server applications have to be DDE compliant in order for the communications link to work 8 3 2 Getting DDE Communications Started To conduct communications between applications the Client application opens a channel to the DDE server by establishing the following Server application name such as TND2DDE Topic name of interest such as Production Spreadsheet Think amp Do defaults to data for local systems For remote Windows CE Runtime systems the name of the station must be entered After the channel is open the client can request data items in the server s specified top ic name of interest tem name the specific cell in the spreadsheet for example tagname Production Total When the client application sets up the link to the server it requests notification whenever data changes This arrangement reduces the amount of communication necessary for most situations The link can remain open even if the client is not requesting data until the client or server terminates the link 8 3 3 DDE Addresses The standard DDE server protocol identifies a specific data item with a three part address specification based on the location of the running Think amp Do project see Table 8 1 When the Runtime target is the local
126. for bipolar inputs Checking the Sign Extend option see Figure 7 10 causes the I O mapping to transfer the analog input s sign bit to the 32 bit number s sign bit Sign Extend option Figure 7 10 IOView includes a Sign Extend option Sign bits for analog outputs need no configuration If a number is negative the MSB of the analog data is set 1 2364 en B Connect Button Scan Button 2364 Math and Data Operations An analog module with multiple channels will map to one Number data item for each chan nel As shown below 12 bit binary data is already right justified in the decimal values After the sign bits for a bipolar input maps to its Number data item s sign bit the number can be handled just as any other signed number Analog Inputs Number Data Items 12 bit inputs 4 channels In lOView modules be added in the base such as DL405 or some I O families such 01205 There are some I O families that simply scan the base to add modules Figure 7 11 shows a 4 channel analog input module is in Slot 2 To map the analog values to number data items select the module graphic and click the I O Mapping tab In the Log ical ID column type the number to map or double click the field to go to the Data grid in ProjectCenter to select the data item and return 4 Think amp Do lOView Sortation Example tio Configuration Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Wi
127. from the development system to the Runtime system and use DDE or OPC functions Do not use this procedure connect to Windows CE Runtime system from a local The remote link uses Windows XP Vista 7 DCOM capability which lets software compo nents communicate transparently over supported networks Development System Runtime System Local PC Network Remote Network System scanner or Drive mapping Network card se ae ees es Figure 8 23 Remote communication between desktop PCs DCOM is part of the Windows XP Vista 7 operating systems It is not included Think amp Do Verify that the development and Runtime systems meet the following requirements Windows DCOM capability is enabled both systems Think amp Do development tools are installed on the local system Think amp Do Runtime is installed on the remote system Project files are available to both systems Use a mapped drive with the same logical drive letter at each PC For best performance put the project on the drive that is phys ically attached to the Runtime system Log onto both systems as a user with administrative privileges but you don t need to be logged on as the Administrator user PHOENIX CONTACT 8 23 Think amp Do 8 4 1 Runtime System Setup On th
128. in collecting string data via a serial port see Communications on page 8 3 NULL Termination The internal structure of strings uses the NULL character for string termination Think amp Do ignores characters in a string beyond the first NULL character Characters in string X KX X NUL 7 9 1 Using Move Blocks with Strings String data items contain one or several UNICODE characters The Move block is the main way to get the characters into a string data item Moving Text into a String Data Item To move text into a String data item 1 ProjectCenter access the project s Data Item grid and explore the String data type Type a tagname for a new string In the Initial column enter the beginning value for the string at Runtime optional Define the length of the string in the Length column The default is 80 characters and the maximum is 255 characters In FlowView place a Move block in the drawing area for the flow chart In the Move Block Expression tab select String Constant for the From Data type In the String value field enter the new text In the To group specify String as the data type and enter the destination string tag name in the Starting data item field Then click the OK button pe p pw Dr Moving a String Data Item to Another String Data Item To move the contents of one String data item into another 1 Repeatthe steps from section Moving Text in
129. indicates progress and any errors or warnings that might occur during the build It also lists the number of flow charts and screens that were compiled during the build Think amp Do Project Build Building data definition Axis Building ataltems Problems Statistics Errors 0 Flowcharts D of 0 seg build output i window for Warnings 0 Components D of 0 details Figure 9 1 The Think amp Do Project Build dialog box 3 When the build is complete click the OK button in the dialog box PHOENIX CONTACT 9 3 Think amp Do 4 The Message pane in the lower part of the ProjectCenter window lists errors and warn ings If there are any double click each one to open the appropriate flow chart to return to the block or screen object in error Fix all listed problems before proceeding Ato PCs Flow charts Auto 4 blocks Error Black number 1 haz an improper destination Warning Calculation Block 1 is empty Build Output Building Figure 9 2 The Output Window Build tab displays build messages 9 2 Running a Project E After a successful project build and compilation select the Project Run menu or click the Run Project icon on the toolbar Run Project The Runtime window Figure 9 3 opens It has information about the running project in Toolbar Button cluding the build date I O status and scan time 2 Think amp Do Runtime Engine Log
130. inverting their order as you do The effect is pictured below To do this swap the tagnames in the Starting data item and Ending data item for either the From group or To group in the Move Block Expression tab FROM TO N O Status A N 15 Status B N 1 Flow A N 16 Flow B N 2 Speed A N 17 Speed B N 3 Temp A N 18 Temp B 7 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Math and Data Operations Moving Between Different Data Types This section discusses the basic principles of how a Move block works when it needs to per form data conversion In the example below the move is from a Number to a Float data type The number set for type Float contains all possible integers in Number so each num ber will convert FROM TO 573 00 Number Float 2 147 483 648 to 2 225 308 to 2 147 483 647 1 798 308 The next example presents the converse the previous one moving a Float data type to Number type In this case the decimal fraction part of the Float number is truncated Only the 123 moves to type Number Notice the difference in magnitudes of the ranges Data type Float can store much larger and much smaller numbers than the data Number FROM TO Float Number 2 225e 308 to 2 147 483 648 to 1 798 308 2 147 483 647 Moving Between Bits and Scalar Values In the following example a series of one bit data items is moved to a scalar value data item FROM TO MSB LSB
131. master header navigation bar and sta tus bar To get screens to appear properly in a group they must not overlap So for example to have a 1024x100 header on the screen set its size to exactly 1024x100 and its starting location to 0 0 Change the primary screen to 1024x668 instead of 1024x768 and set its starting location to 100 instead of 0 To create a new screen group 1 Right click on the Screen Groups folder 2 Select the New Screen Group menu to display the Insert Screen Group dialog box see Figure 6 123 Insert Screen Group List of screens ALARMS SCR BUE Db SCR CHAT Scr ELECTRICAL SCR GLASS SCR MAIN SCR STEEL Scr WATER SCR Figure 6 123 Insert Screen Group dialog box 3 for the new folder into the field 4 Create a group of screens for this folder by selecting screens from the List of screens list To select multiple screens press the lt Ctrl gt key as you click on the screen names Release the Ctrl key when you finish This list contains only those screens currently located in Screens folder 5 Click the OK button to close the Insert Screen Group dialog box and create the group To remove a specific screen group right click on its subfolder and then select Delete from the context menu 6 114 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 6 6 Additiona
132. object on the screen Objects with lower ID s display behind objects with higher IDs 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 65 Think amp Do Move to Back Tool Move to Front Tool Use the following object layer tools to move selected object s behind or in front of another screen object s Use this tool only with a single selected object or grouped object You cannot use this tool with multiple objects selected Also if you select a group of objects and move them the behind or in front of another object the selected group of objects maintain their original display order Click the Move to back tool to move a selected object or objects behind all other ob jects on the screen ScreenView assigns the object the lowest ID and moves that ob ject behind all other objects on the screen Before Move After Move to Back to Back Figure 6 71 Moving objects to back Alternatively right click on an object and select Move to back from the object s pop up menu Click the Move to front tool to move a selected object or objects in front of all other objects on the screen ScreenView assigns the object the highest ID and moves that object behind all other objects on the screen Before Move After Move to Front to Front Figure 6 72 Moving objects to front Alternatively right click on an object and select Move to front from the object s pop up menu Group and Ungroup Tools Use the following tools to group and
133. on the Board Info tab lower left that shows the driver s name which cannot be edited Think amp Do lOView Sortation Example tio Configuration Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Window Help Serial driver added in Board View Serial Serial driver added to Board Info tab H Driver Refresh Grid C Serial Board Status Mapping Module Infa Module Status Mapping 120 Mapping For Help press F1 Figure 8 2 lOView window 8 1 2 Adding a Serial Port In lOView physical COM ports or serial ports are classified with all devices To add a particular serial port 7 1 Select the Serial Driver graphic in the Board View pane highlighting the driver outline 2 Click the Add Device button on the Configuration toolbar or select the Devices Add menu The Add Serial Device dialog box appears as shown in Figure 8 3 Add Devices Button 8 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Communications 3 Choose an available serial port from the list box Be sure the mouse or other device is not already attached to the port you choose Add Serial Device Serial Part E OM Access eneric Serial Communication Device Figure 8 3 The Add Serial Device dialog box 4 Typeaname for the device in the Device Name field Use the hardware port name or the name of the extern
134. operation on the data in the system which may include input or out put In the flow chart an action block has one entry point top and one exit point bottom 2 4 2 Branching Block A diamond shaped box represents a branch in the control path based on available data The decision may compare one variable to another a variable to a constant or a true or false condition Branching blocks have one entry point top and two exit points either side and bottom or both sides With just branching and action blocks a program can have complete command of the I O sub system or control a machine or process A project may consist of one or several flow charts 2 4 3 Building Flow Charts Use FlowView to create flow charts To create new flow chart follow these steps T 1 Fromthe ProjectCenter launch FlowView using one of the following techniques Select Tools FlowView Click the FlowView icon in the Project Explorer bar Select File New Flow Chart to launch FlowView the flow chart drawing tool FlowView Icon If using this technique continue with Step 3 2 In FlowView select File New Flow Chart FlowView the Name Flow Chart dialog box appears see Figure 2 10 a name for the flow chart F law gw Hame Flow Chart Enter a unique name for your flow chart chart He Figure 2 10 Name Flow Chart dialog box 4 Click the button
135. or Y axis respectively as well as the color of these lines 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 81 Think amp Do 6 82 PHOENIX CONTACT Time bar when selected the Time bar is displayed below the X axis during the run time otherwise it is hidden The time bar is a standard interface that can be used by the operator to change the X axis scale during the runtime Scroll bar when selected the Scroll bar is displayed below the X axis during the run time otherwise it is hidden The time bar is a standard interface that can be used by the operator to navigate through the X axis scale during the runtime Optionally you can configure a tag in the Scroll bar field which defines the period for the scroll bar If this field is left empty the period is equal to the current value for Duration of the X axis Cursor specifies an optional ruler orthogonal to the X axis which be used during the runtime to obtain the value of any pen at a specific point intersection of the pen with the cursor When you click this button the Cursor dialog box launches where you can configure the settings for the optional vertical cursor Position 0 100 Color m Value output Figure 6 87 The Trend Control Cursor dialog box Enable when selected the vertical cursor is visible during the runtime Color specifies the color of the line drawn for the cursor e Position 0100 You can configure a nu
136. or data source supports schemas this list changes with any change of the schema list selection A check mark next to a table view or query adds that object s fields to the list available for tag mapping Use this list to select or more tables to be used in the SQL request The Tables list is only available from the General tab and only after selecting a database or data source 7 10 3 Mapping Tab The SQL Block Tag Mappings tab Figure 7 15 maps database fields to Think amp Do tags SQL Block SOL Statement Name Database H addressList mdb Change DB General Mappings Filters where Sorting Order By SQL Statement 1 Addresses Address String Cancel Validate Figure 7 15 The SQL Block Tag Mappings tab This mapping occurs between the Field Name column and the Tagname column Field Name The Field Name column shows the fields that are available in the tables views and que ries selected on the General tab Click in the column and select a field from the drop down list that appears Manual entry is not allowed in this field 2364 en B Math and Data Operations Field Type The Field Type column displays the native database or data source type for the field se lected in the Field Name column This cell is read only and is provided solely for informa tional purposes Tag Type The Tag Type column displays the Think amp
137. or malfunction to the device hardware software or surrounding property This symbol and the accompanying text provide the reader with additional in formation or refer to detailed sources of information How to contact us Up to date information on Phoenix Contact products and our Terms and Conditions can be found on the Internet at phoenixcontact com Make sure you always use the latest documentation It can be downloaded at phoenixcontact net products If there are any problems that cannot be solved using the documentation please contact your Phoenix Contact subsidiary Subsidiary contact information is available at phoenixcontact com PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH amp Co KG FlachsmarktstraBe 8 32825 Blomberg GERMANY Should you have any suggestions or recommendations for improvement of the contents and layout of our manuals please send your comments to tecdoc phoenixcontact com PHOENIX CONTACT Please observe the following notes PHOENIX CONTACT General terms and conditions of use for technical documentation Phoenix Contact reserves the right to alter correct and or improve the technical documen tation and the products described in the technical documentation at its own discretion and without giving prior notice insofar as this is reasonable for the user The same applies to any technical changes that serve the purpose of technical progress The receipt of technical documentation in particular user docum
138. other computers on the network The is search faster if OPC Data Access Components 2 0 or later is on the other computer 4 Click the OK button in the Browse for OPC Server dialog box The name of the server selected appears in the Add Tag Link dialog box 5 Inthe Add Tag Link dialog box click the OK button To perform both Read and Write functions for a Think amp Do project as an OPC client you need to add read write OPC devices to the Tag Link driver Additional settings such as Up date Rate and error status tags are available in the Module Info tab and other tabs The Tag Mapping tab maps a list of 50 or 100 data items to Remote tagnames Double click a Remote field to browse for tags on the remote system When starting a project note that both the other application such as HMI or SCADA and its OPC server must be running in order for the project to read write data item values 8 3 Using DDE Server A Think amp Do Runtime project often needs to exchange data with other Windows based ap plications Think amp Do includes a DDE server that provides access to local remote Certified PC systems or Windows CE Runtime systems DDE server is no longer the preferred solution for this requirement It is included for back ward compatibility For new projects we recommend that you use OPC server see Us ing OPC Server on page 8 10 8 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364
139. select the Project Settings menu Clicking the Replace button from the Object Properties dialog box displays the Replace dialog box see Figure 4 17 Replace Tags only Replace by parts String Value Whole Tag Name Ler TMD whiteAccumulationCou TWD WhiteAccumulationcou Figure 4 17 The Replace dialog box 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 4 23 Think amp Do This dialog provides a fast and simple tool to replace strings String Value tab tags and or properties for an object or group of objects This dialog display grids where you can edit the To column with the string tag and or property that must be replaced The main inter faces in this dialog as described in the following table Table 4 2 Object Properties Replace dialog box parameters replaced Tags only Displays only the tags configured di rectly Second Time Level and so forth Tags Properties Displays both the tags con figured directly and the properties configured as mnemonics e g PumpStatus Custom Properties Displays only the mnemon ics configured as custom properties e g ttPumpStatus Replace by Parts When checked allows the user to replace each part of a tag separately Main Tagname Array Index Class Member and Tag Field It is very useful when you want to replace a specific settings e g Array In dex for different tags
140. serial port communications DDE Server OPC Server and how to set up remote communications PHOENIX CONTACT 1 3 2364 en B Think amp Do 1 4 PHOENIX CONTACT Section 9 Building and Running Projects describes how to build and run projects Section 10 Debugging Projects provides information on how to monitor and debug run ning projects The Index provides a handy cross reference to common terms 1 2 Manual Conventions This manual uses a few special symbols and conventions 1 2 1 Text Conventions This section discusses text conventions used throughout the manual Folder and Filenames File names and folder paths appear in quotes For example is a folder path Project pdb is a filename Think amp Do is a registered trademark of Think amp Do Software Inc Windows Windows XP Windows Vista Visual Basic VBScript and Visual C are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation OPC is a registered trademark of OPC Foundation Modbus is a regis tered trademark of Schneider Automation Inc INTERBUS is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact GmbH and Co Titles Buttons Keywords Mnemonics Command buttons keywords and phrases found in dialog boxes appear in quotes For ex ample the text might say click the Apply button to indicate there is a button in the dialog box labeled Apply Menu selections also appear in quotes for example File menu
141. tae eie peter veneris 10 13 OPC 8 12 server Client 8 11 Configuring a project as client 8 14 EREMO 8 10 Openinga projette 2 6 Operator screen 2 12 4 19 Duplicate delete or print 6 4 Exploring in ProjectCenter 6 3 Order of flow chart 4 7 Output data TVDB uso et 7 7 Page OIA rM cC RT 4 9 Parameter mapping 5 27 Pass By Telerence oio ed 5 30 355 OW 5 30 Password 9 12 Windows CE target 9 8 PIDBIOCK iie 5 23 7 47 7 48 PID loop a A E 7 48 PID 5 23 Placing flow chart blocks 4 13 Pomer oo e 4 16 PHOENIX CONTACT B 3 Think amp Do Printer paper 5 6 6 5 Process 5 23 7 47 7 48 44 2 3 7 6 Remote communications
142. tags Use the Data Item grid to select a tag 4 Click the Add to Calculation button This inserts the tagname into the expression re placing any selected text with the tagname To complete and validate an expression follow these steps 1 Move the text cursor to the right of the equal sign Use the Data Items group to select and add the data item Click the math operator or type it Type in constants directly Click the Validate button when you have completed the expression to verify that the expression s syntax is correct re s Oo Complete the Calculation field by using the tools in the Math Builder group Data Items group or by manually typing the constants Some rules for creating math expressions Use double quote characters around string constants for example StringO Hello world When a string has an embedded quote character you must place a backslash charac ter before that quote For example String2 He says VHelloV to you Highlight a range of text in the expression to replace it with the next selected data item Expressions may contain up to 50 terms or 1024 characters including the result Theexpression window may contain several lines of text long expressions wrap to new lines Validate each expression before closing the Calculation Block dialog box 7 7 2 Expression Display Conventions The expression editor applies color to text components to
143. that moves from Current Time to CurrentHour starting and CurrentSecond ending 7 4 2 Fixed Timers or Clocks Some of the most useful System data items are the clocks with a fixed time base and 5096 duty cycle They are great for creating flashing indicators in HMI screens etc Table 7 2 Clock Tagname and ID Tagname OFF me ONtime All System data items are 32 bit type but these timers have a 1 bit value The LSB of the double word alternates at the corresponding frequency for the timer To access system timer bits do one of the following Use a Compare block to compare their value with a fixed integer constant 0 Use the Yes No exit paths from the Compare block to take different actions with Control blocks Use a Move block to move the system timer bit directly to an output This is an easy way to create an oscillator 7 4 3 Scan Clocks The scan clock System data items are synchronized with the Runtime scan of the flow chart logic Table 7 3 Scan Clock Tagname and ID iD reame Description _ SYS 36 ON for the first scan OFF from then on SYS 37 AltScan ON during every other scan FirstScan The FirstScan data item is TRUE 1 only during the first scan at Runtime It is then FALSE 0 for the remainder of that Runtime session This data item is particularly useful for pow erup initialization flow charts which need only to run one time AltScan The AltScan data item al
144. the content of the text file dy namically The text file must be created in the CSV format comma separated values where the comma character is used to divide the columns data in each line row of the file There fore you can use any CSV editor such as Microsoft Notepad and Microsoft Excel to create the CSV file with the messages and their properties for the Smart Message object The description of each property associated with the messages is provided in the Smart Message section The order of the data in the CSV file is described in Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Smart Message CSV File Format Property Default Value e Ve Text FG Tex 66 Werk Ree a EG remm PHOENIX CONTACT 6 55 Think amp Do Smart Message Object Tool 6 56 PHOENIX CONTACT Table 6 9 Smart Message CSV File Format Column Default Value Transparent fen Transparent When configuring text messages that have the comma character as part of the message you must configure the whole message between quotes e g Warning Turn the motor Off otherwise the comma will be interpreted as a data separator instead of as part of the message The first line of this file is equivalent to the State is Error In other words if there is no message associated with the current value of the tag configured in the Read Tag field the message configured in the first row State is
145. the right panel displays tags of the selected type Object Finder Selection Cancel Screen Tags can 4 Screen System Lo AraplndesE rror H Data Items T Output T __ i a AvgEstendedFunction AvgLogicTime Byte Lr caninterval System Mumber Float L ClockMin String Le ClockSec S Timer Le CorversionE ror A perc ai Figure 6 4 Object Finder dialog box 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 7 Think amp Do 6 8 PHOENIX CONTACT The three types that appear under the Tags node of the tree are Screen Tags are internal application tags Screen System are internal system tags Data Items are Think amp Do project tags defined in the Data Items editor Selecting one of these tag type nodes displays all tags of that type in the right panel Double clicking a node or clicking the icon in front of the node toggles display of the data types available for that tag type Clicking on one of the tag data types under a tag type shows tags of that type and data type Toselecta tag for use simply double click it This closes the Object Finder dialog box and displays the selected tag in the field that you originally double clicked to display the Object Finder dialog box Selecting a tag in the Data Items list automatically adds the TND prefix t
146. the top of the drawing page when you create a new flow chart Standard flow chart Enable Block is first Subchart Begin block is first You can determine the flow chart type at a glance by looking at the first block Each flow chart can have just one of these two blocks as a starting point FlowView automatically creates these starting blocks when you create a new flow chart or new subchart 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 5 3 Think amp Do 5 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 2 1 Enable Block Each flow chart must have a beginning point and the Enable block serves that purpose for standard flow charts The Enable block is in the upper left grid cell in a new flow chart see Figure 5 1 has the following characteristics Enable block is the first block of every standard flow chart It has a single exit from which flow passes on to the rest of the control program The Enable block cannot be deleted copied or moved on the drawing area Enable Black Figure 5 1 Every new flow chart opens with a predefined Enable block An empty Enable block no expression created causes a flow chart to always run Double click the block to edit its expression Add statements to the expression using logical operators see Figure 5 2 The result of the expression is either TRUE or FALSE enabling or disabling the flow chart respectively Enable Block Expression D Properties Statements Find
147. ungroup two or more selected objects All objects with dynamic properties and Group of Symbols objects which includes most symbols and library objects have multiple Object Properties dialog boxs and proper ties You can use the drop down list on the Object Properties dialog box select the View Properties menu to access these different dialog boxs and properties 6 66 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Click the Group tool to combine multiple objects into a single object to facilitate object selection and manipulation You can access each part of the group in the Object Properties dialog box Group Tool Alternatively you can right click on an object and select Group from the object s pop up menu Click the Ungroup tool to separate a grouped object into its individual components Ungroup Tool Alternatively you can right click an object and select Ungroup from the object s pop up menu A complex grouped object can consist of several sets of grouped objects known as sub groups Consequently you may find it necessary to ungroup all of the subgroups to com pletely ungroup a complex object Move Backward and Forward Tools ScreenView assigns a unique identification number ID to every object on the screen These ID s always start at zero and range up to the total number of objects on the screen You can click on an obje
148. value to the specified tag in the Tagname column 6 6 3 Recipe Worksheet Recipe worksheets let you configure data interchange between the application database and disk files in ASCII or DBF format transferring values between files and realtime memory 6 122 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques You typically use a Recipe worksheet to store process recipes but you can store any type of information such as operation logs passwords and so forth in these files The recipes task reads and writes tag values into files and it transfers tag values from the application to a file or from a file to the application ScreenView sequentially increments the number that identifies the Recipe worksheet for each newly created worksheet Use one of the following methods to create a new Recipe worksheet Right click on the Worksheets folder and then select New Recipe from the pop up menu Selectthe File New Worksheet Recipe menu A new Recipe worksheet displays as shown in Figure 6 129 001 Description OO Options Save As XML File Name Register Number Unicode Tag Mame Humber of Elements Figure 6 129 Recipe worksheet The Recipe worksheet is divided into two areas Header area top section which contains information for the whole group Body area bottom section where you define each tag in the group Use the header parameters on
149. want 4 Double click on the object to view the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Check Caption Check Tag 228 Advanced True Value Bow Ap ESign Security EET Disable n Figure 6 50 Object Properties Check Box Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the check box object Caption specifies a caption by typing the text into the text box Fonts specifies a font style for the caption by clicking the Fonts button 5 when selected the user will be prompted to enter the Electronic Signature be fore executing the command Confirm ensures that Think amp Do prompts the operator to confirm the action at runtime Key use the drop down list to select a key to associate that keyboard key with the ob ject or group of objects You can then press this key to check uncheck the check box e Click check the Shift Ctrl or Alt box to create a combination key meaning the Shift lt Ctrl gt or Alt key must be pressed with the key specified in the drop down list e Click the Browse button to open the Key Modifier dialog box that lets you modify your combination keys You can choose Left Right or Left or Right to specify the position on the keyboard of the Shift lt Ctrl gt or Alt ke
150. when the Background task module BG Task starts This is useful for initializing variables or executing logic that must be imple mented when the application starts You can use startup scripts to declare and initialize vari ables and implement procedures However variables or procedures declared on this page are not available to graphics scripts To create or edit startup scripts double click the Startup icon in the Scripts Application folder This opens the script in a tab in the ScreenView workspace see Figure 6 136 Startup variables available for all Script groups from the Script task be declared and initialized here Procedures available for all Script groups from the Script task can be implemented here Figure 6 136 Startup script page An asterisk following the tab name indicates that the page has changed and requires saving For an example see the Scripts Startup topic in the Think amp Do help 6 7 5 Background Scripts Background scripts execute when the condition specified in their Execution field is TRUE non zero Think amp Do scans background script groups sequentially based on the number of the group You must use the syntax supported by the ScreenView scripting language in the Execu tion field Only the body of the script group supports VBScript language To create a new backbround script do one of the following 2364 2364 Operator Scre
151. which gets set to ON TRUE when the SQL block executes Since the actual SQL request gets processed asynchro nously with the Runtime a decision block must be inserted immediately following the SQL block and then the flag item must go OFF FALSE before proceeding to other logic in the same flow chart other flow charts will continue to be processed during this time 2364 en B 2364 Math and Data Operations select a tag one can double click the box to receive the tag or single click the button with ellipses to the right of the edit box Each of these actions opens a dialog box from which to choose an appropriate type of tag for this item Manual entry is not allowed in this cell Check this Flag after each SQL block It is also a prudent choice though not necessary to use a different InProcess Flag tag for each SQL block Result Number This required item must be mapped to a tag Data Type Number which will be set toa code representing the result of the request The value of this code can have one of two meanings If the resulting code is negative an error occurred The negative value indicates the error that occurred If the value is non negative zero or greater than zero the requested operation was successful This code holds the quantity of records affected by the operation Fora SELECT request the tag holds the number of records retrieved by the SQL request For an INSERT request it holds the number of record
152. 01_ParameterE rror 4 Serial_COMO01_BufferAllocationE Logical IDs 5 5 COMO01_UnableT oPurgeComm Module Status 6 Serial_COMO01_UnableToSetDTR Mapping tab Seral CreateEventError Vos Board Info Board Status Mapping Module Info p 120 Mapping Figure 8 6 Serial port Module Status Mapping tab A status item s value equals 1 when an error exists or to indicate a busy condition State in formation is useful in flow charts and screens you only need to add names to status items that you intend to use in flow charts or screens First if a data item already exists just enter its ID number in the field provided The data type is already shown If a number such as 3 is typed in the top field Input l 3 is assigned to Serial COM001_ErrorExists The tagname for l 3 could be for example as specified in the project s Data Item grid Some status data items are not available on certain Windows CE Runtime devices For example the WinPLC does not provide CTR and DTH items 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 8 7 Think amp Do wil Connect Button 8 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 1 5 Mapping the Serial Port Each serial port device maps to a data item of the Comm data type map a serial port to a data item 1 In lOView select the serial port device the Module View window 2 Click the right most tab to access the I O Mapping tab 3 Inthe
153. 3 Press the Del key to delete the row You cannot cut and paste an entire row because tagnames must be unique within a proj ect Editing Text in the Data Item Grid To copy and paste text in Data Item grid cells 1 Select the text within a cell 2 Click the Copy toolbar button 3 Click a different cell and then click the Paste toolbar button 3 2 Configuring I O Use the lOView to map data items to I O points To launch lOView follow these steps 1 In ProjectCenter click the Project Explorer bar left most pane top bar to view the tool shortcuts 2 Click the lOView icon to launch lOView lOView is a separate tool not a window ProjectCenter Using it produces a single I O configuration for the project that Think amp Do stores with all other project components The lOView window see Figure 3 3 draws a picture of the I O network as you configure it After configuration the I O network or scanner card s in the PC are in the upper left pane PHOENIX CONTACT 3 5 Think amp Do network and scanner cards connect to modules Modules can be either I O bases or field devices Modules appear in the upper right pane Configuration information appears in the bottom pane of the window as modules are select modules and different tabs at the bottom of the pane Think amp Do lOView Sortation Example tio Configuration Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Window Help
154. 364 Math and Data Operations 6 Inthe Amount field enter the amount of shift or rotate positions for the move and click the button 7 6 6 Moving Array Elements The Move Block can move elements of an array to another array or to a range of data items To move element s of an array 1 Inthe Move Block expression dialog box select the array in the From group 2 Select the Move option 3 Double click the Starting data item field to display the Data Item grid array list 4 Click the array tagname in the grid and click the OK button in the Select Data Item dialog box This inserts the array tagname in the Move Block dialog box 5 Enter a positive integer or a Number tagname in the brackets such as 5 or IArrayNum Double click the brackets to find a Number in ProjectCenter s Data Item grid 6 If moving more than one array element repeat steps 4 and 5 in the Ending data item field 7 Inthe To group complete the Data type and Starting data item fields Complete the Ending data item field if moving multiple elements 7 7 Using the Calculation Bock The Calculation block in a flow chart lets flow charts perform math and data operations Each Calculation block produces one result but its expression be complex Figure 7 9 shows the Calculation Block Expression tab Cale Calculation Calculation Block Block Button Expressi
155. 4 2364 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Figure 6 69 Figure 6 70 Figure 6 71 Figure 6 72 Figure 6 73 Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Figure 6 76 Figure 6 77 Figure 6 78 Figure 6 79 Figure 6 80 Figure 6 81 Figure 6 82 Figure 6 83 Figure 6 84 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Figure 6 87 Figure 6 88 Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 Figure 6 91 Figure 6 92 Figure 6 93 Figure 6 94 Figure 6 95 Figure 6 96 Figure 6 97 Figure 6 98 Aligning objects top e reda ie atta 6 62 Aligning objects bottom 6 62 Centering objects 1 6 63 Centering objects 6 63 Distributing objects 6 63 Distributing objects vertically nne 6 64 Flipping objects 2 1 6 64 Flipping objects 6 65 6 65 MOVING oDJects 10 6 66 MOVING objects pcc 6 66 Object Properties Alarm Event 6 68 Displaying a Grid on an Alarm Event Control
156. 4 Enter the using one of the following techniques Enter the tagname in the Tagname field While typing Think amp Do attempts to auto complete the name Enter the data item Index for example 01 When tabbing to the next field Think amp Do displays the data item name associated with the index Use the Find menu button or double click the field to display the Data Item Grid 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 as required for additional expressions A block must have at least one expression After entering more than one expression the Move Up and Move Down buttons become available These buttons permit re ordering the expres sion since the Think amp Do Runtime executes them in the order they appear in this dialog box Select one of the expressions and then click the desired button to move it in the list 6 Click the OK button 5 2 8 Decision Block The Decision block evaluates a Boolean expression as TRUE or FALSE The expression may consist of one or more bits The Decision block has one entry point and two exit points Yes No based on the Boolean decision Use the Decision Block dialog box to select the bit s to be evaluated which are of these types Array when testing a bit in a flag or timer array Comm Flag Input Output Timer 2364 en B 2364 Flow Charts The AND and OR Operator in the dialog box permits additional Bo
157. 4 Object Properties Dialog 4 21 4 12 5 Creating and Using Tags in 4 26 4 13 Scripting Languages in ScreenView 4 27 2364 4 1 Think amp Do 4 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en General Programming Techniques 4 General Programming Techniques Think amp Do uses flow chart control programs The symbols in the flow chart depict two classes of items action blocks and branching blocks Action Block An action block is a box see Figure 4 1 representing an operation on the data in the sys tem which may include input or output data In the flow chart an action block has one entry point top top left or right and one exit point left right or bottom Think amp Do has four types of action blocks that are described later see Types of Action Blocks on page 4 13 Branching Block Figure 4 1 Flow chart segment showing an action and branching block Branching Block A branching block is a diamond shaped box see Figure 4 1 that represents a branch in the control path based on available data A branching block may compare one variable to an other a variable to a constant or a true or false condition Branching blocks have one entry point top and two exit points either side and bottom Think amp Do has two types of branch ing blocks that are descr
158. 6 121 Think amp Do A new Math worksheet displays as shown in Figure 6 128 Mathi Description Execution Tag Mame Expression Figure 6 128 Math worksheet The Math worksheet is divided into two areas Header area top section which contains information for the whole group Bodyarea bottom section where you define each tag expression and Programming Lines logical routines and mathematical calculations through functions and logical op erations in the group Use the header parameters on this worksheet as follows Description specifies a description of the worksheet for documentation purposes Execution specifies an expression a single tag or a constant value to determine when the worksheet should execute Think amp Do executes the worksheet only when the Execution field result is not zero If you always want the worksheet to execute type a 1 constant value in the Execution field Use the body parameters on this worksheet as follows Tagname specifies a tag to receive a return value from the specified calculation in the Expression column Double click the field or right click and then select Insert Tag to display the Object Finder dialog box see Object Finder Dialog Box on page 6 7 Typing a new name gives you the opportunity to create the internal tag see Creating ScreenView Tags on page 6 9 Expression specifies an expression to return a return
159. 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 The Line Selection dialog box 6 25 The Static Objects toolbar 6 26 Object Properties Open Polygon 6 26 Object Properties Closed 6 27 Object Properties 6 28 Oval Chord Arc RINO Wee ole co ie a 6 28 Object Properties ElSe ooi RE Ier 6 29 Object Properties Rounded Rectangle 6 30 Object Properties 6 31 Object Properties ceo une se E 6 32 Object Properties 6 33 The Caption dialog 6 33 The Active Objects toolbar 6 34 Object Properties Alarm Event 6 34 Object Properties Trend 6 35 The Insert ActiveX Control dialog box 6 36 Object Properties ActiveX 6 37 The NET Framework Components dialog 6 38 Object Properties NET
160. 6 68 Displaying a Header Alarm Event Control 6 69 Alarm Event Control Columns dialog box 6 70 Alarm Event Control Filters dialog box 6 71 Alarm Event Control Advanced dialog box 6 72 Alarm Event Control Navigation Triggers dialog box 6 73 Object Properties Alarm Event 6 74 Object Properties Trend 6 75 The Trend Control Data Sources dialog box 6 75 The Trend Control Points dialog 6 77 The Trend Control Pen Style dialog 6 78 The Trend Control Options dialog 6 79 The Trend Control Axes dialog 6 80 The Trend Control Cursor dialog box 6 82 The Trend Control Position dialog 6 82 The Trend Control Legend dialog 6 83 The Trend Control Toolbar dialog 6 84 The Trend Control Advan
161. 7 7 does this The Starting data item is the MSB The Ending data item is the LSB When moving bits to a number start with the MSB Move Block Expression Properties From Data type Starting data item Data type Mumber Starting data item Speed Cancel Help Figure 7 7 The MSB and LSB are specified in the range fields 2364 en B 2364 Math and Data Operations Moving a Number to Discrete Outputs The following example illustrates how to move a Number data type to a series of discrete output bits The Move block automatically moves the LSB of the counter to the LSB of the specified output range Since a 16 bit value is moving to eight 1 bit destinations the Move block ignores the upper 16 bits of the number FROM TO Number MSB LSB Series of bits Suppose an LED display needs eight bits of data The Move Block Expression tab shown moves the counter value to the eight discrete outputs O 0 to O 7 When moving a scalar value to discrete bits start with the MSB The resulting Move Block Expression tab is in Figure 7 8 Move Block Expression Properties From Data Number Starting data item UnitCounter Ending data item Ta Data type data iter Relay 8 Ending data item Cancel Help Figure 7 8 To move a number to a series of output bits specify MSB LSB The
162. A Watch2 A Figure 10 4 The Chart tab lists data items related to the selected flow chart The tagname and value for each data item is listed along with other information The Value column shows the current value unless it is out of scope subchart not executing In that situation the Value field displays diagonal bars Figure 10 5 Figure 10 5 Values of tags that are out of scope appear with diagonal bars Force Tab The Force tab is similar to the Chart tab except that it only displays currently forced data items Forcing on page 10 7 This is particularly useful in sorting out forced data items in large projects 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 10 5 Think amp Do 10 6 PHOENIX CONTACT Statistics Tab The Statistics tab provides a quick summary of commonly used system data items and their current values Figure 10 6 Some variables are read only but you may modify the value of other system variables Use the Edit menu then Set Value etc The statistics listed in the watch window are very useful in finding particular error types or just viewing the scan related performance of a project Type PERCEPTIVE 2 PERCEPTIVE 2 Statistics Tab Figure 10 6 The Statistics tab provides a summary of system data items More information is available in the online Help system or see A 1 System Data Items 10 1 3 Custom Watch Windows App Tracker inclu
163. Alarm Controls Save To Disk FG Ack Required Normalization Beep FG m BG Send to printer Tag Mame Message Priority Selection HiHi HiHi HiHi HiHi HiHi Figure 6 124 Alarm worksheet The Alarm task is executed by the Background task module BGTask The Alarm task han dles the status of all alarms and save the alarm messages to the history if configured to do so However the Alarm task does not display the alarm messages to the operator The Alarm Events control object available on the Active Objects toolbar from the screen editor must be created and configured in a screen in order to display the alarms to the operator Each Alarm worksheet is composed of two areas Header specifies settings applied to all tags and alarms configured in the same alarm group These settings allow you to configure the formatting of the message and the ac tions that must be triggered based on alarm events e g print alarms send alarms by email and so forth For more information see Header Settings below Body configures alarm messages and associate them to conditions linked to tags For more information see Body Settings on page 6 119 The Alarm task avoids automatically acknowledging alarms by another alarm For exam ple the Hi Lo alarm should not be automatically acknowledged when the HiHi LoLo alarm becomes active Notice that each tag type cannot be
164. All Tool Cut Tool Copy Tool Paste Tool 6 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 3 5 Using the Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar provides tools shortcuts that duplicate functionality found on the File Edit and View menus PEI E a4 zo m Rim Figure 6 9 The Standard toolbar The tools in the Standard toolbar are described below New Screen Click the New Screen tool to open the Screen Attributes dialog box and create a new screen Using the New Screen tool is the same as selecting the File New Screen menu or typing the lt Ctrl gt lt N gt key combination Save Click the Save tool to save any active screens or worksheets Using the Save tool is the same as selecting the File Save menu or typing the lt Ctrl gt lt S gt key combination Also the Save function is only available when you modify the active file Save All Click the Save All tool to save all open screens or worksheets Using the Save All tool is the same as selecting the File Save menu Also the Save function is only avail able when you modify a screen or worksheet Cut Click the Cut tool to remove a selected object from the screen worksheet and store it on the clipboard replacing any previously stored selections on the clipboard You can then use the Paste tool to move the cut object to another location on the same screen or to another screen Using the C
165. ArrayIndexError Contains error information on flow chart blocks that illegally index into arrays This value is written by the runtime whenever flow charts try to use an invalid array index The error code is set to 1 if the array index is too small and set to 2 if the array index is too large See Notes on Reading Error Data on page A 5 for information on decoding this error YS 12 DoLoopExit Contains error information on Do Loops This value gets written to by the runtime when a flow chart exits a Do Loop because it went through the loop the maximum number of times The error code is set to 1 to indicate the error See Notes on Reading Error Data on page A 5 for information on decoding this error 5 SYS 13 ScanCount The running counter of the number of scans executed by the runtime This is a 32 bit unsigned number so it will eventually wrap around to zero Do not write to this value It may be used by a runtime component or other application SYS 14 Reserved14 Read only Reserved for internal use SYS 15 DataLogging Status Is used by the Think amp Do Data Logging runtime to indicate the status of the data logging task Do not write to this data item See Data Logging in help for more details SYS 16 RollingMsecCounter Read only Counts the number of milliseconds since the project runtime was started This is a 32 bit unsigned number so it will eventually wrap around to Zero O 7 hour bits 8 15 m
166. B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 21 Think amp Do 6 22 PHOENIX CONTACT T Position Property Tool Position Property Click the Position tool to specify when and where to display an object using the specified tag values Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties da Replace Hint Position Show on condition p3 Slider Move Expression Position Reference Harz o to f100 0 100 Verl alfo fo 100 gt Figure 6 21 Object Properties Position You can use this dialog box to specify the following parameters Show on condition field e a number greater than zero or leave the field blank to make the object visible e a zero or a negative number to hide the object Slider check box enables checked the object to act like a slider which means you can drag the object to apply corresponding values to the tags Expression fields specifies the tag associated with the object allowing the object to move horizontally and vertically throughout the screen Range fields specifies upper and lower limits for the tag values allowing the object to move throughout the screen according to the value of the tag within this range Position fields specifies how much change in position in pixels can move an ob ject on the screen according to the established conditio
167. Body Settings Tag Name of the tag associated with the alarm Double Tag click the field or right click and then select Insert Tag to display the Object Finder dialog box see Object Finder Dialog on page 6 7 Typing new name gives you the opportunity to create the internal tag see Creating ScreenView Tags on page 6 9 Type of the alarm Combo box HiHi Activates the alarm if the tag value is equal or higher than the limit Hi Activates the alarm if the tag value is equal or higher than the limit Lo Activates the alarm if the tag value is equal or lower than the limit LoLo Activates the alarm if the tag value is equal or lower than the limit Rate Activates the alarm if the tag value varies faster than the rate specified to the alarm DevP Activates the alarm if the tag value is equal or higher than the Set Point tag plus the limit DevM Activates the alarm if the tag value is equal or lower than the Set Point tag minus the limit When using the types Rate DevP and DevM it is nec essary to configure additional settings by the Tag Properties dialog box launched by the Tag Properties toolbar Limit associated with each alarm The limits can be Number modified dynamically during the runtime by the tag fields HiHiLimit HiLimit LoLimit LoLoLimit Rate DevP and DevM e g TagLevel HiLimit PHOENIX CONTACT 6 119 Think amp Do 6 120 PHOENIX CO
168. CT 2364 en 2364 Math and Data Operations Condition The Condition column allows selection of a Think amp Do tag array or another database or data source field via a pop up dialog window Its value is compared to the value of the field specified in the Field column By specifying another database or data source field in this column one can accomplish JOINs Manual entry is not allowed in this field The condition is crucially important when more than one table is selected on the General tab Without the proper Field Name equates a Cartesian Join results returning every pos sible combination of the two tables AND OR If specifying more than one filter they must connect with logical operators AND and OR Be careful how the filters are ordered Think amp Do resolves ANDs first top to bottom followed by ORs also top to bottom Array Index Tagname Use the Array Index field to enter a Number tagname with an array index Dou ble click the field or click the browse button to display the tag chooser Enter an array index tagname for either single or multiple select or insert update or delete operations Manual entry is not allowed in this field 7 10 5 Sorting Order By Tab The SQL Block Sorting tab Figure 7 17 controls the order in which it returns records 501 Block SOL Statement Name 55 Database H addressList mdb Change DB rine Ok Canc
169. Charis RENI RARE US M aO 10 13 A PAD DOIG tm DET A 1 A 1 System Data Helvetios beet dco bea testae tue tpud totus A 1 A2 Notes on Heading Error Dal aiios eno Re rta Aaa rb oe Pb A 5 A3 LIST OP FIQUICS cmm EE A 7 A4 Tale S caua E 17 MOO B 1 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT iii Think amp Do iv PHOENIX CONTACT 2364_en_B Section 1 This section informs you about Features and Benefits of the Think amp Do software System Concepts BEIG BeON p ERR 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 2 Manual nnne nnne nn nnn nnns 1 4 1 2 1 Ide dio T rx 1 4 1 2 2 Keyboard 1 4 1 3 eE E E 1 5 1 4 Using 1 5 1 5 SUSIETIT eo DIS 1 6 1 5 1 Hebe 1 6 1 5 2 Think amp Do Methods 1 7 1 5 3 Target SY SICINS oni Facete ou 1 8 1 5 4 Where s the Runtime Software 1 9 1 6 Phoenix
170. Component Use this interface to set properties that should not be changed dur ing the runtime fixed properties The Members button in the Object Properties dialog box opens additional dialog boxes that allow you to do the following A Associate tags to properties of the NET Component jump Trigger methods from the NET Component based on tag change jump Configure scripts which are executed when Events from the NET Component occur jump The Configuring NET Control Objects page 6 93 describes how to configure these interfaces Grid Object she The Grid object allows you to read write data in a tabular format from the data source con figured in the object To draw one do the following 1 Click the Grid tool Grid Object 2 Click onthe screen click the left mouse button and drag the mouse across the screen Tool to create a box of the desired size while holding down the mouse button 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 6 39 Think amp Do 6 40 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 Release the mouse button and the Grid object will display an or ee Figure 6 44 Sample Grid object Right click on the Grid object and select Properties from the menu This displays the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties da Replace Hint Data 2068 Fonts Data Highlight Color LE n E ign Columns Advanced Text Color Win
171. D WHITE 100 100 Tag Write T amp D READ WRITE 50 50 Tag Read Write T amp D READ WRITE 100 100 Tag Read Write Thus the packet size can be optimized for the amount of data typically read written trad ing off the number of tags versus system loading Now select the name of the OPC server that provides the connection to the other applica tion s data PHOENIX CONTACT 8 15 Think amp Do select the OPC server for the Tag Link 1 Click the Browse button in the Add Tag Link dialog box The icons for the PC and the Network Neighborhood if applicable appears as shown in Figure 8 15 Browse for OPC Server VisualLogicController OPCDA 2 VLC OPCDA Server Steeplechase LC T argetHM OPCDA 1 VLC Targe Steeplechase WLC Targets OPCDA 1 VLC Targets L ThinkNDo OPCDA1 Think amp Do OPC Server 4 ThinkNDaCE DPCDA 1 Think amp Do OPC Server Es Network Neighborhood gt Cancel Figure 8 15 The Browse for OPC Server dialog box 2 Click the to expand the listing for the PC Development in the example and the Browse function automatically locates any OPC servers on the PC 3 Click the name of the OPC server of the other application to which the Tag Link driver will communicate Note that Think amp Do OPC Servers will be listed but they do not ap ply for this OPC Client configuration The Browse for OPC Server dialog box searches
172. DB Get multiple records Get previous record UPDATE Modify data in DB t Refresh existing recordset Get nest record DELETE Delete data from 7 Close existing recordset Get last record C Si Tables InProcess Flag zu Result Number Result String E Advanced Ok Cancel Validate Figure 5 18 SQL Block General tab For a full discussion on SQL database operations see SQL Database Operations on page 7 37 2364 5 25 Think amp Do 5 2 15 Wait Block The Wait block inserts a wait period in the execution of the flow chart Configure the wait pe riod in milliseconds Select the One Scan Wait check box to have the block for exactly one scan cycle Setting the Wait Time to zero automatically sets the One Scan Cycle check box WW alt To configure the wait time Wait block 1 Double click the Wait block to display the Wait Block Expression tab see Figure 5 19 Button Wait Block Expression Properties One Scan Wait Wait Time Millisecends Cancel Help Figure 5 19 The Wait Block Expression tab 2 Dooneofthe following To wait for one scan cycle select the One Scan Wait check box The duration changes to zero the next time the Wait Block dialog box opens if it was previously non zero and Wait Time becomes unavailable To
173. Data item Bitwise Functions and or not wor lt lt gt gt Math feos fest fe fc gt 3 Cancel Help Figure 7 12 Scaling equation in the Calculation Block Expression tab To scale Float values for analog outputs 1 Derive the equation for the line in the figure below the reverse of the prior graph The scaled Float analog value is the x axis and the converted raw analog value Number is the y axis 2 Forthe number y use the one mapped to the analog output In this way the Calcula tion block can directly update the analog output value 3 Update the analog output as often as the application will require it at Runtime y y mx b Number e raw analog output m we 0 Float Using the expression with the standard scaling equation the project needs just Calcu lation block per input or output channel 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 7 33 Think amp Do 7 9 String Handling This section discusses string type data items and flow chart blocks that handle them String data items contain UNICODE characters or text While text messages in HMI screens are for display and data entry the embedding of text characters in string data items give you the ability to parse sort concatenate and other typical string handling tasks Both Move and Calculation blocks are useful in manipulating string data The Comm block is also useful
174. Devices After adding an I O driver to the configuration you can connect it to actual I O if it exists and is connected to the I O network or scanner card in the PC To connect to an system From the Configuration Connect menu or use the Connect toolbar button ram lOView instructs the I O adapter card to connect to the bases or devices on the network im mediately It reads the status I O count and type from all devices in order to create an Connect image of the physical Note that not all networks support this capability Button 3 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Drivers Devices and Tags When lOView connects to the I O it creates an image similar to the one shown in Figure 3 6 This example matches DL205 base which uses an Ethernet Base Controller in the left most slot The modules adjacent to it include an 8 point input simulator 2 085 and an 8 point relay output module D2 O8TH Z4 Think amp Do lOView Sortation Example tio Configuration ba Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Window Help I O status legend Module view Missing Base Module or Any Other Extra Base Module I O base found Duplicate Base or Module Mismatch Slot 2 Slot 2 EtherNet Bases 1 Board view e driver Status bars color coded Refresh Grid Module Type Numer 1 Serial Port Settings Click Here Board Info Board Status Mapping gt Module Status Mapping 1 0
175. Do data type for the tag selected in the Tag name column This cell is read only and is provided solely for informational purposes Tagname The column permits selection of a Think amp Do tag a pop up dialog window that receives transfers with the database or data source field name specified in the Field column Double clicking pops up the tag choice dialog box for tag selection The di alog box shows the tag data type that matches the field type in a drop down list field Use the drop down list to select Array if choosing an array of the appropriate type Manual entry is not allowed in this field Use Complete Array s The Use Complete Array s check box is available when selecting Get multiple records on the General tab With this check box selected Think amp Do retrieves all records that sat isfy the query and fills the field arrays with entries from the recordset until the smallest array is full or all records have been transferred With this option selected it is not necessary to explicitly close the recordset The Use Complete Array s operation does not clear unused array elements If you want unused elements cleared you must perform this operation prior to executing the SQL block When used with INSERT Put data in DB function the SQL block inserts records into the database until all elements of the smallest array are exhausted Array In
176. E otherwise the check box will be checked By default Think amp Do will use the value 0 for unchecked and the value 1 for checked Time Displays the value in the Time format e g HH MM SS This setting is available only when the Data Source type is set to Database Date Displays the value in the Date format e g MM DD YYY Y This setting is available only when the Data Source type is set to Database Date Time Displays the value in the Date Time format e g MM DD YYYY HH MM SS This setting is available only when the Data Source type is set to Database Notes When the Data Source type is set to Database it is important to make sure that the Type for each column configured in the object matches the Type of the respective field in the database When the Data Source type is set to Database you can configure valid SQL state ments directly in the Field e g List DISTINCT Cell Name AS Cell Name You can also configure tagnames between curly brackets to modify this setting during the runtime e g MyFieldName H If Picture is the column type the Grid object displays a default icon if the picture file is not found during the runtime You can configure a different picture to be displayed when the file is not found by copying the picture file to the Web sub folder of the application and configuring its name on the lt gt file as follows Objects Gri
177. ECT Get data from DB radio button It determines the type of SELECT request executed The types available are Get single record generates an SQL request that retrieves all records matching the SQL request conditions copies the first record s field values to the corresponding tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab and then closes the recordset Get multiple records This option requires closing unless the Tag Mappings tab defines arrays with the Fill Arrays option selected Tag Mapping Tab on page 7 42 It generates an SQL request that retrieves all records matching the SQL request condi tions and copies the first record s field values to the corresponding tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab The recordset is automatically closed when Fill Arrays is se lected otherwise it is not closed When Fill Arrays is not used the recordset is left open for subsequent SQL blocks that may perform operations on the same recordset A complementary Close existing recordset request is required for each Get multiple records request Refresh existing recordset retrieves the current recordset from the database This may be necessary because selection of multiple records caches selected records in memory Get first previous next and last commands operate on the cached recordset not on the actual database records If an update modifies the database after the Get multiple r
178. ERERE BOLE Incomes e e e EAEJEAE N Flags 1 Timer Wwe Fixed Integers 1 Register 1 Counter 1 Number Legend gt System 2364 5 12 2364 p Control Control block Button il 4 Flow Charts 5 2 7 Control Block The Control block is the most basic building block of a flow chart It is one of the action blocks of the Think amp Do see Types of Action Blocks on page 4 13 Its job is to do the discrete actions listed in its expression list A Control block is capable of setting bits ON or OFF flags or outputs and doing internal timer or counter operations Use the Control Block dialog box to select the action s for the control block Flag or Output ON or OFF Pulse an Output where a pulse turns off after a specified duration A Pulse output with a duration of zero causes the output to be on for a single scan only Start stop reset or restart a Timer ncrement decrement or reset a counter Unlike ladder logic these actions are atched In other words when turning an output on it stays on until the flow chart or another flow chart turns it off The only exception is the pulse output which automatically turns off after the specified duration entered in the Data Item grid The Control Block can perform up to ten actions Double clic
179. Explorer bar to see a list of the project s HMI screens Figure 6 1 oo Primary Screen Sortation Example 18 Page 123 All abc Startup Ha Data items Data Logging 5 Project Docs Figure 6 1 The Screens Explorer bar in ProjectCenter The folders in the Screens Explorer bar list screens by screen sets The top level folder is the Primary Screens set The first folder under that has the name of the project Within the project screen set there are categories that appear as sub folders The categories are not PHOENIX CONTACT 6 3 Think amp Do necessarily exclusive meaning that a screen can appear in multiple folders In addition you can create screen sets that appear under the project set The pre defined screen set cate gories are Page 123 lists all HMI screens in numerical order order in which they were creat ed All abc lists all HMI screens in alphabetical order Startup lists the single screen user selected that the project initially displays at runtime 6 2 1 Expanding the Explorer Tree To expand the Screens Explorer bar tree click the beside the folder to expand 6 2 2 Setting a Startup Screen To make a screen the startup screen 1 Select the screen name in the Screens Explorer bar 2 Inthe main ProjectCenter window select the Startup Screen check box in the Options group 6
180. Format Date Time Scale Strings Format DEMM aY HHIMIMISS hs Number of Labels 2 OK Cancel e For Numeric the Scale Fromat button displays the following dialog box Format Numeric Truncate zeroes in the decimals Number of Labels 2 OK Cancel 6 80 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques The number of decimal points for the X or Y scale Decimals can be configured with a tag Therefore this setting can be modified dynamically during the runtime Period depends on the Data configured for the X axis as shown in Table 6 11 Table 6 11 Period Properties Depend on Data Type Data Type Property Description Auto when selected the Trend Control object works with Start Date Time when it is triggered to Pause Mode and it works with Time Before Now when it is triggered to Date Time Type Start Date Time when selected the value of the tag con Period figured in the Time field defines the starting Date Time for the data displayed on the object Time Before Now when selected the value of the tag configured in the Time field defines the amount of time be fore the current Date Time which will be used as the start ing Date Time for the data displayed on the object Play Mode this tag The format of the value supported by this property is Duration Defines the Period of
181. Group development system In Think amp Do a PC running the Windows XP Vista or 7 operating system is called a Cer tified PC This manual and Help use the term Certified PC or Windows based PC when referring to a PC that is using one of these operating systems 1 5 4 Where s the Runtime Software Each Think amp Do package includes a CD ROM that equips one Windows based PC to de velop and run Think amp Do projects But what about Windows CE hardware platforms Win dows CE based systems such as the WinPLC come with a Think amp Do Runtime license and have the Runtime software Windows CE version already loaded in its firmware When you purchase a Think amp Do version of a Windows CE platform it already knows how to run Think amp Do projects Just select the station name of the Windows CE device and run The PC used to develop the project downloads that project to the Windows CE engine to run In this way you can use one Think amp Do software package on a Windows based PC to de velop projects for many Windows CE machines When you have completed the project for the target system you can permanently discon nect the development system PC The Windows CE system contains the Think amp Do Runtime and the project everything it needs to be a stand alone controller When developing projects targeted to run on an off the shelf Windows based PC a Think amp Do package must be purchased for each PC just as each one must
182. HOENIX CONTACT After entering the formula in the Excel spreadsheet cell press lt Enter gt or click out of the cell Excel begins generating client requests for information If the Think amp Do Runtime project is running and the TND2DDE program DDE Server is also active the cell displays the tag name value see Figure 8 21 You can make other cells display values from different tag names File Edit Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 287 BRS Belz Arial 10 BZU TND2DDE data ProductionTotal 2 3 I Figure 8 21 Excel can display tag values from a running Think amp Do project If saving the spreadsheet the next time it is opened it displays a dialog box like the one shown below asking to update the links in the workbook Microsoft Excel The workbook you opened contains automatic links to information in another workbook Do you want to update this A workbook with changes made to the other workbook To update all linked information click Yes To keep the existing information click No Figure 8 22 Excel may prompt to update links to Think amp Do tags If DDE server is running click the Yes button to update the links and resume communica tion The cells with tagname formulas display the current values If DDE server is not running Excel will prompt to start the server Click the Yes button to start DDE server Data communication should begin
183. HOENIX CONTACT You can also view and remove breakpoints in the Breakpoints dialog box Figure 10 10 In FlowView select the Debug Breakpoints menu Breakpoints Enabled Flowchart Block Number Main Conveyor Shift Cancel Help Remove All Remove Figure 10 10 The Breakpoints dialog box To disable a breakpoint clear the checkbox To delete a breakpoint select it and click the Remove button To delete all breakpoints click the Remove All button Breakpoints are saved with a project Step Control The data sample rate of FlowView debugging is 250 ms If you need to monitor data values that change too quickly to see in real time you can execute the flow charts one step at a time Step control can change the current action of the Runtime system This can have dramatic effects on a running project Be sure you understand the possible consequences of your action Step Block You can incrementally execute flow charts in a project one block at a time Execution auto matically stops after each block Program execution begins with the first flow chart in multi ple flow chart projects Monitor the FlowView window while using the Degug Step Block menu to see each flow chart block highlighted as each step occurs You can use the Step Block function in any flow chart When the stepped execution encoun ters a Call block it treats the corresponding subroutine as one block The nex
184. ING SUDCA dean tas 5 27 6 Operator Screen 6 3 6 1 Target Hardware 6 3 6 2 ee 6 3 6 3 ScreenView Development 6 5 6 4 Setting Screen ALrIDUteS 6 112 6 5 Sree n 6 114 6 6 6 115 6 7 USN SCAPI 6 131 7 A 7 3 7 1 Exploring BIRD 7 3 7 2 Tagname Data Types and 7 6 7 3 Understanding ANAY oot 7 8 7 4 Think amp Do System Data 7 11 7 5 Counting with Number Data 7 15 7 6 SING the Move 7 16 7 7 Using the Calculation BOCK 7 25 7 8 Handing Analog V e 7 30 7 9 Handling reper PE 7 34 10 SL Database OperatiOnS
185. NTACT Table 6 22 Alarm Worksheet Body Settings Message Message associated to the alarm The message can Text and or Tag be displayed on the Alarm Event Control object and or up to 256 chars stored in the Alarm History and or sent by Email de pending on the settings configured in the header of the Alarm group Priority Priority number associated to the alarm When display Number ing alarms on the Alarm Event Control object the op from 0 up to 255 erator can filter and or sort the alarms by priority Selection Alias associated to the alarm e g AreaA AreaB etc Text When displaying alarms on the Alarm Event Control up to 7 characters object the operator can filter and or sort the alarms by their selection value Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings dialog box see Figure 6 127 is where you configure additional settings for alarm conditions Access this by clicking the Advanced button in the alarm header settings section of the Alarm worksheet Advanced Disable 22 Total Alarms 22 ence Total Unack 2 Remote Ack Trigger Dead Band Time sec Activation Normalization Time Stamp Value Activation Norm Figure 6 127 Alarm worksheet Advanced settings dialog box Table 6 23 describes the advanced settings on an Alarm worksheet Table 6 23 Alarm Worksheet Advanced Settings Stk Disable When the value of the tag configured in this is TR
186. Object Click the List Box tool to create a list box object on your screen Generally when you ex ecute an application the active list box object displays a list of messages Onascreen containing only one list box object and no text input boxes the list box ob ject will be active automatically Onascreen containing multiple list box objects and text input boxes you can use a cur sor pointing device or the Tab key to select and activate a list box object PHOENIX CONTACT 6 49 Think amp Do You can select a message from the active list box during runtime and write the message value to a tag If a list is too long to fit within the viewable area of a list box object the object provides scroll bars Use the Enter Reqd box on the Object Properties dialog box to configure selected mes sages as follows Check enable the Enter box and use the keyboard keypad keys list control objects from the Library pointing devices or user defined keys containing the Post Keys function to scroll through the message list Then use the Enter key to select the message and write its value to the write tag You can use the Esc and Tab keys to return to the previously selected message at any time prior to pressing the Enter key Uncheck disable the Enter Reqd field to write the value of a selected highlighted message the write tag automatically To add list box objects to a scr
187. Returns a value which is the cosine of an angle The value of the number or expression must be valid for an angle in radians exp Returns the base of natural logarithms e raised to a power The constant e is approximately equal to 2 71828 This function returns e raised to the power of x where x is the value of the expression Returns a value that is the natural logarithm of a number The value of the expression must be greater than zero log10 Returns a value that is the log base 10 of a number The value of the ex pression must be greater than zero round Normalizes a floating point number or expression result to the nearest inte ger value eliminating the fractional part Fractional parts equal to 0 5 or greater round upward sin Returns a value which is the sine of an angle The value of the expression must be valid for angle in radians sqr Returns the square root of the value specified tan Returns a value which is the tangent of an angle The value of the expres sion must be valid for an angle in radians The value of n trunc Discards the fractional part of a floating point number or expression result leaving the integer portion Derived Functions The math functions Table 7 8 can be used to compute other related math functions In the following example x represents a data item or constant in radians cosecant x sin x 1 cotangent x tan x 1 secant x cos x 1 The in
188. SubconveyorArray 12 P Amy 1 fMWhteSubcomeyomy 12 Amy 3 edsucoweyoAmy j 1 2 Chart A A Statistics Datalterns Watchi Watch z Wate hs Watch Byte Figure 7 5 AppTracker watch window with timer variables visible 7 5 Counting with Number Data Items Think amp Do provides up to 65535 Number type data items for use in the project Each num ber is a signed integer Numbers are 32 bit values having a range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Also numbers have Initial Value and Description fields in the Data Items grid The main characteristics of number data items are Numbers can count upward increment and downward decrement An Initial value can be specified for each number in the Data Item grid The initial value is the number s beginning value at Runtime The numbers Clear control accessible from a flow chart Control block sets the num ber s value to O PHOENIX CONTACT 7 15 Think amp Do number s Increment control adds one to the current count number s Decrement control subtracts one from the current count Anumber can count both in the positive and negative number ranges Accordingly you can specify a negative initial value A number can increment or decrement each scan if a Control block performs that action Counting is not t
189. TACT 6 61 2364 Think amp Do aus C Align Right Tool EL Align Tool ol nT ae Align Bottom Tool 6 62 PHOENIX CONTACT Click the Align right tool to align all selected objects to the right edge of the last object selected For an example see the following figure gt Before Align Right After Align Right Figure 6 61 Aligning objects right Click the Align top tool to align all selected objects to the top edge of the last objected selected For an example see the following figure a Be E Before Align Top After Align Top Figure 6 62 Aligning objects top Click the Align bottom tool to align all selected objects to the bottom edge of the last object selected For an example see the following figure 4 1 WD a 9 Before Align Bottom After Align Bottom Figure 6 63 Aligning objects bottom 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Click the Center Vertically tool to align all selected objects to the vertical center of the inn last object selected For an example see the following figure Verticall Too 5 a Before Center Vertically After Center Vertically Figure 6 64 Centering objects vertically Click the Center Horizontally tool to align all selected objects to the horizontal center m of the last object selected For an example see the following figure 4
190. Tag Advanced True Value 1 st Security Disable 8 Figure 6 114 Object Properties Check Box 2364 Operator Screen Techniques field where you would normally configure a tag expression or value you can in stead define a custom property using the following sytax lt Label gt lt Default gt where Label is a name to identify the property when you are completing the proper ties on an instance of the symbol and Default is an optional default value for the property All standard syntax applies to Default including tagnames indirect tags arrays strings numerical and boolean values and scripting expressions Also even if you do not want to assign a default value to the custom property you must type the colon character after the Label 4 nthis example we want to be able to customize which tag the check box will en able disable when it is clicked in the Tag field type HOption1 Tag as shown Figure 6 115 Object Properties a Replace Hint Check Box Caption Check Tag Optiont Advanced True Value 1 Shit ap Security CH Disable 8 Figure 6 115 Object Properties Check Box with custom property specified When completing the properties of an instance of the symbol the Option1 Tag prop
191. Think amp Project Think amp Station Network Station Type ame IP Address Network Description HunterwinPLE 149 208 181 49 Connected Hunter s Version bytes Think amp 8 0 0 1 Total 1205 2 12 Available 887 Switches acd Connection monitor animated while connected Select CE Station Identify CE Station Target hardware resources and settings Storage bytes Total Available SWO Project will start automatically on power up For proper operation all other switches must be Status Batten Status Okay Figure 9 9 The Think amp Do CE Watch 2600 2509 Think amp Do Station tab CE Watch individually accesses each station target on a network Since each target is an independent Runtime system each can be running a different project with different scan times or Some may be stopped CE Watch lets you control a particular CE target without disturbing the remaining targets in a system 9 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 2364 Building and Running Projects To configure a Think amp Do CE Station 1 Click the Think amp Do Station tab 2 Click the Select CE Station button The CE Watch CE Station Selection dialog box appears Figure 9 10 listing all the Windows CE targets on the network Think a
192. UE Tag all alarms configured in this group are temporarily dis abled This option is useful to disable alarms under special conditions e g during maintenance Total Alarms The tag configured in this field if any is updated with Tag the number of alarms from this group which are cur rently active Total Unack The tag configured in this field if any is updated with Tag the number of alarms from this group which are cur rently active AND have not been acknowledged yet 2364 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Table 6 23 Alarm Worksheet Advanced Settings Remote Ack Trigger When the tag configured in this field change of value all active alarms from this group are acknowledged This option can be used to acknowledge alarms re gardless of any action from the operator Dead Band Time Each alarm must remain continuously in its alarm con Tag or gt Activation dition for the period of time specified in this field before Number becoming active This option is useful to avoid gener ating alarms on intermittent conditions e g noise If this field is left in blank the alarm becomes active as soon as its condition is true Dead Band Time Each alarm must remain continuously out from its Tag or gt Normalization alarm condition for the period of time specified in this Number field before becoming normalized This option is useful to avoid normalizing alarms on intermittent conditions e g
193. Using the Calculation Block with Strings The Calculation block is very powerful and includes a set of functions for manipulating string data items and values Table 7 9 Calculation Block Functions Function Description fours sting emendam returns the value of characters in a string as a numeric value of the appro priate type In addition to the functions above the Calculation block can concatenate strings join end to end by using the addition function Complex nesting of string operations may produce build errors If this occurs separate the expression into multiple Calculation blocks Find Function The Find function determines the location of a string within another string data item The re sult returns an integer representing the zero based index location of the first occurrence of the substring If the substring is not found Find returns a 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 35 Think amp Do The format of the expression using the Find function in the Calculation field is Result Find source substring where Result is the number data item that receives the location source is the string to be searched substring is the string to be found Mid Function The Mid function extracts and returns a substring from within a string Certain parameters can be specified that allow the search to find the substring The format of the expression in the Calculation field is Result
194. X CONTACT 6 95 Think amp Do Configuring Events Select the Events tab to configure the Framework objects Members Properties Methods Events Parameters AutosizeChanged BackColorChanged Background mageChanged BackgroundImageLayout BindingContextChanged CausesValidationChanged ChangeUICues f Click ClentSizeChanged JE JE JE JE lt Figure 6 99 The NET Control Members Events tab Events tab provides a grid with the following fields Event lists all events available from the Component Parameters specifies tags associated with the corresponding event If the event does not support any parameter then the fixed text None is displayed Otherwise you can enter the tags that you want to associate with the parameter When the event has more than one parameter you can enter one tag for each parameter separating them by a comma For example TagA TagB TagC When you click the Browse button it will display the list of parameters supported by the event allowing you to associate one tag with each parameter When the event occurs either the value of the tags are written to the parameters of the method input parameters or after the event occurs the NET Component writes the value of the parameters to the tags output parameters Script specifies the script that will be executed when the event is t
195. a line on the screen rotation dynamic You can rotate a line up to 360 degrees Reference combo box specifies one of the following as a reference point on which to rotate the object throughout the screen e Left Top is the upper left corner of the object e Right Bottom is the lower right corner of the object e Center is the center of the object 6 3 9 Using the Mode Toolbar The Mode toolbar provides tools for general screen editing Figure 6 24 The Mode toolbar The tools in the Mode toolbar are described below Selection Click the Selection tool to display a cursor that allows you to select or move objects on the Screen Bitmap Editor Click the Bitmap Editor tool to switch between the two basic editing layers Objects layer specifies the layer on which you create the dynamic objects for your Screen Background Picture layer is the static background layer of the same screen You automatically disable the Bitmap Editor tool when you uncheck disable the Enable Background box BMP type only on the Screen Attributes dialog box Fill Color Click the Fill Color tool to specify a default fill color for the following objects Closed Polygons Ellipses Rounded Rectangles Rectangles To save development time select several objects of any type specified in the preceding list and use the Fill Color tool to specify a default fill color for all of t
196. ab Although the Members dialog box displays the list of all properties methods and events you only have to configure the items that you need for your project The screen shots used in the following sections depict the CheckBox component Al though the names of properties methods and events varies by component the configu ration interface is the same for any NET Component The concepts described here apply to all of them 2364 6 93 Think amp Do 6 94 PHOENIX CONTACT The Properties tab provides a grid with the following fields Property list all properties available from the NET Component and indicate their types as shown in Table 6 17 Table 6 17 NET Framework Poperty Icons Property Property Icon Type rom T Tag Expression specifies the tag associated with the respective property of the NET Component The Action column will define whether the value of this tag will be written to the property or if the value of the property will be written to this tag or both Action defines the direction of the interface between the tag or expression configured in the Tag Expression field and the NET property according to Table 6 18 Table 6 18 NET Framework Actions Action Description 0 Get Read the value of the property and write it to the tag configured in the Tag Expression field Set Write the value from t
197. able Visible Figure 6 103 The Runtime View pop up dialog box 6 98 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Data Source Database Clicking the Data button with Database as the Data Source displays the Grid Data Database dialog box shown below Database Configuration Settings Database W Use application default Advanced T able Use default name Automatically create x Feres Run Time Status cena Figure 6 104 The Grid Data Class Tag dialog box See the Database Configuration Dialog Box topic in the Think amp Do online Help for more information about this dialog box PHOENIX CONTACT 6 99 Think amp Do Configuring Columns Configure the settings for each column displayed by the Grid object during the runtime by clicking the Columns button in the Grid Object Properties dialog box This displays the following dialog box Columns 175 LEFT Text 100 LEFT Show ID Column Allow sorting columns Move Down Cancel Figure 6 105 The Grid Columns dialog box The columns in this dialog box are Column specifies the ID Number that defines the position of the column in the table entera Title for each column which will display as the heading first row of the Grid object Configure tags between curly brackets in the Label field to modify it dynamically during the runtim
198. able 6 12 ScreenView Toolbar Icons Run Set the Trend to the Play Mode In this 0 Play Mode on mode the X axis is continuously updated 1 Play Mode off Online Mode This option is disabled grayed out when the trend is already in Play Mode Stop Set the Trend to the Stop Mode In this Stop Mode on mode the X axis is not continuously up 1 Stop Mode off dated History Mode so the user can visu alize history data in a frozen period of time This option is disabled grayed out when the trend is already in Stop Mode Period 3 Launches an embedded dialog box where When the Activa the user can modify the X axis scale main tion Tag changes settings value e g tog Window Zoom Allows the user to click on the Trend area gles this com and drag the cursor to select the area that Nand is exe must be visible when the cursor is released This option is disabled grayed out when the Multiple Section option for the Y scale is active Horizontal i Allows the user to click on two points on the Zoom Trend area defining the Horizontal scale that must be available Vertical Zoom Allows the user to click on two points on the Trend area defining the Vertical scale that must be available This option is disabled grayed out when the Multiple Section op tion for the Y scale is active Zoom In rs Allows the user to zoom in display half of 0 2 Zoom In on 1 the current X and Y scales
199. able Background BMP width 1279 In Height 897 Lett ss E Hide Huntime Properties Screen Logic whieOgen Style Replace Partial Border Mone redraw Focus focus on open Share tab order with other screens Tab Order 0 Cancel Figure 4 13 Use the Screen Attributes dialog box to set up a new screen 2 Inthe Screen Attributes dialog box type a description of the screen in the Descrip tion field Set the Size and Location for the Runtime screen 4 Click the OK button For a discussion of additional options in this dialog box see Setting Screen Attributes on page 6 112 4 12 3 ScreenView Development Environment ScreenView uses standard tools and interfaces to make the product user friendly ScreenView provides an integrated and unique development environment that gives you fast and easy access to tools and information The ScreenView development environment see Figure 4 14 consists of the following basic areas Title Bar Indicates the active display or worksheet 2364 en B General Programming Techniques Menu Bar Contains the main product options and controls which you can easily ac cess using the cursor or your keyboard Toolbars Provide access to features and tools used in the development environment Workspace Provides tree view control fro
200. able TAB to navigate through cells when selected the user can only navigate through the cells of the Grid Object with the arrow keys rather than the Tab key You should disable the Tab key for navigation if you want it to be used for switching to the next object that supports focus on the screen Concatenate Label for picture when selected the reference name for the picture is the result of the concatenation of the name in the Field column with the value of the La bel column The result will be Label name Field value Export exports the data from the Grid object to a class array tag regardless of the Data Source selected for the object The fields shown in Table 6 20 must be specified to support this feature Table 6 20 Grid Advanced Dialog Box Export Fields Fed Description Class tag Type the main tagname of the class array tag that will receive the exported values Each row from the Grid object will be exported to one array position ofthe array tag by matching column labels The initial array position can be configured in this field O is the default Trigger When the tag configured in this field changes value e g toggles the data is exported from the Grid object to the class array tag configured in the Class tag field The Export feature is an easy and powerful tool to transfer data from different data sourc es to tags After exporting the data to tags you can use different tasks to manipula
201. able source file if it resides in target mem ory However the editable source file is not decompressed and made accessible for edit ing by this method In ProjectCenter click the File Launch Instant Recall menu to do that If uploading the source file you can decompress the file using a standard file compres sion utility The editable source may be password protected However this does not prevent upload to the development PC Upload does not attempt to expand uncompress the file nor does it prompt for the password In fact you can transfer both the executable and editable source files to another target without ever knowing the password of the protected file To expand the editable source file use Instant Recall in ProjectCenter which prompts for the password if necessary Clear Files This erases the executable source file in target memory It also erases the compressed ed itable source file if it is in target memory Watch requests confirmation before erasing the file s 9 6 1 Security Menu Lock You can prevent Watch from changing the target station s current running stopped state Click the Security Lock menu and enter a password Make sure to write down the pass word somewhere safe to unlock Watch The password becomes resident in the target memory and the Stop Restart and Load amp Start buttons in Watch are disabled A new Watch connection to the target will behave the same
202. abs They are SQL Statement Name This is a general purpose comment field that currently plays no specific purpose at this time You can use it as a simple identifier description Change DB The Change DB button selects an OLE DB Provider to be used for the SQL request The OLE DB provider can be any one of many provided with Windows including but not limited to Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft Access Oracle and ODBC To use Microsoft Access databases select the Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Additionally there are four buttons at the bottom of the dialog box which are global to the dialog and pertinent to the SQL block operation Connect Click the Connect button to connect to the database or data source identified by the Change DB button Connecting to the database reads the list of tables and displays them in the Tables list on the General tab This button is NOT available when in Online Monitor or Online Monitor and Edit modes a You must reconnect whenever you close and re open the SQL block OK The OK button accepts and validates the existing SQL request choices commits the data to the block configuration and closes the SQL Block dialog box This button is NOT available when in Online Monitor or Online Monitor and Edit modes Click this button after fully defining the SQL statement using all the tabs in this dialog box Cancel The
203. ace To create a new background script group do one of the following Right click the Scripts Background folder and then select New Background Script from the pop up menu Selectthe File New Background Script menu To edit an existing background script double click its icon in the Scripts Background folder in the ScreenView Explorer This opens the script in a tab in the ScreenView work space To save or close a script right click its tab and select the appropriate menu 6 7 2 Global Procedures Use global procedures to declare and implement procedures that can be called by any other VBScript in the project You can declare local variables within each procedure declared in this interface local scope within each procedure however you cannot declare global vari ables in this interface PHOENIX CONTACT 6 131 Think amp Do 6 132 PHOENIX CONTACT To create or edit global procedures double click the Global Procedures icon in the Scripts Application folder This opens the script in a tab in the ScreenView workspace see Figure 6 134 Global Procedures Option Explicit Keep the Option Explicit statement in the first line of this interface Procedures with global scope can be implemented here Slobal variables are NOT supported in this interface Figure 6 134 Global Procedure script page An asterisk following the tab name indicates that the page has changed and requi
204. ains active 6 58 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Config opens the Configuration dialog box which allows you to specify style and state parameters for the pushbutton Configuration Effect Align Button Color Rectangle Floating RE Open Closed Color Blink NONE Color m Blink NONE Caption Text Caption Text2 Fonts Text Blink NONE Fonts Text Blink NONE Write value 8 Write Value Auto Format Cancel Figure 6 57 The pushbutton Configuration dialog box This dialog box provides the following parameters Style specifies a pushbutton style Rectangle default or Rectangle with Indicator Effect specifies 3 D effect for the pushbutton The choices are e Floating default specifies buttons that resemble a flat object with a shadow e 3D specifies buttons that have beveled edges and appear to depress into the screen when pressed Align specifies the alignment for the caption of the pushbutton Caption specifies the caption of the button Alternatively if the button style includes an indicator the legend plate You can use the Style and Effect parameters in combination to create four different but tons as shown in the following figures Floating Rectangle 3D Rectangle Floating Rectangle 3D Rectangle default with Indicator
205. al Programming Techniques The content of this dialog depends on the object or group of objects selected by the user However the following interfaces are common for any object or group of objects Table 4 1 Object Properties dialog box properties Pin button When the pin button is released focus is Button passed to the object on the screen as soon as that object is selected When the pin button is pressed focus remains on the Object Proper ties window even when you click the objects on the screen Replace Launches the Replace Dialog where you can Button replace strings tags or properties for the se lected object or group of objects Hint Tooltip displayed during runtime when the Text and or Tag mouse cursor remains ove the object This op up to 256 chars tion is useful to provide hints to the operator during runtime The text on the Hint field is also written to the Internal Tag Hint during run time Therefore you can trigger actions based on the value of this tag Butlin The combo box at the right side of the dialog Combo box box lets the user select a specific object of ob jects that must be edited The Enable Tooltip option must be enabled checked on the Project Settings dialog box Otherwise the tooltips are NOT displayed during the runtime when the user points the mouse cursor on the objects You can enable disable this feature for the local server
206. al device being connected 5 Click the OK button to close the dialog box After adding the port the name such as COM1 automatically disappears from the drop down list However COM ports in use by other drivers in the system will still be on the list If configuring these for use in OView a communications conflict will occur Therefore check for COM port usage before assigning a COM port to a Think amp Do device After adding a serial port device click the Module Info tab for the view shown below Z4 Think amp Do lOView Sortation Example tio Configuration Ba Configuration View Drivers Devices Tools Window Help Dsm amp wan eamm cn Serial device added in Device View From PC Serial Ports Serial Bar Code Reader Driver 7 5 f Generic Serial Communication 1 9600 None 8 1 None Serial device attri butes in Module Info tab Refresh Grid COMI Bar Code Reader Serial Port Settings Access Type Access Type Generic Serial Communication 9600 None 8 StopBits 01 FlowConttol Click Here Receive Buffer Size Transmit Buffer Size Board Info Board Status Mapping gt Module Status Mapping 1 0 Mapping Figure 8 4 lOView Module Info tab PHOENIX CONTACT 8 5 Think amp Do 8 6 PHOENIX CONTACT The serial port device is now represented in the Module View upper right pane The graphic identifies the port device and shows
207. an editable source file in memory The dialog box displays project information if the target is running the project If the project is stopped the dialog box displays the message Station lt station name gt is stopped Project information is unavailable However the editable source file can still be opened if it is in target memory 7 Click the Open to transfer the editable source file to the development system 8 Inthe Save As dialog box that appears specify the upload directory for the project 9 Click the OK button Instant Recall expands uncompresses the source files and makes them ready to edit with Think amp Do tools Instant Recall can access a Windows CE target station s editable source file even when the target is running The target device transfers the file to the development system with out interrupting the running project on the target If you have problems establishing a connection with a Windows CE target see the Getting Started booklet or other documentation that came with the Windows CE device 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 9 13 Think amp Do 9 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Section 10 This section informs you about Using AppTracker Using the Watch Window Using FlowView in Monitor Mode Creating and Using Simulation Flow Charts Projects et bom 10 3 10 1 AD DINACK Si
208. anage displays and worksheets including options to paste copies of symbols not linked and copies of images that retain their links View Contains options that enable you to manage visible tools and provides shortcuts to the dialog boxes you open most frequently Project Contains options that enable you to execute applications locally and remotely and provides links used to configure general application settings Window Contains options that enable you to manage open displays and worksheets A Help Contains options that provide links to information about Think amp Do For a detailed discussion of each menu option see the Think amp Do online help 6 3 4 Toolbars ScreenView provides several toolbars that let you easily perform different actions within the program This section describes the function and default location of each toolbar The following toolbars contain general purpose tools and they are located across the top of the workspace just below the menu bar by default Align and Distribute Execution Dynamic Objects Mode Standard The following toolbars contain screen editing tools and they are located along the bottom of the development environment by default Active Objects Bitmap Static Objects Symbols The rest of this section describes each of the ScreenView toolbars PHOENIX CONTACT 6 11 Think amp Do New Screen Tool Save Tool Save
209. art the number will be in the 10000 range Subchart numbers are available in the Chart Properties dialog box which you open by selecting the File Chart Properties menu in FlowView For simulation flow charts you can calculate the flow chart number by subtracting the number of simulation flow charts found before it in the list The runtime system writes to the system data item whenever it encounters an error so if a project contains several errors only the last one is captured in the data item Bits 20 31 contain the block number When an error occurs in the Enable or Freeze Blocks the Runtime identifies the block as block 0 Bits 16 19 contain the error code 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 5 Think amp Do A 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 2364 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 List of Figures hink 6u Do Help MON etna 1 5 PCs connect to I O bases in 1 6 A PC can connect to a network with drops to devices 1 7 PC connect
210. art must exist and be saved to disk before you can edit the Call block param eters in the calling flow chart Parameter mapping lets a subchart create a temporary working copy of the calling flow chart s data items using different local names The mapping is defined in the Call Block Expression tab of the calling flow chart 5 3 6 Subchart Runtime Characteristics The following traits show how subcharts work when you run the project A single subchart can be called by one or more flow charts standard or subchart in a project even at the same time This multiplies a subchart s capacity to do work in the project Since subcharts can be called from many places each call is termed a context When debugging such a subchart FlowView prompts you to choose a debug context ask ing you which call you want to debug A flow chart or subchart that is executing has an Active status PHOENIX CONTACT 5 31 Think amp Do A flow chart or subchart that is currently executing a Wait block has a Waiting status until the block times out Asingle call to a subchart does not constitute parallel processing Specifically the call ing flow chart has an In Subchart status until the subchart completes returns If the subchart is down two or more levels all flow charts above it have an In Subchart status until it returns Asubchart that is not the destination of any Call block will not appear in the Flow Chart Exe
211. ases you will only configure data points displayed during the runtime which can be done easily by clicking the Points button from the Ob ject Property dialog box 2364 en B 2364 Trend Control Tool Operator Screen Techniques Click the Trend Control tool to add it to your application screen Double click on the object to launch its Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Trend Contral Border l Data Sources Type Sunker _ Data Sources Legend Toolbar NoFil Fill Pairs Advanced Figure 6 81 Object Properties Trend Control This Object Properties dialog box provides the following parameters Border group specifies a border line style by selecting None Solid Dashed Etched Raised or Sunken You can also select the color of the border line with the color box to the right of the Type field group lets you can choose a background color for the Trend Control object by se lecting it from the color box to the right of the Fill radio button If you select No Fill the background of the Trend Control object will remain transparent The buttons on this dialog box launch other dialog boxes for configuring specific settings for the Trend Control object They are Data Sources Points Axes Legend Toolba
212. asing the mouse button after the window snaps into place PHOENIX CONTACT 3 15 2364 en B Think amp Do 3 9 Watchdog Timeout Default I O States For most projects the actual state of I O points during a communications failure or during startup and shutdown is a major concern Many devices support special features to specify the state of the I O at these critical times with a specified communications watchdog timer action lOView provides complete access for configuring preferences for these situa tions To configure watchdog timeout states 1 Click the module graphic for the desired module to configure 2 Click the Board Info tab and note the Output State or Input State attributes in the Watchdog Action group The default settings are Zero off for outputs and Last State like a latch for inputs The accompanying list boxes select Zero Last State or Pattern for inputs and outputs 3 9 1 Startup Shutdown Output State This attribute defines what the outputs will do during startup or shutdown periods For ex ample the Ethernet base controller supports two modes FailSafe If the network communication times out between the Runtime and the base controller you can configure output and input states Startup Shutdown This feature defines the on off pattern used for outputs when the Runtime starts and stops Choosing a pattern as an I O state permits a combination of on off states for input or output mod
213. atch window in the format specified in the View menu 10 1 5 Using FlowView with AppTracker While AppTracker is connected to a running project you can access FlowView to debug specific flow charts In the Flow Chart Execution Path pane double click the flow chart to debug AppTracker opens FlowView and automatically loads the flow chart 10 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Debugging Projects 10 2 Using FlowView in Monitor Mode You can use FlowView to monitor Runtime operation with or without running App Tracker With the project running select Debug Monitor in ProjectCenter or FlowView Figure 10 8 shows an example of FlowView operating in Monitor mode with the Locals Window open It also shows EasyTrac highlighting execution path information FlowView Online MONITOR Mode Main Conveyor Shift BHA Debug Tools Window Help X Fie Edit view p D lt p gt we po Fe b Sw c A control Decision Compare Move Calc DoLoop Call Wait PID SQL Run Com Motion Note T a m 1 x mlcualonRezul ShifiRasie Timer Shiiise Time Li 1 J gt ShiftTime m5ec ShiftRate Timer vm rue y 1 Bement Locals window Figure 10 8 FlowView opened by AppTracker 2364 10 9 Think amp Do When opened this way FlowView s usual flow chart editing tools a
214. ate the rectangle Release the mouse button to stop drawing the object Double click on the object to view the Object Properties dialog box You cannot use the rounded rectangle tool to create a bar graph for Windows CE appli cations A rounded rectangle has one extra tracker in the lower left corner which enables you to modify the arc angle PHOENIX CONTACT 6 29 Think amp Do 6 30 PHOENIX CONTACT Object Properties a Replace Hint Rounded Rectangle Border Fill Type Solid No Fill i Color m fe Fill Color m Weight 1 Figure 6 32 Object Properties Rounded Rectangle Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the orthogo nal line Line specifies a borderline style by clicking the No Line Solid Line or Dashed Line button Color specifies a borderline color by clicking the Color button to open the Color di alog box Click the color to select it and then close the dialog box Weight specifies a borderline width by typing a number representing the line width in pixels into the text box provided Fill specifies whether the rectangle is filled by clicking No Fill or Fill If you select the Fill option specify a fill color by clicking on the Color button When the Color dialog box displays click a color to select it and close the dialog box Color specifies a fill color by cl
215. atrikon has created the software application named OPC Ex plorer This tool provides a good introduction to using OPC for accessing data in other Win dows based applications such as Think amp Do It allows selection of either Think amp Do OPC or Think amp Do CE OPC Server Then tagnames can be mapped to tags and data written OPC Explorer is available for download on the Matrikon website at www matrikon com Hefer to Matrikon for any application support needed on the OPC Explorer When an OPC client connects to the Think amp Do server it opens the Think amp Do OPC Server dialog box Figure 8 11 The logo is animated and the log display lists messages pertaining to the OPC connection fa Think amp Do OPC Server Think amp OPC Server Initialized Waiting For Think amp Do Runtime Connected to Think amp Do Runtime Settings Help ram Clear Display Figure 8 11 The Think amp Do OPC Server dialog box Think amp Do software also features COM DCOM for interfacing to other applications and network communications More information on COM DCOM is in an application note on the software CD and on the Web at www phoenixcontact com 8 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Communications 8 2 3 Configuring OPC Server There are a few configurable options available for OPC Server To access them click the Settings button in the Think amp Do OPC Server dialog box This
216. available in more than one Alarm group simultane ously because the Alarm Group is a property associated to each Tag Alarm Type e g Tag Level Alarm Type Hi Alarm Group 2 6 116 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Header Settings The header settings are at the top portion of the Alarm worksheet see Figure 6 125 Alarm1 EEE Colors in Alarm Controls Group n 222 5 Activation FG gt NN BG On Line History Acknowledgment Display in Alarm Controls Save To Disk FG i Bl Normalization Beep FG E gt Ec Send to printer E Figure 6 125 Alarm heading Table 6 21 describes the header settings on an Alarm worksheet Table 6 21 Alarm Worksheet Header Settings Fed Remarks Description Description of the alarm group 1 dis Text played on the workspace This field is up to 80 chars used for documentation only Group Name Name of the Alarm group During the run Text time the operator can filter alarms based up to 32 chars on the Group Name by the built in Fil ters dialog box of the Alarm Event con trol object Advanced Launches the Advanced Settings dia Button log box see Advanced Settings on page 6 120 where you configure addi tional settings for alarm conditions On Line When checked the alarms are available Checkbox gt Display in Alarm Co
217. avigate to the folder that has the pdb file 3 Selectthe file and click Open or double click the file in the browser 2 1 4 Project Explorer Bar Click the Project Explorer bar at top of pane to view the Think amp Do tool shortcuts Click any of these shortcut icons to directly access the Think amp Do tools see Figure 2 5 FlowView ScreenView OView Applracker CE Watch illi AppTracker Figure 2 5 The Project Explorer bar provides access to Think amp Do tools 2364 en B 2364 Creating a Project 2 1 5 Flow Chart and Screens Explorer Bars Click the second and third Explorer bars to view the project s flow charts and screens The initial folders name the categories that can be expanded after flow charts and screens exist listing them in a tree structure for project management Flow Charts 7 x fa Project al Flowcharts Standard 123 1 Auto Mode 2 Main Conveyor SF 3 Reset Counters All abc Simulation Subcharts Unused Screens E Data Items Data Logging 5 Project Docs Screens Primary Screen Sortation Example _ 123 All abc Startup Data tems Data Logging 3 Project Docs Figure 2 6 The Flow Charts and Screens Explorer bars PHOENIX CONTACT 2 7 Think amp Do 2 8
218. ay properties from all categories Figure 6 110 Symbol Properties dialog box for the linked symbol 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques In this example the three check boxes are used to determine whether to alert Tom Dick and or Harry The captions are updated accordingly and the check box tags are con figured with the first three indices of a Think amp Do flag array called TND AlertOptions Symbol Properties Category Property Option1 Caption Alert Tom OptioniTag TND AlertOptions 1 Option2Caption Alert Dick Option2Tag TND AlertOptions 2 Option3Caption Alert Harry Option3Tag TD AlertOptions 3 RectangleCaption Alert Options Display properties from all categories canc Figure 6 111 Symbol Properties dialog box with custom properties specified 3 Click the OK button to close the Symbol Properties dialog box and then close the Object Properties dialog box 4 ScreenView resolves custom properties during runtime Hemember the completed custom properties on each instance of a symbol are independent from every other instance of that symbol If you make any changes to the Master Symbol file then those changes automatically propagate to each instance when you re save a screen with one or more copies of the Master Symbol Creating Symbols To create a Master Symbol and save it to the Symbol folder follow these steps 1 Design your symbol just as you would no
219. ays important information about the Think amp Do and ProjectCenter such as the copyright and version To locate specific information about Think amp Do click Help Think amp Do Help Topics You ll also find that some Help topics refer to other topics You can view these related items by clicking on underlined words or phrases For additional information on using Help see the operating system documentation 1 5 System Concepts It is important to learn key system concepts and terms before creating flow charts for your application Please read this section to understand Think amp Do structure 1 5 1 Systems The traditional PC personal computer has input output devices oriented to office computing printer ports keyboard and mouse connections etc When using a PC for in dustrial control the PC must be equipped to control industrial I O devices Factory I O can include one or more racks bases of I O modules Figure 1 2 or a full factory network with many kinds of devices We give these the collective name I O subsystem In order to con nect with and control a machine or process most PC based control solutions such as Think amp Do use either external rack s of Input Output I O modules or a factory network of nodes and devices PC System Link I O Base Figure 1 2 PCs connect to I O bases in racks 2364 2364 Before You Begin Some factory n
220. bility to create dynamic objects change color size posi tion or rotate and active objects alarms trend controls ActiveX controls and NET con trols Operator input support includes function keys and data entry with text fields check boxes radio buttons push buttons and drop down selection lists 2 5 2 Screens as Part of a Project The screens developed using ScreenView are part of a project At Runtime the screens ap pear in an independent window on the PC desktop Only one screen is visible in the window at a time You can resize or minimize HMI screens just as any window However you can not exit or quit screen windows the Runtime must be stopped instead which shuts down the operator screens in the project Data entry or function key entry requires that the screen be in the active window When a project runs its flow charts are the highest priority task not screens During the Pause phase of each scan period the system executes screen tasks and other applica tions Adding screens affects system loading so be sure the scan time setting is large 2 12 PHOENIX CONTACT enough to allow the Runtime to service operator screen s 2364 en B 2364 To create a new screen in the project Creating a Project 1 In ProjectCenter click File New Screen to open ScreenView and display the Screen Attributes dialog box Figure 2 11 Screen Attributes Description Background Pictu
221. ble 8 4 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 ard COMMA sur 6 100 Grid Advanced Dialog Box Export Fields 6 104 Alarm Worksheet Header Settings 6 117 Alarm Worksheet Body 6 119 Alarm Worksheet Advanced 5 6 120 Default Database Field Name Examples 6 129 rend HIStory PNE EE Um 6 130 Think amp Do Data Types eene nnn nenne 7 6 Clock Tagname and 7 12 Scan Clock Tagname and 10 7 12 Move Block summary visos uro antt Rd east SO Rn uu 7 23 Matk EOS ERR 7 27 Math Re 7 27 Bitwise Operators ien ete rene hei e cuba deve iuda 7 28 Mat FUNGHONS 7 29 Calculation Block 7 35 i BA Noo o RH 7 48 DDE Server Address OITUCIBEG sats eerte 8 18 Client and server applications on a local Certified PC 8 19 Client and server applications for a remote Windows CE system 8 19 DDE Server Configuration Options 8 20 Force Options cT 10 7 Forcing
222. box which enables you to modify your combination keys You can choose Left Right or Left or Right to specify the position on the keyboard of the Shift lt Ctrl gt or Alt key in the combination key If you choose Left or Right the command will be executed any time either of these keys is pressed in combination with the key specified in the drop down list Config launches the Configuration dialog box where you configure the dynamic command object Hyperlink Property Click the Hyperlink tool to add the hyperlink property to a selected object or group of ob jects Applying this property allows you to click on the object s during execution to launch the default browser and load the specified URL Hyperlink Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Property Tool Object Properties da Replace Hint HyperLink Hyperlink 729 E Sign URL Disable Security n Figure 6 16 Object Properties Hyperlink You can use this dialog box to specify the following parameters Hyperlink Type combo box selects a URL protocol from the list Think amp Do uses this protocol when it loads the URL E Sign check box when checked prompts the user to enter the Electronic Signature before executing the dynamic 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 17 Think amp Do URL field is the URL address you want to load for example http www phoenixcontact com
223. button available for the toolbar Show when selected the button is displayed on the toolbar embedded on the Trend during the runtime Activation Tag specify a tag in this field optional When the tag changes value it trig gers the respective command This option is useful when you want to create custom ized interfaces to trigger the commands instead of or redundant with the embedded toolbar Tooltip specifies the text to display as a tooltip during the runtime when the mouse cursor is on the icon of the toolbar 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Advanced The Advanced button on the Trend Control Object Properties dialog box displays the Advanced dialog box Advanced Run Options Update trigger STE Cancel Update interval Move to current time onrun Ignore x Filter Retrieve bounding samples Show Progress Bar Run Time Config Save trigger Load trigger File Auto Save Custom Poink Selection Screen Default Point Number Add Indicator Ext translation Auto Format Figure 6 91 The Trend Control Advanced dialog box Run Mode Options define the behavior of the trend when in run mode Update trigger when the tag configured in this field changes value the trend object is updated refreshed Update interval when the update trigger is issued an
224. ced dialog 6 85 Object Properties ActiveX 6 89 The ActiveX Control Configuration Properties tab 6 89 The ActiveX Control Configuration Methods tab 6 91 The ActiveX Control Configuration Events tab 6 92 Object Properties NET Control 6 93 The NET Control Members Properties tab 6 93 The NET Control Members Methods 6 95 PHOENIX CONTACT 11 Think amp Do A 12 PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 6 99 Figure 6 100 Figure 6 101 Figure 6 102 Figure 6 103 Figure 6 104 Figure 6 105 Figure 6 106 Figure 6 107 Figure 6 108 Figure 6 109 Figure 6 110 Figure 6 111 Figure 6 112 Figure 6 113 Figure 6 114 Figure 6 115 Figure 6 116 Figure 6 117 Figure 6 118 Figure 6 119 Figure 6 120 Figure 6 121 Figure 6 122 Figure 6 123 Figure 6 124 Figure 6 125 Figure 6 126 Figure 6 127 Figure 6 128 Figure 6 129 Figure 6 130 Figure 6 131 Figure 6 132 Figure 6 133 Figure 6 134 Figure 6 135 The NET Control Members 6 96 Object Properties Grid 6 97 The Grid Data Text File dialog
225. ck Edit Run Program Black Fill Color E dit SQL Black Fill Color Edit Motion Block Background Edit Return Block Background Edit E dit E dit Easy Trac mode fill color for blocks always evaluated Easy Trac mode fill color for blocks evaluated sometimes Easy Trac mode fill color for blocks never evaluated Edit Easy Trac currently active block back color Edit Debug mode cell color for breakpoints Edit Debug mode cell color for the current stopped position Po Edit Figure 10 9 FlowView Preferences Block Colors tab 10 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 E Clear History Button H Toggle Breakpoint Debugging Projects History Tracking EasyTrac has a historical mode that records and accumulates logic execution of blocks on every scan For example if a particular block is executed just once EasyTrac displays it as sometimes executed This feature is very useful To enable EasyTrac s history tracking in FlowView select the Debug EasyTrac Historical Mode menu When FlowView is in Monitor mode clear historical data by clicking the Clear History tool bar button With historical mode disabled EasyTrac keeps very limited execution history less than 1 second and discards old data from the evaluation window 10 2 2 Flow Chart Execution Controls In addition to EasyTrac visualization FlowView lets you control flo
226. common destination If the connector appears as a red line it is not properly connected This can occur if the connection doesn t meet the input connection point of the block Try moving the end point of the line until region that represents the block s input connection becomes highlighted 4 10 Editing Flow Chart Block Expressions The content of a flow chart block is an expression To enter and edit block expressions dou ble click the block to display the Configuration tab of its properties dialog box For a dis cussion of each block s Configuration tab see Section 5 Flow Charts 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 4 17 Think amp Do 4 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 11 Entering Block Description Enter a description of a block to summarize actions taken in the block This is useful to pro vide an overview version of the flow chart Specify whether flow charts should display block descriptions or block expressions by toggling the View Block Descriptions menu To enter or edit block descriptions 1 Right click on the block and select Block Properties from the pop up menu The Properties tab of the dialog box see Figure 4 12 appears Compare Block Ge Expression Properties Block Number 11 Yes 0 Descriptions Number Wait One Scan Swap Humber 1 2 Wait One Scan Cancel Help Figure 4 12 Compare Block Properties tab 2 Enter the block Description
227. copy of the project source code separately This permits someone to retrieve upload an editable copy of the project from the Win dows CE target at a later time Of course Phoenix Contact recommends always ar chiving the original development system copy for safe keeping You can password protect the project source files that you store in the Windows CE target flash RAM Click the Password button to do so The password is embedded in the file not in memory in either system or on disk You can upload the source file back to the devel opment PC but the password is required to open it Be sure to record the chosen password in a safe place After downloading a password protected project source to the target you must have the password to edit the source Phoenix Contact application support personnel cannot bypass it When the project is running on the target a RunTime window Figure 9 7 displays on the development system The Runtime window will differ depending on the target type Certified PC Runtime Window Windows CE Runtime Viewer Watch 2 Think amp Do Runtime Engine Logic Sortation Example BAR Fie view Options Security Tools Help 52 Think amp Do CE Watch HunterWinPLC File Security Options Tools Help e Think amp Do Project Think amp Do Station 4Sortation Example Project Name Sortation Example Project Name Sortation Example Last Built 10 54 01 AM Thu Sep 06 2007 Project Path C
228. ct 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Change Limit field specifies a limit value a numeric constant or tag for the color change The numbers must be configured in ascendant order according to the following sequence of the fields displayed on the Object Properties dialog box window Upper left lower left upper right and lower right field If you click on the More button you can configure up to 16 different limits for the color dynamic Color Limits Change Limit Color Blink Change Limit Color Blink TULLE Cancel Figure 6 20 The Color Limits dialog box Color combo box associates a color with each color change limit Clicking this button displays a pop up with predefined colors Select a predefined color by clicking it or click the More Colors to display the Color dialog box When the Color dialog box opens click a color to select it or use the Colors Custom tab to define a color Click the OK button to close the dialog box and select the color The color pop up also has a Fill Effects link that displays the Fill Effects dialog box Use this dialog box to de fine dynamic fill Blink combo box specifies whether the color change will blink and how fast it will do SO The following fields are automatically disabled grayed out when Type By Color Change Limit Color and Blink 2364 en
229. ct Swap Yes No Connectors from the pop up menu Entering the block Number in the Yes or No group explicitly sets or modifies the target block of the Yes or No connector Wait One Scan Selecting the Wait One Scan check box for either the Yes or No group indicates that the Think amp Do Runtime should evaluate the comparison and then wait for the next scan cycle before taking the resulting path PHOENIX CONTACT 5 11 Think amp Do Compare Block Summary Table 5 2 defines all possible Compare block combinations Moves that are valid for indi vidual data items are also valid in arrays You may also move data to Inputs when the flow chart is a Simulation type Valid Compare Block Comparisons Table 5 2 O 11441 O _ SEES 1 ee eee Can move up to 2 4 8 13 32 or 64 data items _ dSEBBDEBEBBBWOBBEBDDOBBEODOHEDCODDE __ es Pe de bale HHHBHBDBDUBEBHEGBOEBEUEBGE ZEE Valid move if the number of From and To data items are equal Invalid move 2 Valid move I wem x x BOLE Current Date Berne ims TTE S
230. ct Applying the Text I O property allows you to insert and display tag values in real time if you are using the keyboard or on screen keypad to run an application You are not required to enter the protocol type in the URL field When you select a protocol type from the Hyperlink Type list ScreenView automatically adds the protocol s prefix to the URL address You can apply this dynamic property only to text objects containing the character Each represents one character Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties x da Replace Hint Text I T ag Espressian gm Input Enabled Frnt Auto En md Auto Size E Sign Figure 6 18 Object Properties Text I O Use this dialog box to specify the following parameters Tag Expression text field specifies one of the following e A tag on which to perform an input or output operation e expression on which to perform an output operation only You can click the icon to browse your directories for an existing tag or expression Input Enabled check box when selected allows data entries Disable uncheck the option and this dynamic only executes the data outputs Confirm check box when selected requires users to confirm any new values set dur ing runtime Minimum Value defines a minimum value for the tag associated with this text object A user wi
231. ct Properties from the shortcut menu Select the Sharing tab and click New Share 4 n Share Name enter the desired name to use Something as simple as for drive H is acceptable Click the OK button to close the New Share dialog box and OK again to close the Properties dialog box Map the shared drive on the Runtime system On the remote PC do the following 1 In Windows Explorer select Tools Map Network Drive 2 Selecta drive letter that is unused on both the Runtime and development systems 3 Click the Browse button to locate the drive shared in the previous step You may need to expand the My Network Places Entire Network Microsoft Windows Network network name gt and station items in the directory tree view by double clicking them 4 Double click the shared drive icon to complete the mapping The Runtime and development systems must refer to the drive containing the project us ing the same logical drive letter Even though the project is on the local drive for the local Runtime system it must be mapped to a separate drive letter to work remotely with the 8 24 PHOENIX CONTACT remote system 2364 en B Communications 8 4 2 Development System Setup On the local PC enable remote connection click the Start Programs Phoenix Con tact Think amp Do System Remote Connection Enable menu Map the shared drive On the local PC do
232. ct to display its ID in the status bar ScreenView uses ID s to determine whether an object displays in front of or behind an other object on the screen Objects with lower ID s display behind objects with higher ID s Use the following object layer tools to move selected object s behind or in front of an other screen object s Use these tools only with a single selected object or group of objects You cannot use these tools with multiple objects selected Also if you select a group of objects and move them the behind or in front of another object the selected group of objects maintain their original display order Click the Move backward tool to move the selected object or group one layer below the next object on the screen Alternatively right click the object and select Move backward from the pop up menu ScreenView assigns the selected object the next available ID less than the object behind which it was moved Move backward Tool Click the Move forward tool to move the selected object or group one layer above the next object on the screen Alternatively right click on the object and select Move for ward from the pop up menu ScreenView assigns the selected object the first avail Lh able ID greater than the object in front of which it was moved Move Forward Tool 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 67 Think amp Do 6 68 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 3 13 Configuring an Alarm After creating an
233. cut or delete the objects Although the Object Properties dialog box is on the top the keyboard commands lt Ctrl gt lt C gt lt Ctrl gt lt V gt lt Ctrl gt lt X gt or lt Del gt are sent directly to the objects 2364 2364 Pin Button Pressed position General Programming Techniques When the pin button is pressed focus remains on the Object Properties dialog box even when you click objects on the screen We recommend you keep this button pressed when you want to modify the settings of objects You can click an object and type the new property value directly in the Object Properties dialog box it is not necessary to click on the window to bring focus to it Also when the pin button is pressed the Object Properties dialog box does not automatically close when you click on the screen 4 12 5 Creating and Using Tags in ScreenView In ScreenView you use tags to display state results of calculations alarm points and so forth In ScreenView all tags are organized according to their origin application internal or shared Application and internal tags originate in ScreenView while shared tags originate in the Think amp Do Data Items editor The following is a description of the different ScreenView tag types Application tags are user defined screen tags created for displays to read from and write to field equipment for control auxiliary tags to perform mathematica
234. cuting any Get command That is the ActiveX property is updated with the value of the tag configured in the Tag Expression field when Think amp Do opens the screen where the ActiveX is configured When the value of the property is Read only cannot by overwritten by the application the Action field is automatically set to Get 2364 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Scan defines the polling method to get values from the ActiveX propreties according to Table 6 16 Table 6 16 ActiveX Scan Polling Methods Description The value of the ActiveX property is read and written to the tag configured in the Tag Expression field only when the screen with the ActiveX object is open and when the ActiveX object sends a message to Think amp Do to up date this tag Always Think amp Do keeps polling the value of the ActiveX property and updating the tag configured in the Tag Expression field with this value Some ActiveX controls are designed to send messages to their containers application indicating that a property changed value and the new value should be read Get again However other ActiveX controls do not implement this algorithm In this case the only way to get the updated values of the ActiveX properties is to keep polling these values from the ActiveX control Scan Always Configuring Methods Select the Methods tab to configure the ActiveX methods Configuration Properties Meth
235. cution Path Asubchart that is the destination of a Call block will not execute until the Call block ex ecutes The subchart has an Out of Scope status until it is called If that subchart is called its status becomes Active If it calls yet another subchart its status becomes In Subchart 5 3 7 When to Use Subcharts The real efficiency in using subcharts is their self duplicating nature at runtime and your op portunities to re use them from project to project Consider writing a generic subchart to do a frequently needed function in your industry Thus you save programming time each time you can re use the subchart in various projects consider creating a subchart library for use in your company One misconception about subcharts suggests a flow chart can call a subchart and then con tinue doing other things This is not true While a subchart executes the calling flow chart is suspended until the subchart returns If you need to solve logic in parallel each scan you must use separate standard flow charts for each logic section Think amp Do has comprehensive flow chart debugging capabilities Refer to Section 10 Debugging Projects for details 5 32 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 2364 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Section 6 6 3 Target Hardware
236. d 6 133 6 7 4 SENDS iiie 6 134 6 7 5 Background SCHOUS cat M 6 134 6 7 6 SCIGSn OCIDIS ast 6 135 6 1 Think amp Do 6 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Operator Screen Techniques 6 Operator Screen Techniques 2364 This section provides an in depth discussion of ScreenView features for creating HMI screens Knowing the capability of ScreenView will help you create useful screens that op erators will like to use and engineers will rely on for diagnostics ProjectCenter must have a project open before you can use ScreenView to create screens For information on creating and opening projects see Creating a Project on page 2 3 6 1 Target Hardware Considerations Some PCs such as Windows CE target hardware platforms do not include a built in video monitor However you can still have screen pages accessed remotely or that may be used later if you re target the project to a system with a video monitor Other HMI options for remote systems include Using the serial port on the CE target device to connect a small operator interface Using the Tag Link driver allows a local system to access data the remote system see Configuring a Project as an OPC Client on page 8 14 6 2 Exploring Screens In the ProjectCenter click the Screens
237. d Data 2 10 Creating Control Prograims eU n EFIE PIS 2 10 2 4 1 FACTION IOC IG T oH CD PE 2 11 2 4 2 dem I 2 11 2 4 3 FOW CAS oes secret aded due dec esee rese 2 11 Creating an Operator 2 12 2 5 1 slug N 2 12 2 5 2 screens as Patt of a Project eee 2 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 1 Think amp Do 2 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Creating a Project 2 Creating a Project In everyday life a project usually refers to a series of tasks completed in order to accomplish a specific goal Similarly the goal of using Think amp Do is to create a Runtime program that does whatever you design it to do This is done by working on small manageable pieces of the project with special tools within Think amp Do So when using the development tools you will be creating a project that consists of the following parts flowchart or collection of flow charts Anl O configuration for the devices being controlled HMI screen s which provide an operator interface optional for some applications or not available on some Windows CE based devices The flow charts and screens must communicate with each other and the I O to control and mon
238. d graph To show a trend graph on the screen you must click the Trend tool on the Active Objects toolbar to create a trend object ScreenView sequentially increments the number identifying the Trend worksheet for each newly created worksheet using four bytes to save date and time information and eight bytes per variable in each sampling Use one of the following methods to create a new Trend worksheet Right click on the Worksheets folder and then select New Trend from the pop up menu Selectthe File New Worksheet Trend menu 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 127 Think amp Do A new Trend worksheet displays as shown in Figure 6 132 Trendi Description lt History Format Advanced Save Trigger Second Save On Tag Change Dead Band Figure 6 132 Trend worksheet The Trend worksheet is divided into two areas Header area top section which contains information for the whole group Body area bottom section where you define each tag in the group This section con tains several columns only two are shown in the preceding figure Use the header parameters on this worksheet as follows Description specifies a description of the worksheet for documentation purposes History Format specifies a trend type from the list The following options are available e Proprietary selects the Think amp Do proprietary format for saving history data
239. d symbol has all of the properties as shown in Figure 6 119 Symbol Properties Category Property Option Caption OptioniTag Option2Caption Option 1 2 Option3Caption Option 1 Option3Tag RectangleCaption Caption Display properties from all categories Figure 6 119 Object Properties Check Box with all custom properties specified 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 7 Save the symbol by selecting the File Save Checkboxes Symbol menu or right click on the Symbol Editor tab and then select Save Checkboxes Symbol from the context menu Checkboxes is the name of the symbol in this example 8 Closethe Symbol Editor by selecting the File Close Checkboxes Symbol menu or right click on the Symbol Editor tab and then select Close Checkboxes Symbol from the context menu 9 Ifan open screen has an instance of the symbol you must save the screen to update the instance of the symbol Adding Tooltips You can configure a description for each custom property available in the symbol After cre ating a symbol open it with the Symbol Editor right click in the Symbol Editor not on the symbol itself and then choose Edit Symbol Properties from the context menu This dis plays the Symbol Properties dialog box with a Description column see Figure 6 120 Symbol Properties Category Property Description OptioniCantion Option Op
240. d the X Axis if of type numeric the value on this field will be added to the minimum and maximum values of the X Axis Move to current time on when selected X axis shifts to the current time auto matically when the object is triggered to Play mode during the runtime Retrieve bounding samples when selected the object retrieve the data out bound the object first points only Uncheck this option can improve the perfor mance since the points outbound the object will not be retrieved from the history On the other hand the object will not draw lines linking the first and last samples to the extremities of the object Ignore X Filter when selected the X Filter is ignored to avoid adding the WHERE or querying clause to the Data Sources Show Progress Bar when selected a progress bar will appear during the trend load Run Time Config specifies how the settings of the Trend object modified during runtime can be saved in temporary files This option can be used to Keep the settings consistent so when the user closes the screen and opens it again or re starts the application the settings configured during the runtime are not lost Create standard settings for different scenarios and load the appropriate configu ration during the runtime based on a pre defined condition or based on the user selection PHOENIX CONTACT 6 85 Think amp Do properties of this frame are described in th
241. dDefaultPicture lt PictureFileName gt Align select an Alignment for the data shown in the column There are three options Left Right or Center Input when selected allows the user to enter data in this column during the runtime Key designates a shortcut for sorting the values in this field A shortcut is a combina tion of keys pressed on a keyboard at one time e g lt Ctrl gt lt C gt lt Ctrl gt lt V gt etc This option is especially useful when creating applications for runtime devices that do not provide a mouse or touch screen interface and only have a keyboard for interacting with the application during the runtime When the Data Source type is setto Class Tag and the Columns dialog box is left blank the object displays the values from all members of the class tag with the following default column settings Label 2 Name of the Member from the Class tag Type Text Width lt Minimum size to display the name of the member from the class tag on the header of the Grid object gt Align Center Input Enabled checked Key lt None gt 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 6 101 Think amp Do Show ID Column when selected automatically displays the number of each row Allow sorting columns when selected lets the user sort the values in the columns dur ing the runtime either by clicking on the label or by using the shortcut configured for each column This
242. data displayed the object You can configure a string tag in this field so you can change the dura tion dynamically during the runtime by changing the value of HH MM SS For example 36 00 00 thirty six hours Time This field is optional The value of the tag configured in this field represents a period of time rather than a specific date or time The meaning of this value depends on the option set for the Type property When the is set as Start Date Time the value of the tag configured in this field must comply with the format Date Time For example 02 10 2005 18 30 00 When the is set as Time Before Now the value of the tag configured in this field must comply with one of the following formats e Time string value For example 48 00 00 forty eight hours e Number of hours real value For example 2 5 two hours and thirty minutes Minimum value displayed on the X axis Maximum value displayed on the X axis The tags configured in the Period Range fields are automatically updated when the user changes the X scale dynamically during the runtime using the Time bar embedded in the object If the Time field is left blank or if the tag configured in this field has the value 0 the object displays data up to the current Date Time Grid X axis or Y axis configures the number of divisions vertical or horizontal lines drawn on the object for the X and
243. data tye nc 7 7 C Calculation DIOCK in coii re Ei Perte ronde 5 5 7 25 m 7 26 Using with String data items 7 35 Calli DIOCK NE MU 5 7 Call Gxpresslolts 5 29 Interaction with Begin block 5 30 CE Wate pet 9 8 9 9 9 12 2364 en B Corned bee EDIDI Ee 1 8 1 9 9 5 Clocks TIEU ens E i UR Ub 7 12 Color dialog 6 21 Column t ees 4 9 Comm data type 7 7 Command button 1 4 Communication block 5 9 8 3 8 25 Compare 5 10 5 10 SUMMAN 5 12 Configuring a Studio CE station 9 11 COMMON ME 3 5 Connecting flow chart 120 2 4 16 Connectors 4 16 Multiple selection 22 4 13 E 4 13 ConnectivityCenter 3 5 Adding a serial 8 4 Adding the serial driver 8 3 Analog value mapping
244. date rate The fastest time a PID Block can be executed is between PID calculation once per 10 ms Loop modes Automatic Manual operator control or Cascade control Setpoint Range Specify Lower Span and Upper Span Process Variable Range Utilizes the same span endpoints as the Setpoint Proportional Gain Specify gains in full floating point number range unit less Integrator Reset Specify reset time in full floating point number range in min utes Derivative Rate Specify derivative time in full floating point number range i minutes Rate Limits Specify derivative smoothing factor a low pass filter con stant Bumpless Transfer In Manual Mode the Setpoint can track the PV or hold its cur rent value Error Bias Provides instant bias offset adjustment to implement feed for ward control Anti windup Freeze bias Inhibits further increases or decreases of the output by imple menting either anti windup or freeze bias to help recovery time from loop saturation Error Deadband Specify a tolerance plus and minus for the error term SP PV so that no change in control output value is made Output Limits Specify lower and upper limits for the control output data item Wild Flow Use a second PV input for doing flow control with the ratio PV1 PV2 7 48 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Section 8 This section informs you about Communications 8 2 8 3 8 4 2364 en B Serial port communicat
245. des four customizable tabbed watch windows for data items in the project ae Appl racker Stand alone OF X File Edit View Tools Help SS 00118 Flowchart Execution Path EF 1 ReadSwitches 3 2 Dataltems Type 0 Tagname Array Byte Flag Float Status In Subchart MakeTrain 0 In Subchart MakePulse 3 Waiting Input Number Output String System Timer All Data Items Flowcharts n Watch FaHeppesFi Z Figure 10 7 AppTracker Custom Watch window To add a data item to a Custom Watch window do the following 1 Select the desired watch window 2 Select the data item s in the data item pane Hold down Shift to select a contiguous group of data items Hold down Ctrl to select multiple items 2364 2364 Debugging Projects 3 Drag selected data items to the watch area and release the mouse button The mouse cursor temporarily changes to the copy cursor during the drag indicating it has picked up the selected item s A single data item can be moved to the Active Watch pane by double clicking it After placing data items in a watch window use the cut copy paste toolbar buttons to edit or move them to another one When the project uses one or more Array data items you can set AppTracker to display
246. dex Tagname Use the Array Index field to enter a Number tagname with an array index Dou ble click the field or click the browse button to display the tag chooser Enter an array index tagname for either single or multiple select or insert or update operations Entering a tag name in this field with Get multiple records selected transfers a single record from the re cordset and leaves the recordset open Manual entry is not allowed in this field 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 7 43 Think amp Do 7 10 4 Filters Where Tab The SQL Block Filters Where tab Figure 7 16 lets you apply conditions to the query so it returns fewer records SOL Block Name Database H addressList mdb Change DB Cancel Validate Figure 7 16 The SQL Block Filters tab Field Name The Field Name column selects fields available in the tables views and queries on the General tab Click in the column and select a field from the drop down list that appears Manual entry is not allowed in this field Operator The Operator column exposes a list of available relational operators lt gt Like One of these operators is required for each row in the Filter table Although most of these operators are self explanatory the Like operator provides a wild card style lookup The format needed for the Like operator usage is database or data source dependent 7 44 PHOENIX CONTA
247. dialog box The fields in this dialog box are is the name of the new screen tag Array Size is the size of an array The default value of zero is for tags that are not arrays is a drop down list of available internal tag types e Boolean same as e Integer same as Number Real same as Float e String Description is any textual description of the tag Web Data is not currently implemented You can also create screen tags using the Screen Tags dialog box see Viewing Tags on page 6 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 9 Think amp Do 6 10 PHOENIX CONTACT Viewing Tags In addition to the Object Finder dialog box you can view ScreenView application and sys tem tags in the Screen Tags dialog box see Figure 6 8 To open this dialog box select the Project Screen Tags menu a Screen Tags Application System Description LT AlertOptians 1 Integer LT AlertOptians 2 Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer ES SS 6 E Integer Figure 6 8 The Screen Tags dialog box The ScreenView Tags Application tab displays all screen tags and the System tab dis plays all systems tags With this grid of tags you can sort tags by any column by right clicking in the column and then selecting the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending menus You can choose to show fewer or more columns
248. display how it is interpreting the expression as you Create the expression It also makes use of various parentheses brack ets etc to ensure certain parts of the equation are solved before other parts are solved The conventions are Tagnames appear in blue The exception is an array index which must be enclosed in brackets black Operators and functions appear in red 2364 en B Math and Data Operations String constants must be enclosed in double quotation marks and appear in dark magenta Parentheses constants and commas appear in black Unrecognized text appears in green Text appears in green until sufficient characters are added to allow the system to recognize the entry 7 7 3 Runtime Math Errors The Validate button in the Calculation Block Expression tab finds syntax errors in the equation Overflow index out of range and other errors can occur when running the project Think amp Do Runtime flags these errors using System data items as the Runtime detects them The errors detected are Table 7 5 Runtime Math Errors io Tagname Description SYS 39 Math Error an overflow has occurred on the right side of the equa tion such as a divide by zero SYS 42 Conversion a data conversion from one data type to another ex Error ceeded the minimum or maximum value allowed for the receiving data item type String Error an error has occurred in the handling of string data ite
249. ds and one for the next 0 5 seconds It repeats this pattern forever SYS 34 Clocki00ms Read only Toggles between zero and one every 100 milliseconds It is zero for 50 milliseconds and one for the next 50 milliseconds It repeats this pattern forever SYS 35 Clock50ms Read only Toggles between zero and one every 50 milliseconds It is zero for 25 milliseconds and one for the next 25 milliseconds It repeats this pattern forever SYS 36 FirstScan Read only Is one on the very first scan of the project from then on it is zero SYS 37 AltScan Read only Toggles between zero and one every scan It is zero for scan and one for the next scan It repeats this pattern forever SYS 38 lOStatus Read only Contains information on the status of the O A value of zero means the I O is working normally A value of one means the runtime is running in simulated I O mode A value of two means there is an I O fault SYS 39 MathError The error code is set to 1 on an overflow underflow divide by zero and other math errors See Notes on Reading Error Data on page A 5 for information on decoding this error 5 5 40 Reserved40 Read only Reserved for internal use 2364 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 Think amp Do SYS 41 StringError Indicates the flow chart block the string error code and the flow chart number where the last error occurred Error 1 if string data item could not be read from data table Error
250. e File Save As or File Save menu or click the Save button to display the Save As dialog box shown in Figure 2 4 Save in CO LearmThinkNDo z File name LearnThinkNDa Save as Think amp Project pdb Cancel Help Figure 2 4 Use the Save As dialog box to define the project name 2 Touse the default path Program Files Phoenix Contact Think amp Do Projects and project name simply click the Save button Henaming a new project before saving it automatically creates a new directory with the name of the project Only one project can be stored in a directory PHOENIX CONTACT 2 5 Think amp Do 2 6 Create New Folder Button Open Button PHOENIX CONTACT To use a different directory use the Save In drop down to navigate to the desired drive and directory Create a new directory by clicking the Create a New Folder but ton When the new folder appears in the Save As list type the desired name and press the Enter key Then double click the folder to open it 4 Tochange the name of the project enter a new name in the File name field Note that only alphanumeric characters are valid 5 Click the Save button to save the project 2 1 3 Opening a Project To open a project follow these steps 1 In ProjectCenter select File Open or click the Open toolbar button to display a file selection browser 2 N
251. e SubconvevorkickoutPosition Counter Value SubconvevorSelectionlD Counter Value SubconvevorExitCounter Counter Reference Cancel Help Figure 5 4 The Call Block Expression tab To use the Call block select the name of the subchart from the Subcharts tree After se lecting a subchart parameters defined in the subchart appear in the Mapping group This lets you match subchart parameters with those in the calling flow chart See Using Sub charts on page 5 27 A subchart has to exist before a flow chart can call it This may sound obvious but you cannot create the name of a subchart you want to call in the future in the calling flow chart You must first create a new subchart and save it using the desired name before it appears in the list box in the Call Block Expression tab 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT b 7 Think amp Do A Note Note Button 5 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 2 4 Note Notes are re sizable text that can appear anywhere on the drawing page Typically notes should appear near relevant flow chart blocks Once created drag and drop or cut and paste operations are possible on notes To enter a note 1 Click the Note button in the toolbar and then click the position in the flow chart where the note should appear This displays the Note Properties dialog box see Figure 5 5 Note Properties Arial pt Text Alignment Left Center i Show Border Figure 5 5 Note Pr
252. e When the label is blank e g then the width of the column is set to 0 during the runtime This option is useful to hide columns during the runtime Field enter the name ofthe field column in the SQL Relational Database that the Grid object is linked to If this field is left in blank the text configured in the Label field will be used as the Field name This setting is available only when the Data Source type is set to Database select the Type of interface that will be used in the column The options are shown in Table 6 19 Table 6 19 Grid Column Types Displays alphanumeric values Displays numeric values cation to support this feature on the Web Thin Client stations CEView ap plications support pictures in bitmap format bmp but not in icon format ico Picture Displays the picture bmp or ico format from the data source For in stance if the value from the data source is MyFile bmp the Grid object will display the picture from the file MyFile bmp stored in the application s folder The picture will be automatically resized to fit the cell of the Grid ob ject The picture file s must be stored in the Web sub folder of the appli 6 100 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Table 6 19 Grid Column Types Description Check box Displays check box interfaces check box will be unchecked if the value read from the file is 0 lt NULL gt or FALS
253. e since flow charts in Think amp Do turn them ON or OFF Remember that when a Control block turns an output or any bit ON or OFF this is a permanent or latched event until another control block changes the bit With the retentive setting you can have the outputs power up in the last state of the most recent Runtime session A flow chart can periodically write to data item SYS 43 to save retentive data item values to disk This can be used with or without a UPS In order for retentive data items to be truly retentive during an unexpected power loss the PC system must have an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS and power monitoring soft ware When external power is lost the power monitoring software must specifically shut down the Think amp Do Runtime project This saves retentive data items to disk while the PC is still on backup power To pulse output specify a Pulse Value for an output tag Then use the Pulse Output ac tion in a Control block When pulsed the output turns ON for the time specified in the Pulse Value parameter After the specified time the output automatically turns off 7 2 Tagname Data Types and Formats Table 7 1 lists the various data types supported by Think amp Do Registers are BCD Bytes are 8 bit values Strings are NUL terminated strings Floats are double precision 64 bit float ing point numbers Table 7 1 Think amp Do Data Types Data Type 7 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 32767 2 225e 308
254. e Figure 4 4 z xl z xl fa Project ut Project og Flowcharts Flowcharts ww Flewcharts ww Flewcharts Standard 123 1 Main Conveyor Shift Process Subconveyc Process Subconveyc Standard 123 1 Main Conveyor Shift 2 Reset Counters 3 Auto Mode All abc Process Subconveye Simulation 2 Reset Counters Subcharts 3 Auto Mode All abc Simulation Subcharts Unused Unused Figure 4 4 Heirarchical sublist list collapsed left expanded right In the example in Figure 4 4 the Main Conveyor Shift flow chart has one or more associ ated subcharts as indicated by the to its left To expand the Flow Chart explorer tree Click the beside the folder to expand Main Conveyor Shift in the example Press the keypad lt gt key to expand the Standard 123 the selected folder Use the keypad lt gt key to collapse a selected folder In Figure 4 4 three subcharts are called from the flow chart Main Conveyor Shift Note that more than one standard flow chart can call a particular subchart so an instance of that sub chart appears in the directory tree under each standard flow chart that calls it In addition an instance appears for each call from a flow chart The subchart appears once in the All 123 folder and the Subchart folder 4 3 Creating a Flow Chart To create a new flow chart follow these st
255. e Runtime system set up a new user account Enter the username and password if there is one of the user on the development system Complete the Full Name and Description fields require the user to change the password at the next logon Add the user to the Administrators group On the remote PC enable remote connection Click the Start Programs Phoenix Contact Think amp Do System Remote Con nection Enable Identify the computer name of the Runtime system On the remote PC depending on the version of Windows do one of the following Windows XP 1 Select the Start Control Panel System menu If the Control Panel is set to display Category View click Performance and Maintenance and then System 2 Select the Computer tab and note the Full computer name assigned to the Runtime PC e g RUNTIME Windows 7 Vista 1 Click the Start button right click the Computer icon and click Properties from the pop up window 2 Fromthe Computer name domain and workgroup settings group note the Com puter Name assigned to the Runtime PC e g RUNTIME Hecord the computer name for later reference Share the drive containing the Think amp Do files and the project 1 Open Windows Explorer and highlight the disk drive or subdirectory that contains the project files 2 Select File Properties or right click and sele
256. e The Database Configuration dialog box lets you select the database to use to obtain the labels see Database Configuration for more information Radio Button Object The radio button object is useful to create interfaces where the users can chose one option from multiple options on the display Follow these steps to use a radio button object 1 2 3 Click the Radio Button tool to create a radio button object on your screen Click in the drawing area and drag the mouse cursor to draw the radio button and its label Release the mouse button when the object is the size you want 2364 en B 2364 4 Operator Screen Techniques Double click on the object to view the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Radio Button Caption Radio Tag Advanced True Value shift a Ap Esign Security E Disable n Figure 6 48 Object Properties Radio Button Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the radio but ton object Caption specifies a caption by typing the text into the text box Fonts specifies a font style for the caption by clicking the Fonts button E Sign when selected the user will be prompted to enter the Electronic Signature be fore executing the command Confirm when selected ensures that Think amp Do prompts you to confirm the action at
257. e beginning of a tag name to indicate that the tag will be used as an indirect tag in the application For additional information see the ScreenView scripting language in the online help PHOENIX CONTACT 4 27 Think amp Do 4 28 PHOENIX CONTACT Some valid tag examples include Temperature pressure count X Using Screen Tag Values A screen tag value can be one of the following types Boolean is a Boolean or digital variable or 1 nteger is a number positive negative or zero Equivalent to C type long integer amples 0 5 200 Realis a number internally stored as a double word Equivalent to C type double String ASCII text is a character string up to 1024 characters that holds letters num bers or special characters Examples Recipe product X123 01 01 90 On 4 13 Scripting Languages in ScreenView ScreenView supports a built in scripting language and Microsoft Visual Basic Script lan guage VBScript These languages have familiar syntax operators and functions They provide The ability to create new variables and procedures functions and or sub routines A Access to properties methods and or events from COM objects including ActiveX controls The ability to execute the logic on any platform For details of both the built in scripting language and VBScript see the Think amp Do online help 2364 en B Flow Charts 2364
258. e data items flow charts screens if used and I O classes in a project Dataltems gt Type m Tagname Array Counter 23 YellawPackagelD Byte Counter RedPackageID Counter Counter GreenPackageID Flag Counter WihitePackagelD Float Counter RedDiverterPos Counter GreenDiverterP Input Counter WhiteDiverterP Number Counter YellowAccumula Output Counter RedAccumulatio Register Counter Greendaccumula String Counter WhiteAccumula System Timer All Maka Thema Figure 10 3 AppTracker Project Explorer pane Click the to the left of any project topic to open it Data items related to the category cho sen appear in the data item pane Data item listings are not mutually exclusive among the main topics Topics merely serve to create categories of data items for faster access 2364 en B Debugging Projects 10 1 2 Watch Windows The bottom pane of the AppTracker window has watch windows that allow monitoring of selected data items in real time The yellow tabbed windows contain pre selected data for viewing The remaining tabs Watch 1 Watch 4 allow creation of custom groups of data items Chart Tab The Chart tab Figure 10 4 lists data items related to the flow chart currently selected in the Flow Chart Execution Path above it Highlight any flow chart in the Flow Chart Execution Path to view its data items Type JTagname A Wiatchl
259. e following table e Save trigger specifies the tag that changes value e g toggles to cause the cur rent settings of the Trend object to be saved in the temporary file This command is not available for the Web Thin Client e Load trigger when the tag configured in this field changes value e g toggles the settings from the temporary file are loaded and applied to the Trend object dur ing the runtime e File Name specifies a file name If this field is left blank the temporary file is saved in the application Web sub directory with the syntax lt Screen Name gt lt ObjectID gt TrendControl stmp e g MyScreentOTrendControl stmp The Web Thin Client station saves loads the temporary file in the standard Temp directory of the operating system e g Documents and Settings lt Curren tUser gt Local Settings Temp You can configure a customized file name for the temporary file in this field or even configure a string tag between curly brackets so the user can change the name of the configuration file dynamically during the runtime by changing the value of this tag If you do not specify any path the file is saved in the application Web sub directory by default Auto Save when selected the current settings of the Trend are automatically saved in the temporary file when the screen where the Trend is configured is closed during the runtime If the box is not checked the settings are saved only when
260. e for motion Inte grated motion control provides convenience and time savings during system design since you avoid having to link external motion programs with the project The system block dia Maton gram in Figure 5 12 shows a typical subsystem along with a motion control system de sign Motion Block PC Base eee EIUMOD Software Hardware Motion Blocks Control I O scanner Blocks network card VOV LL Figure 5 12 Typical subsystem and a motion control systems design Just as a Control block can set I O points ON or OFF a Motion block can issue a command to or request data from a motion control card In the example Motion Expression tab in Figure 5 13 the command BeginMoveTo for Axis1 has a destination of Part Length where Axis1 and Part_Length are tagnames Motion Block m Expression Properties Select Motion Command BeginMoveTo Axis Asis Command Description Start absolute move don t wait to finish Type Tagname Destination Number Cancel Help Figure 5 13 The Motion Block Expression tab 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 5 19 Think amp Do There are generic commands and commands that are specific to particular motion systems By default all generic and specific commands appear in the list A motion system runs asynchronous
261. e user to filter the columns visible in the object Use the parameters in the Delete Message group to control who can delete alarm messages from the Alarm History e Security specifies which security level can delete alarm messages Only those users with the specified security level will be allowed to delete an alarm message e Confirm when selected requires the user to confirm a message deletion before Think amp Do actually deletes the selected alarm message Print trigger field specifies tag in this field to print an alarm summary from your de fault printer when this tag changes value PDF Trigger field specifies a Tag in this field When the value of the Tag changes the data currently filtered in the Alarm Event Control is distilled to a PDF file and saved to the path specified in the PDF Filename field below PDF Filename field specifies a complete file path and name where the PDF file is to be saved You can also enter a tagname using the tag syntax PDF Trigger and PDF Filename are not supported in applications running on Windows CE or Web Thin Client Total items field specifies an integer tag to see how many alarms remain after Think amp Do filters the alarm object using parameters specified on the Filters dialog box Selected tag field specifies a string tag to enable the end user to click on an alarm message to see the name of the tag associated with that alarm
262. ecords is selected the updated records are not reflected in the cached re cords unless the Refresh command is executed Close existing recordset generates a request to close an existing recordset after its use This does not generate any data transfer between the database or data source and tag values Get first record generates a request to move to the first record in an open recordset independent of the current record position and copy that record s field values to the corresponding tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab Get previous record generates a request to move to the previous record in an open recordset given the current recordset s order and copy that record s field values to the corresponding tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab Get next record generates a request to move to the next record in an open record set given the current recordset s order and copy that record s field values to the cor responding tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab Getlast record generates a request to move to the last record an open recordset independent of the current record position and copy that record s field values to the corresponding tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab There are three required tag mappings that must exist for the SQL block to operate InProcess Flag This required item must be mapped to a tag Data Type Flag
263. ecreasing the performance of the system especially under the Windows CE operating system Using the Colors dynamic tool you can modify the color of a static object during the run time When configuring this dynamic with Type is By Color you can set the color that will be applied in the object during the runtime by the color code See the Think amp Do online help for a table of code values as well as the RGB values for the most commonly used colors The number of colors available when developing the application depends on the color set tings configured on the operating system of the development station The number of col ors available when running the application Runtime depends on the color settings con Pin Button Released position 4 26 PHOENIX CONTACT figured on the operating system of the Runtime station Configuring the Focus of the Object Properties Dialog Box Double clicking any object or group of objects in ScreenView displays the Object Proper ties dialog box which lets you configure the selected object s settings The content of this dialog box varies according to the specific object dynamic selected However there is al ways a pin button in the left upper corner of this dialog box When the pin button is released the focus is passed to the object on the screen as soon as that object is selected Therefore we recommend you keep this button released when you wantto manipulate copy paste
264. ect Explorer Creation date 11 2737 AM Wed Oct 31 2007 Bar Modification date 1 27 50 Wed Oct 31 2007 Build Version 00 Last build date files are incomplete build required gt ScreenView Descriptior R Tool Shortcuts Runtime Settings Runtime T arget Build Mode Primary Screen Set Settings al Certified PC Reall 0 Startup Screen Maximum Scan Interval ms 50 E Ne pm CE Watch Set to Limits Connection Points wma rget Process Release a xs oe Ru hon project run Remote Closable Other Explorer A Data Items Enable Instant Recall cor files Remote Protected Bars Output Window Status Line res eie NUM Figure 2 2 ProjectCenter provides access to Think amp Do development tools 2 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Creating a Project 2 1 2 Naming a New Project To name the project follow these steps 1 Click the Rename button next to the Project Name field This displays the Rename Project dialog box shown in Figure 2 3 Rename Project 1 From Untitled Project LearnT hink MEg Cancel Help Figure 2 3 The Rename Project dialog box with a name filled in 2 Enter the name of the project in the field 3 Click the OK button To save the project follow these steps 1 In ProjectCenter select th
265. ections between the two lists Use the Columns dialog box to display the most recently replaced value with the new value To do so move both Value and Previous from the Available list to the Visible 6 0 PHOENIX CONTACT list Click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to rearrange the order of columns in the Visible list Label and Width fields change the default column labels and widths at runtime Align specifies alignment Left Center or Right for the alarm message text with in a specified column Available during runtime when selected allows the user to add selected columns to the visible list during runtime Key assigns a shortcut to each column This allows operators to sort the information on the Alarm Control object by any column using keyboard keys instead of the mouse cursor When you are finished click the OK button to close the Columns dialog box 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Filters You access the Filters dialog box from the Alarm Event Control Object Properties dialog box when you click the Filters button Filters Group Priority D From Selection election p Search in columns Tagname Message Username Interval Latest Period to Apply period of time to each day Filter Expression Edit Initial Sort First Column Activation Time
266. ects The build process compiles source elements so they run the project If the project is to run on a remote Think amp Do machine it is sent to the target as part of that process If you have one PC for both development and Runtime activities this is transparent If you have a Win dows CE target there are source file transfer options that you need to understand Think amp Do automatically downloads the compiled project to the Runtime system when run ning the project By convention a download transfers the files to the target system and an upload transfers the project source from the target to the PC requesting the source It is im portant to configure project settings in ProjectCenter early in project development 9 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Building and Running Projects 9 5 1 Runtime Settings To access project Runtime settings click the Project Explorer bar in the left pane of the ProjectCenter window The Runtime Settings group appears in the main window Figure 9 6 For more information about Runtime screen settings see Creating a Project on page 2 3 Runtime Settings Runtime Target Build Mode Windows Contact Real lO Simulated 120 Maximum Scan Interval ms 50 11 Selected 1 0 Windows CE Target Options Run CE watch on project run Enable Instant Recall compress source files Figure 9 6 Runtime Settings in ProjectCenter Runt
267. ed in this field changes value the respective method of the ActiveX control is executed Return specifies the tag that receives the value returned by the method if any Configuring Events Select the Events tab to configure the ActiveX Events Configuration Properties Methods Events Parameters Script AfterUpdate lt None gt BeforeUpdate P Click lt None gt Dblclick lt None gt B KeyDown keypress KeyUp NewMonth lt None gt E NewYear zMonez Show hidden events Figure 6 95 ActiveX Control Configuration Events tab The columns in this tab are Event lists all events available from the ActiveX object Parameters specifies tags associated with the parameters of the event of the corre sponding ActiveX object If the event does not support any parameter the fixed text None is displayed in the Parameters field Otherwise you can type the tags associ ated with the parameters of the ActiveX object When the event has more than one pa rameter you can type one tag for each parameter separating them by a comma For example TagA TagB TagC When the event is generated either the value of the tags are written to the parameters of the event input parameters or the parameter values are written to the tags output parameters When you click the Browse button it will display the list of parameters supported by the event allowing you to associate one ta
268. ed to multiple controllers 1 7 WinPLC and its one base of I O modules 1 7 Group development 1 9 Local PC used for development and Runtime 1 10 Development and Runtime control on different systems 1 10 Project COMPONGCINS 2 3 ProjectCenter provides access to Think amp Do development tools 2 4 The Rename Project dialog box with a name filled in 2 5 Use the Save As dialog box to define the project name 2 5 The Project Explorer bar provides access to Think amp Do tools 2 6 The Flow Charts and Screens Explorer bars 2 7 The Data Items 2 8 The Find Configure CE Runtime dialog 2 9 Flow chart showing an action and branching block 2 10 Name Flow Chart dialog 2 11 Screen Attributes dialog 2 13 ProjectCenter Data 3 4 The Data Items grid for Counter data types 3 4 lOView window includes a board view module vi
269. een 1 Click the List Box tool on the Active Objects toolbar 2 Click in the screen and drag to create adjust an expanding rectangle Height and the font size determine how many messages are visible Width determines how much of the message length is visible After creating a rectangle you can adjust the size and font characteristics to allow more messages to display in the given space 3 Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties da Replace Hint List User Enable Head Search Tag Highlight Color 1 Text Color r Messages Control Enable Write win Color Fonts E Border Color E Sign Page Start End Listwrap Enter Regd 6 52 Object Properties List Box You also can open the Object Properties dialog box by right clicking on the list box ob ject or by highlighting the object pressing the lt Alt gt 4 lt Enter gt keys and selecting Prop erties from the resulting pop up menu You can use this dialog box to specify the following parameters Value drop down list located below the Replace button Click to select one of the following the tag values used to index the message list e Boolean e Integer default e LSB least significant bit For more information see the discussion about the State field on the Messages Con figuration
270. el Validate Figure 7 17 SQL Block Sorting tab 7 10 5 1 Field Name The Field column exposes a list of the table or view or query fields available based upon the tables or views or queries selected on the General tab Click in the column and select a field from the drop down list that appears Manual entry is not allowed in this cell PHOENIX CONTACT 17 45 Think amp Do 7 10 5 2 Sort Order The Sort Order column specifies how to sort each field in ascending ASC or descending DESC order 7 10 6 SQL Statement Tab The SQL Statement tab Figure 7 18 displays the resulting SQL statement It is read only SQL Block SOL Statement Name Database H addressList mdb Change DB Ok Cancel Validate Figure 7 18 resulting SQL in the SQL Statement tab 7 46 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Math and Data Operations 7 11 PID Block for Process Control Think amp Do includes PID Proportional Integral Derivative process control with a sophisti cated set of features to address many application needs The main features are Upto 64 loops Loops have independent sample rates Manual Automatic Cascaded looping Bumpless Transfer mode Position or Velocity PID algorithms The process control loop capability is accessible in flow charts using the PID Block You just add one PID Block for each loop in your process All sensor and actuator w
271. eld column depending on the tag type in the database for each tag configured in the Trend worksheet 2364 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 6 7 Using Scripts Code configured in script groups execute as a Background task ScreenView supports the following types of scripts Global Procedures are available for call by any other script Graphics scripts are special pre defined subroutines There are subroutines that exe cute e Once when graphics module starts e Continuously while running e When the graphics module closes Startup scripts execute just once when the Background task module BGTask starts Background scripts execute when the condition specified in their Execution field is TRUE non zero Think amp Do scans background script groups sequentially based on the number of the group Screen scripts are special pre defined subroutines There are subroutines that exe cute e Once when a screen opens e Continuously while the screen is open e When the screen closes 6 7 1 Scripts Folder There are two sub folders under the Scripts folder The Application folder only includes pre defined script types Background folder includes any number of user defined scripts that execute when enabled To edit a script in the Application folder double click its icon in the Scripts Application folder This opens the script in a tab in the ScreenView worksp
272. em 1 otherwise 0 Bitwise OR evaluates the state of corresponding bits in two data items If either bit 1 then it sets the corresponding bit in the result data item 1 otherwise 0 not Bitwise NOT evaluates the state of each bit in a data item producing a result which has the opposite state for each bit Substitutes 1 for 0 and sub stitutes 0 for 1 Bitwise Exclusive OR evaluates the state of corresponding bits in two data items If either but not both bit 1 then it sets the corresponding bit in the result 1 otherwise Bitwise Shift Left shifts the bits in a data item named on the left side of the operator by the number of positions defined on the right side of the op erator from the LSB towards the MSB Bitwise Shift Right shifts the bits in a data item named on the left side of the operator by the number of positions defined on the right side of the op erator from the MSB towards the LSB 7 28 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Math and Data Operations 7 7 6 Math Functions The following table lists the math functions available in the Math Builder group These in clude trigonometric and transcendental functions You can have a data item or expression within the parentheses Result Function Expression Math Functions Ph Co Operator abs The absolute value of a number is its unsigned magnitude For example 5 1 and ABS 1 both return 1 COS
273. empts to auto complete the name Enter the data item Index for example 01 When tabbing to the next field Think amp Do displays the data item name associated with the index Use the Find menu button or double click the field to display the Data Item Grid 3 Click the Add to Calculation button If the tagname does not exist Think amp Do prompts you to create the data item A single Calculation block produces one result Connect several Calculation blocks to gether if you need to produce intermediate results The Calculation block includes a Validate function which checks the syntax of the expres sion when you click the OK button If the expression is valid the Calculation Block dialog box closes Otherwise an error message pops up For more information on number ranges and types for math operations see Section 7 Math and Data Operations 2364 en B Flow Charts 5 2 3 Call Block You use the Call block to call a subchart Just as a program can call a subroutine the Call block transfers execution to the called subchart Double click the Call block to access the a Call Block Expression tab shown in Figure 2 3 0 Call Call Block ne Expression Properties Call block Subcharts Button Subcharts Process Subconveyor External Modules Mapping Subchart Tagname Type Mapped To Call By Subconvevor Array Array Reference SubconveyorkickoutOutput Output Referenc
274. en Techniques Right click the Scrips Background folder and then select New Background Script from the pop up menu Selectthe File New Background Script menu To edit an existing background script double click its icon in the Scripts Background folder in the ScreenView Explorer This opens the script in a tab in the ScreenView work space see Figure 6 137 Scriptooot Description Execution Varlables available only for this group can be declared here The code configured here is executed while the condition configured in the Execution fleld is TRUE Figure 6 137 Background script page An asterisk following the tab name indicates that the page has changed and requires saving To save or close a script right click its tab and select the appropriate menu When any background script is saved during runtime the startup script interface executes again and the current value of the local variables of any script group is reset Variables declared a background script have local scope for that specific script only They are not available for any other script From any background script you can call procedures implemented in the global procedures or in the startup pages For an example see the Scripts Background topic in the Think amp Do help 6 7 6 Screen Scripts Screen scripts are special pre defined subroutines that are directly related to specific screens
275. entation does not consti tute any further duty on the part of Phoenix Contact to furnish information on modifications to products and or technical documentation You are responsible to verify the suitability and intended use of the products in your specific application in particular with regard to observ ing the applicable standards and regulations All information made available in the technical data is supplied without any accompanying guarantee whether expressly mentioned im plied or tacitly assumed In general the provisions of the current standard Terms and Conditions of Phoenix Contact apply exclusively in particular as concerns any warranty liability This manual including all illustrations contained herein is copyright protected Any changes to the contents or the publication of extracts of this document is prohibited Phoenix Contact reserves the right to register its own intellectual property rights for the product identifications of Phoenix Contact products that are used here Registration of such intellectual property rights by third parties is prohibited Other product identifications may be afforded legal protection even where they may not be indicated as such Table of Contents 1 Belore YY OUND COIN 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 2 Manual a
276. ently filtered in the ob ject is sent to the default printer Heload specifies the tag that when toggled the object reloads the data from the data source and displays it PDF Trigger specifies a Tag that when toggled the data currently filtered in the Alarm Event Control is distilled to a PDF file and saved to the path specified in the PDF Filename field below PDF Filename specifies a complete file path and name where the PDF file is to be saved You can also enter a tagname using the tag syntax PDF Trigger and PDF Filename are not supported in applications running on Windows CE Number of Rows specifies a tag that receives the number of rows currently available in the Grid object to the tag configured in this field Save Trigger when the tag configured in this field is toggled the data source Text File or Database is updated with the current values of the Grid object This field is not available when the Data Source type is Class Tag because the values are automatical ly updated in the tags as you change a cell in the grid Insert Trigger when Auto refresh after insert trigger is enabled checked the tag con figured in this field is used as a trigger to refresh the database table Whenever the val ue of the tag changes a new row is added to the table and the values of the array configured in the Inserted Values field are automatically inserted Inserted Values if the Insert Trigger is being used then the
277. eps 1 In ProjectCenter launch the FlowView using one of the following techniques a Click the Tools FlowView menu b Click the FlowView icon in the Project Explorer bar c Clickthe File New Standard Chart menu This will launch FlowView the Think amp Do flow charting tool If using this technique continue with Step 3 2 InFlowView select File New Standard Chart menu 2364 General Programming Techniques FlowView Name Flow Chart dialog box appears see Figure 4 5 name for the flow chart Flow Chart Enter 4 unique name for your flow chart chart Figure 4 5 Name Flow Chart dialog box 4 Click the OK button 44 Changing Flow Chart Settings All standard flow charts in a project execute once each logic scan The Standard 123 folder under the Flow Chart Explorer bar lists the execution order top one first bottom last 4 4 1 Changing Execution Order To change the order of flow chart execution 1 Click the beside the Standard 123 folder to expand it and show all standard flow charts 2 Place the cursor over the diamond symbol by the flow chart name to re order 3 Click and drag the flow chart to a new location on the list The tree listing then shows the new order of execution Only the Standard 123 listing of flow charts may be re ordered Other folders simply list the categor
278. er Project Explorer bar click the Flow Charts Explorer bar to see a list of the project s flow charts See Figure 4 3 zizi ut Project 71 Flowecharts ww Flowcharts 354 Standard 123 1 Auto Mode 2 Conveyor SF 3 Reset Counters All abc Simulation Subcharts Unused Screens Figure 4 3 The Project Explorer bar showing the Flow Chart explorer Folders group flow charts by categories The categories are not necessarily exclusive meaning that a flow chart can appear in multiple folders The categories are Standard 123 lists flow charts in the order that they are executed during each scan All abc lists both flow charts and subcharts together in alphabetical order Simulation lists simulation flow charts can write to input points Subcharts lists the project s subcharts if any in alphabetical order Note that the ac tual order of execution is determined by when they are called Unused lists any unused flow charts a category to temporarily disable execution You can also place unfinished flow charts the Unused category PHOENIX CONTACT 4 5 Think amp Do 21 ey FlowView Icon 4 6 PHOENIX CONTACT When the project has both standard flow charts and subcharts the hierarchical relationship is shown ProjectCenter s Flow Chart Explorer bar se
279. ers which range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Output An Output data item is a single bit or 1 for use with discrete output points for the I O sub system A maximum of 65535 output points are available An Output data item only needs a tagname in the Data Item grid The mapping of an Output data item to physical I O is a separate action performed in lOView You can map output data items any order to actual physical outputs String otring data items can hold up to 255 UNICODE characters Strings are NULL terminated which means the display will terminate when the string reaches the first NULL character They are useful in communicating with serial or parallel port devices such as alarming sys tems bar code readers instrumentation devices printers and other devices that commu nicate with the PC through serial or parallel ports System System data items contain specialized information available to flow charts and screens at Runtime For more information see Appendix A 1 System Data Items Timer Timer data items count upward once per millisecond Their timer value is accessible to flow charts and have a range of 0 to 4294967295 milliseconds 7 3 Understanding Arrays In mathematical terms arrays are a contiguous series of like things individually identifiable by their index numbers alone Computers benefit from using arrays simplifying sorting find ing minimum and maximum values etc In Think amp
280. erty appears like Figure 6 116 for an instance of the symbol Symbol Properties Category Property Optioni Tag Display properties from all categories Figure 6 116 Symbol Properties showing a custom property to define 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 109 Think amp Do 6 110 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 Depending on the context some object properties require a specific type of value like a string boolean or numerical value For these properties you must enclose the custom property definition in curly brackets In this example the Caption field requires string so type Option1 Caption Option 1 as shown in Figure 6 117 Object Properties Replace Hint B Check Caption f Option Caption Tag Option d Advanced True Value o bi ES E 3ign Confim _ Security Disable Figure 6 117 Object Properties Check Box with a custom property specified When completing the properties of an instance of the symbol the Option1 Caption property appears like Figure 6 118 Symbol Properties Category Property Option1 Caption Optioni Tag Display properties From all categories Figure 6 118 A default custom property in the Symbol Properties dialog box 6 Repeat steps 2 through 4 as needed to define the rest of the custom properties for the symbol In this example the finishe
281. es Recipe product X123 01 01 90 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Accessing Tags ScreenView uses an Object Properties dialog box to configure the settings for the objects and dynamics designed with ScreenView To display an object s Object Properties dialog box double click on the object or select the object clicking once on it and then press lt Shift gt lt F2 gt For example Figure 6 3 shows the Object Properties dialog box for a check box object Object Properties Replace Hint Check Caption Check Tag Advanced True Value Bow Ap Esign Security Disable n Figure 6 3 Object Properties Check Box The content of this dialog depends on the object or group of objects selected by the user For detailed description of each Object Properties dialog box for each type of object see Toolbars on page 6 11 and its subsections For now the key point is the Tag field This field appears in many Object Properties dialog boxes and elsewhere in ScreenView Wherever you need to fill in a tagname you can double click the field to display the Object Finder dialog box see Figure 6 4 Object Finder Dialog Box The Object Finder dialog box see Figure 6 4 lets you choose a tag from one of the three available tag types The left panel of the dialog box displays a tree of available tag types and
282. ess the button again Key enter a key in the text box or select a non alphanumeric key from the drop down list Enter a single character or key only Numbers are not valid entries for this field Select check the Shift Ctrl or Alt box to create a combination key meaning the Shift lt Ctrl gt or Alt key must be pressed with the key specified in the drop down list Click the Browse button to open the Key Modifier dialog box which lets you mod ify combination keys You can choose Left Right or Left or Right to specify the po sition on the keyboard of the Shift lt Ctrl gt or Alt key in the combination key If you choose Left or Right the command will be executed any time either of these keys is pressed in combination with the key specified in the drop down list Disable specifies a tag that contains a nonzero value when you want to disable this pushbutton When disabled pressing the button has no effect This box is empty by de fault which also enables the command property Ext Trans when selected translate the text automatically when a translation file is specified via scripting Security specifies a value to define a security level 0 to 255 for this button If the user does not have the specified security level the button becomes inactive If the user has the appropriate security level or you leave this field blank the button rem
283. etHashC lt None gt GutosizeMode GetType lt None gt AutoSizeMode GetTypec lt None gt AutoSizeMode ToString AutoSizeMode ToString lt None gt AutoSizeMode ToString amp AutoSizeMode ToString Figure 6 98 The NET Control Members Methods tab The Methods tab provides a grid with the following fields Method lists all methods available from the Component Parameters specifies the tags associated with the corresponding method If the meth od does not support any parameter then the fixed text None is displayed Otherwise you can enter the tags that you want to associate with the parameter When the method has more than one parameter you can enter one tag for each parameter separating them by a comma For example TagA TagB TagC When you click the Browse button it will display the list of parameters supported by the method allowing you to associate one tag with each parameter When the method is executed either the value of the tags are written to the parameters of the method input parameters or after the method is executed the NET Compo nent writes the value of the parameters to the tags output parameters Trigger when the tag configured in this field changes value the respective method of the NET Component is executed Return specifies the tag that receives the value returned by the method if any 2364 en B PHOENI
284. etworks such as DeviceNet and INTERBUS use a trunk line with drops as shown in Figure 1 3 The device type can vary from a limit switch to a motor controller but each one is identified by a node address By installing the appropriate I O scanner adapter card in the PC Think amp Do easily controls a factory network PC Factory Network Trunk line Figure 1 3 A PC can connect to a network with drops to devices The Ethernet topology Figure 1 4 uses an Ethernet adapter card in the PC and a central hub The hub distributes individual connections to I O controllers such as the popular Ether net Base Controllers H2 EBC and H4 EBC from Automationdirect com The base control are similar to concentrators in other networks and occupy one network address on the Ethernet network PC System Control Ethernet Network Figure 1 4 PC connected to multiple controllers The arrival of the Windows CE based controllers makes it possible for an embedded system running Think amp Do software to fit in the base with the I O modules Figure 1 5 The Think amp Do WinPLC includes the system in the base WinPLC and I O System modules Windows CE syste I O base Figure 1 5 WinPLC and its one base of I O modules 1 5 2 Think amp Do Methods and Terminology The software you create to control applications is called a project A project can have one or more types of components flow charts HMI
285. event First Row Text field specifies string tag This tag will receive the text of all fields from the first row of the Alarm Event Control The fields are tab delimited Whenever the first row changes either due to a new Alarm Event or simply because the rows are reor dered the value of the configured tag is updated Summary Changes field specifies an integer tag This tag will receive a running count of the number of changes in the Alarm Event Control For example when a new Alarm occurs or when an Alarm is acknowledged the value of the configured tag will be incre mented Reordering the rows is not counted as a change Clickthe Navigation Triggers button to open the following dialog box Navigation Triggers DE Cancel Page Up Down Home End Figure 6 79 The Alarm Event Control Navigation Triggers dialog box Make the on screen Alarm Control object scroll up scroll down page up page down go to home beginning of page or go to end of page by configuring tags in the corre sponding fields Whenever the values of the configred tags change the Alarm Control object will navigate that way This is useful for adding navigation controls to the screen for example if you configure the same tag to the Up field in this dialog box and a Push button object then the Alarm Control object will scroll up whenever the Pushbutton ob ject is pressed PHOENIX CONTACT 6 73
286. ew and tab view 3 6 The Add I O Driver dialog box and its driver listing 3 7 lOView displays an image of the I O scanner card or Runtime target 3 8 lOView showing the Module Info tab for selected module 3 9 lOView showing the I O Mapping tab for selected module 3 11 Physical I O points map to logical I O points any sequence 3 12 The on screen images in lOView reflect input and output states 3 13 Connection related buttons available in the toolbar 3 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 Think amp Do Section 4 Section 5 A 8 PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Add and Remove driver buttons 3 15 Add Remove Insert and Replace device buttons 3 15 Flow chart segment showing an action and branching block 4 3 A Call block calls a subchart which returns to the original flow chart 4 4 The Project
287. execution of Think amp Do 2 Open or create a project by Selecting the File New menu to create a project with the untitled pdb name in the title bar Selecting the File Open menu or the Open button to display a standard Open dialog box 1 4 Using Help There are several techniques for obtaining help from Think amp Do select Help from the menu bar click a Help button or press lt F1 gt Figure 1 1 illustrates the Help menu as it ap pears when selected from the menu bar Help se Think amp Do Help Topics Phoenix Contact on the Web b Phoenix Contact eAnswer About Think amp Do Figure 1 1 The Think amp Do Help menu 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 1 5 Think amp Do 1 6 PHOENIX CONTACT The Help Think amp Do Help Topics menu item displays an Think amp Do Help window showing the Contents tab with a list of all Help topics for Think amp Do You can also display Help Contents by pressing lt F1 gt The other Help menu items are Table 1 2 Help Sources Source Phoenix Contact on the Connects to the Phoenix Contact website so that you can Web get technical support directly from Phoenix Contact Phoenix Contact A web based support system that includes previously an eAnswer swered questions and a place where you can ask your questions and receive answers You can also submit prod uct suggestions About Think amp Do Displ
288. f an operator logs on and does not have the specified security level the command becomes inactive If an operator logs on and does have the specified security level or you leave this field blank the command property remains active Fonts opens the Font dialog box Use this dialog box to change the characteristics of a message font Data Souces opens the Data Sources dialog box which allows you to define labels and their order in the combo box Data Sources Type Static Labels Figure 6 47 The Data Sources dialog box Use the parameters on the Combo Data dialog box as follows Type permits selection of Static Labels Text File or Database Field is available for Text File and Database types Enter the field number in the text file or database that provides the list of combo box labels Heload specifies a tag If during execution this tag contains a nonzero value the com bo box reloads Type a zero or leave the field blank default to have the combo box stay hidden displaying the user selected label Settings displays a dialog box that lets you select a text file database or enter static labels e The Static Labels dialog box provides a list box for entry of the static labels Enter labels separated by commas or on separate lines e The Grid Data Text File dialog box lets you select a data file and specify its for mat see Data Source Text File on page 6 97
289. f the bars Maximum Value field specifies a numeric constant or a tag value that defines the max imum value used to calculate the height if vertical or width if horizontal of the bars f you do not specify a value for this field ScreenView opens a dialog box requesting you confirm creation of the tag ScreenView also allows you to enter constants in tag numeric value fields Constant val ues defined by the character are equivalent to numeric values except that constants display in the Tag Replace dialog box You may find constants useful for documentation purposes or for creating generic objects For example Name 100 Where the value 100 following the semicolon is the constant and Name is a constant mnemonic only and not added to database Foreground Color specify a fill color for the bars by clicking the combo box button When the Color dialog box displays click on a color to select it and then close the dialog box Direction area specifies the Vertical or Horizontal direction of the bar graph 6 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Text Property Tool il Operator Screen Techniques Orientation area specifies the Up Center or Down orientation of the maximum and minimum values when drawing the bars Text I O Property Click the Text I O tool to add the dynamic input or output text property to a selected Text obje
290. figure a report using data in the system and indicating where to print the tag values Each tagname will re place the tag tagname For float tags use the following syntax tag n where n is the number of decimal characters you want printed If you are using the standard report editor text only ASCII or UNICODE then the number of characters reserved for the tag value will be equal to the number of characters used to type the tagname including the two curly brackets For example configuring TND TagA in the report body reserves ten characters for the tag value in the report file This behavior is not valid for reports in RTF format 6 6 5 Scheduler Worksheet The Scheduler worksheet generates events with defined mathematical expressions to be executed according to the time date or any monitored event ScreenView sequentially increments the number that identifies the Scheduler worksheet for each newly created worksheet Different scheduler groups have only organizational purposes 6 126 PHOENIX CONTACT Use one of the following methods to insert a new Scheduler worksheet Right click on the Worksheets folder and then select New Scheduler from the pop up menu Select the File New Worksheet Scheduler menu A new Scheduler worksheet displays as shown in Figure 6 131 Scheduler 1 Description Trigger Expression Disable 4 5 Figure 6 131 Scheduler worksheet The
291. fines parameters and locals You ll notice first that the Begin Block expression dialog has two lists Subchart Parameters These data items map externally to data items of the calling flow chart Parameter data items are assigned unique names that can be up to 30 char acters long Subchart Locals Local data items are only used internally in the subchart Local data items are assigned unique names that can be up to 30 characters long Parameters All fields for each parameter except Default Value become drop down lists when you se lect in them In the Call By field you can choose either Reference or Value Use call by reference when the calling flow chart needs to see changes made by the subchart The sub chart s data item references the calling flow chart s data item so they change together Use 2364 en B Flow Charts call by value when you want the subchart to use the data item as acopy The Default Value entry only applies to data items called by value For ease of use Think amp Do assigns this default value when the calling flow chart does not assign a value for it in its Call block The default value field does not apply for call by reference data items You use the Array Type field entry to specify the type of array when you select Array from the Type entry and use call by reference Locals Since locals are accessible only within a subchart there is no call by selection The defa
292. g Description optional Retentive Non retentive setting Initial value optional Tagnames user defined Data Item index number pre assigned but editable Figure 7 1 The Data Item grid displays all tags of a particular data type PHOENIX CONTACT 7 3 Think amp Do 7 4 Selecting a Data Item To select a data item follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the letter in the first column such as N The cursor changes to an arrow 2 Click to select the row of the Data Item grid highlighting the row Adding Data Items To add data items with specific tagnames follow these steps 1 Click the empty cell in the column and type the tagname 2 Press lt Enter gt or click the cursor in another cell and Think amp Do creates the new item To add data items with default tagnames 1 Click in the row for the new data item 2 Right click to access the pop up menu 3 Click Add to add a new data item at the bottom of the list or Insert to insert a new row above the selected row To add or insert multiple data items 1 Click a cell in the row where the first of the new data items will go 2 Right click to access the pop up menu 3 Click Add Many or Insert Many to get the Add or Insert Multiple Data Items dialog box 4 Enterthe number of data items to add or insert and click the OK button New data items appear with default names a seque
293. g the Runtime files and the Watch project monitor logo becomes animated Some notes on how Load and Start works ProjectCenter opens the source files using the projectname prj file name The Runtime files are referenced using the projectname cfg file name The user does not have to load the project source files only the Runtime files This is equivalent to the File Open menu on the Certified PC Runtime If there is a file called projectname zip in the same directory that Load and Start is using it will download the compressed files to the WinPLC Restart Clicking this button starts the project in its initial state All flow charts begin at block O and initial values are loaded for data items No files are transferred on a Restart Watch displays a confirmation warning message before performing the restart PHOENIX CONTACT 9 11 Think amp Do 9 12 PHOENIX CONTACT Stop Clicking this button stops the running project on the selected target station I O goes to the ShutDown pattern defined in OView For the WinPLC it s either zero last state or a user defined pattern Watch displays a confirmation warning message first Project monitor logo animation stops Upload Clicking this button transfers all files from the target station to the development system Watch displays a Save As dialog box to specify the destination directory CE Watch transfers Runtime files and the compressed edit
294. g with each parameter Script specifies the script that will be executed when the event is triggered by the ActiveX control When you click the Browse button it will display a dialog box with the complete script associated with the event The main dialog box displays only the expression configured in the first line of the script 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques 6 3 18 Configuring NET Control Objects After inserting the NET Framework control see NET Control Object on page 6 38 dou ble click the NETcontrol to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint MET Control Control System Windows Forme Button Button i Enable Focus Property Pages Members Figure 6 96 Object Properties NET Control Click the Members button to configure the NET Framework control This displays the Members Properties tab shown below Members Properties Methods Events Property Tag Expression Action AccessibilibyObjectE B Get Always Ler AccessibilibyObject B Get Set Always F AccessibilityObject B Get Always AccessibilibyObject B m Get Always AccessibilityObject B 4 Get Set Always Ler AccessibilibyObject B Get Always AccessibilibyObject B Get Set Always AccessibilityObject B Get Always Figure 6 97 The NET Control Members Properties t
295. gets on page 9 9 There s also an option to Enable Instant Recall see Instant Recall for Windows CE Target on page 9 12 2364 en B 2364 Creating a Project 2 2 1 Local Remote If you select Certified PC as the Runtime target ProjectCenter lists Local the default name for the current PC in the Runtime Connection drop down menu see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 To use a remote PC for the Runtime type the name of that PC in the Runtime target field For more information on connecting to a remote PC see Setting Up Remote Communications on page 8 23 2 2 2 Selecting a Windows CE Target One or several Windows CE systems may be on the network connected to the local PC When several systems are attached ProjectCenter can only target one at a time Think amp Do interacts with the proper device for project uploads download project run halt actions etc The PC must have a network configuration with TCP IP protocol a network adapter card and special network settings Otherwise the procedure that follows may not work Please refer to the Getting Started booklet that accompanied the Windows CE hardware for in structions It may also be necessary install the NWLink IPX SPX protocol if the target de vice cannot be located and must be reset to establish a compatible IP address To select a Windows CE target 1 Choose one of the Windows options in the Runtime Target field The Runtime Connec
296. ght mouse button Right Up executes the command script once when the user releases the right mouse button on the object 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques On Double Click executes the command script once when the user double clicks on the object with the left mouse button Think amp Do treats the touch screen actions the same way it treats the mouse pointer ac tions In other words it is transparent for Think amp Do if an event was triggered by a touch screen interface or by a regular mouse pointer events On Right Down On Right Up and On Double Click are not supported by CEView applications running on the Windows CE operating system Whencreating an application for a touch screen device it is important to keep in mind that events On Right Down and On Right Up cannot be triggered on such devices Key is the shortcut used to trigger the events On Down While Down and On Up using a keyboard This option is especially useful when creating applications for runtime de vices that do not provide a mouse or touch screen interface the keyboard is the only physical interface available to interact with the application during the runtime Shift or Al boxes creamte a combination key meaning the Shift lt Ctrl gt or lt Alt gt key must be pressed with the key specified in the drop down list Key Modifier dialog box opens the Key Modifer dialog
297. ging the value of array tag configured in this field The initial array position offset can be configured in this field Number of Rows specifies the tag the receives the number of rows currently available in the Grid object Row Number specifies the tag used to write the number of the row currently selected during runtime In addition you can select different rows by writing their values in this tag 6 102 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Condition specifies the data filter expression This expression must follow the basic syntax of lt ColumnName gt Comparison Operator Value e g ColumnX gt 200 When using Text File or Class Tag for Data Sources the ColumnName is the value specified in the Label When using Database for the Data Source the column is the val ue specified in the Field In this case if the Field is left blank the column value speci fied is the Label Tips You can combine several conditions simultaneously in the Condition field using the logic operators AND OR and NOT For example ColumnAge gt 10 OR Column Name John AND ColumnDate gt 05 20 2003 You can use wildcards and in the Condition field to filter data You can configure tags between curly brackets TagName in the Condition field to change the filtering condition during the runtime Print Trigger specifies the tag that when toggled the data curr
298. gt 214214 Invalid move Valid move Current Date Fixed Integers 1 Register 1 Counter 1 Number Legend 1 Flag N Flags 1 Timer System From To 2364 en B 5 16 PHOENIX CONTACT Flow Charts 5 2 9 Do Loop Block Think amp Do provides a Do Loop construct see Figure 5 10 which you can use within a standard flow chart or subchart Of course most flow charts loop back to execute part or all DO of the chart but that repetition must wait until the next scan The Do Loop is the only con struct that allows blocks to execute more than once during a scan DoLoop Do Loop Block Button Figure 5 10 A Do Loop consists of Do Loop block linked to a Compare block The best uses for Do Loops are for data operations such as manipulating arrays and sort ing Remember that I O read write operations occur only once per scan so trying to pulse outputs rapidly from a Do Loop doesn t work The Do Loop and Compare blocks shown in Figure 5 10 have a loop back line from the exit of the Compare to the entry of the Do Loop block This connecting line will vary in length allowing you to place several blocks between the Do Loop and Compare blocks The Do Loop has the following rules and characteristics Do loop executes only if logic flow reaches the Do Loop block You specify a maximum loop count as a safeguard in the Do Loop block expression
299. hardware type and model of computer monitor video card I O boards installed in the system and the amount and type of installed memory PHOENIX CONTACT Internet www phoenixcontact com Users outside the United States should contact their local sales office 2364 en PHOENIX CONTACT 1 11 Think amp Do 1 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Creating a Project 2364 Section This section informs you about 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 Starting a new project Selecting a Runtime target Specifying inputs outputs and data items Basics on creating control programs and operator screens 2 cR 2 3 Stanin a NEW FIO COl m M 2 3 2 1 1 Creating a New piece 2 4 2 1 2 Naming a New 2 5 2 1 3 Opening a RETE EEUU 2 6 2 1 4 C 2 6 2 1 5 Flow Chart and Screens Explorer 2 7 2 1 6 Wate Ment Explorer 2 8 2 1 7 2 8 Selecting a Runtime Target Type een 2 8 2 2 1 a 2 9 2 2 2 Selecting a Windows CE 2 9 Specifying Inputs Outputs an
300. hardware address for each device that cannot be changed Please refer to the Windows CE device documentation for details on how to reset and configure the IP address The name of the selected target will appear in the list box for the Runtime Target field see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 Later when the project runs ProjectCenter automatically sends compiled programs to run on the selected target 2 3 Specifying Inputs Outputs and Data Items Think amp Do uses a separate application lOView to define a project s inputs outputs and data items To launch lOView select Tools lOView or click the IOView icon in the Proj ect Explorer bar The lOView defines the drivers in the project and shows them graphically For many drivers lOView can automatically detect and display connected devices For more information on IET lOView Icon lOView see Section 3 Drivers Devices and Tags 2 4 Creating Control Programs Think amp Do uses flow chart control programs developed in FlowView A flow chart is a type of diagram that uses symbols to illustrate a control process The symbols in the flow chart depict two classes of items action blocks and branching blocks see Figure 2 9 These are defined in the following sections Branching Block Figure 2 9 Flow chart showing an action and branching block 2 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Creating a Project 2 4 1 Action Block A box representing an
301. hart FlowView shows it maximized in the workspace see Figure 4 7 Use the Window menu to show multiple open flow charts by selecting 5 or one of the tile options Switch to other open flow charts either using the list in the Window menu or by pressing the F6 or lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt lt Shift gt lt F6 gt or lt Shift gt lt Tab gt to reverse the order key FlowView chart1 File Edit Debug Tools Window Help d i n ew A Qa A Control Decision Compare Move Calc DoLoop Cal Wait PID SQL Run Com Moon Note Zoom In Zoom Out Block Menus Toolbar Row labels Column labels Workspace Scroll bars Figure 4 7 FlowView showing a new Flow Chart The key elements of the FlowView window shown in Figure 4 7 are Menus Provide access to all the commands in FlowView as well as online help Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that trigger actions These actions duplicate many commands that are available in the menus Column labels Provide a guide for locating shapes in the drawing area FlowView pro vides five columns for flow chart objects Rowlabels Provide a guide for locating shapes in the drawing area FlowView provides an unlimited number of rows as they are needed limited only by available memory Drawing area Build flow charts in the drawing area Horizontal and vertical grid lines appear by default Blocks must appear wit
302. hart Blocks To draw flow chart block connecting lines follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the bottom or side for Decision and Compare blocks connecting point of a block that doesn t have an out going flow line The connecting point turns or ange or the specified color to indicate a potential out going connector pointer and the cursor changes to the connector pointer If the flow chart editor is inadvertently in connect mode press the Esc key to switch back to select mode 2 Click the out going connector point 3 Move the cursor to the next block s top or left in coming connector point which will turn green or the specified color 4 Click the in coming connector to complete the line The cursor changes back to the se lector pointer FlowView supports automatic routing from one block to another so it is only necessary to click the out going connector of one block and the incoming connector of the next to gen erate the flow line It is always possible to manually draw the flow line by clicking from point to point to route the line 4 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B General Programming Techniques For example Figure 4 11 shows a simple project flow chart with all required connecting lines Figure 4 11 Sample flow chart with flow lines connecting all blocks Unlike CAD programs that permit ending a line where it intersects another line FlowView requires guiding the pending connection to the
303. hart block that you want to add 2 Click the cell where you want to place the flow chart block Each cell of the flow chart can have only one flow chart block 4 5 2 Turning the Grid On and Off To turn the page grid on or off follow these steps 1 Select the File Preferences menu to view the Preferences dialog box 2 Inthe Preferences General tab clear the Show Grid Lines check box to turn off the grid lines Select the check box to turn the grid lines back on The full design of a flow chart may be large and any page may be larger than the viewable window You can see more of the page by using the zoom factor setting 4 5 3 Increasing the Number of Columns To increase the number of columns do one of the following sequence of steps For the Current Flow Chart 1 Selectthe File Chart Properties menu to display the Chart Properties dialog box 2 or use the up down buttons in the Columns field to change the number of columns 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box 2364 en B General Programming Techniques For All Flow Charts 1 Select the File Preferences menu to display the Preferences dialog box 2 Inthe Preferences General tab a number or use the up down buttons in the Columns field to change the number of columns 3 Inthe Save Preferences dialog box that appears choose the option desired You can choose to Apply t
304. harts in FlowView each with its own window The window arrangement in Figure 4 9 is called tiled A cascaded arrangement places one behind the other slightly offset You can also maximize minimize or close any flow chart window by using the Minimize Maximize and Close buttons in the upper right corner To choose tiled or cascaded windows click the Window Cascade or Window Tile Ver tically or Window Tile Horizontally menu from the FlowView main menu 4 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en General Programming Techniques 4 7 Editing Flow Charts FlowView provides intuitive editing capability to move or cut and paste flow chart blocks from one grid location to another Many functions are available with a mouse right click or use toolbar buttons as described To select flow chart elements for editing 1 Click a block or connection to select it By default FlowView is always in selection mode except after clicking a block s exit con nector anchor that doesn t have a flow line connecting to another block see Connecting Flow Chart Blocks on page 4 15 2 Toselect multiple blocks or connections do one of the following Select a rectangular area by pressing hold down the left mouse button dragging the cursor diagonally to size a rectangular area and then releasing the mouse but ton Hold the Ctrl key while clicking blocks or connections Clicking a selected block or
305. have a copy of the Windows XP Vista 7 operating system 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 1 9 Think amp Do 1 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 5 4 1 Local and Remote Systems When developing an application and running it on the same PC the target system is said to be the local PC This configuration is the simplest to do and is shown in Figure 1 7 An I O scanner card connects the PC to the I O subsystem Local Runtime System System Factory Network Figure 1 7 Local PC used for development and Runtime In some factory situations it may be necessary to access the PC based control system from another location The project engineer may create the application on a development system in an office environment while the Runtime system exists some distance away in a manu facturing environment The company network can connect the development system to the Runtime system as shown in Figure 1 8 In another common scenario a project engineer will use a laptop as a local system and attach it to the factory floor controller as a remote PC Local Development Remote Target System Runtime system Factory Network System Factory Network Figure 1 8 Development and Runtime control on different systems When using remote and local systems each PC platform must have a Windows XP Vista 7 operating system and be equally capable of running Think amp Do Each PC must also have its own installation and license of Think amp Do
306. he Screen Attributes dialog box PHOENIX CONTACT 6 25 Think amp Do Grid Tool Open Polygon Tool 6 26 PHOENIX CONTACT Grid Click the Grid tool to specify whether to show or hide the grid on the screen editor You can use the Grid dialog box to configure the default settings for a grid To open this dialog box right click on the screen and select Grid Settings when the pop up menu displays 6 3 10 Using the Static Objects Toolbar The Static Objects toolbar provides the following tools which you can use to create poly gons rectangles lines and other objects for your screen gt zc e0BHL Figure 6 26 The Static Objects toolbar The tools in the Static Objects toolbar are described below Open Polygon Object Click the Open Polygon tool to draw an open polygon with a border in the specified fore ground color To draw an open polygon in the drawing area 1 Click the left mouse button to set the starting point of the polygon 2 Move the cursor to a new location and click again to place the second vertex Repeat this process until you create the desired polygon shape 4 Double click to stop drawing the polygon To view the object properties double click on the polygon object and the Object Proper ties dialog box is displays as follows Object Properties Replace Hint Open Polyqan Line t No Line Color Solid Line
307. he To group and click the Find button Select the tag and click the OK button 7 6 3 Moving Multiple Data Item Values You can take advantage of the Move block s ability to move multiple data values in a single block For example the illustration below shows a move of a series of four numbers FROM Starting data 0 Status_A B p N 15Status B item N 1 Flow p 16 B 619 N 2 Speed A 2195 gt N 17 Speed B 2195 Ending data item N 3 Temp A 815 N 18Temp_B 315 HEEL The Starting data item and Ending data item fields define the ranges in the From and To groups All items whose indexes fall between the index of the items in the starting and ending fields belong to the group Their position in the group is by increasing or decreasing index values for example type N index 0 1 2 and 3 Indexes are set in the Data Item grid Only the first and last items are named in the starting and ending tagname fields The starting item of a move series is defined from either low or high index number Make sure that both From and To groups use Starting data item and Ending data item in the same way When specifying the same data types for the From and To groups you must use the same number of data items in each range If not an error dialog appears Moves With Inverted Order Sometimes you may need to move a series of data item values
308. he Trend Advanced Settings dialog box For information about completing the fields in this window see the Creating Batch History topic in the online help Use the body parameters on this worksheet as follows Tagname specifies the tagname to be saved in the history file Double click the field or right click and then select Insert Tag to display the Object Finder dialog box see Object Finder Dialog Box on page 6 7 Typing a new name gives you the opportunity to create the internal tag see Creating ScreenView Tags on page 6 9 After adding or removing tags from a Trend worksheet any history files hst you pre viously created will no longer be compatible with the new setting Consequently the data from those history files will no longer be displayed by the Trend object Dead Band specifies a value to filter acceptable changes when Save on Tag Change is used For example Dead Band has value 5 If the tag value is 50 and changes to 52 the system will not register this variation in the database because it is less than 5 If the change is equal to or greater than 5 the new value will be saved to the history file Field specifies the name of the field in the database where the tag will be stored If this field is left blank the name of the tag will be used as the field name Array tags and classes will have the characters and replaced by For examples see Table 6 24
309. he Changes to this project only Apply the Changes to this project only and all future projects created from this point forward Leave the preferences set the way they are Reset the project to the default settings for new projects Abandon changes Reset this project and all future projects to the factory default settings 4 Click the OK button to close the dialog box 4 5 4 Changing Zoom Level To change the page magnification Click the Zoom drop down list on the toolbar Figure 4 8 or click a magnification tool in the menu bar or to increment the zoom to the next respective setting Zoom 75 C Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom settings Magnification tools Figure 4 8 Zoom tools in FlowView A Another method is to select the View Zoom Factor and select the desired setting PHOENIX CONTACT 4 11 2364 en B Think amp Do 4 6 Displaying Multiple Flow Charts You can open multiple flow charts in FlowView This is very useful for copying flow chart logic from one to another As shown in Figure 4 9 each flow chart occupies its own window within FlowView FlowView File Edit View Debug Tools Window Help D lt gt ee a lt ej wy oy 100 Control Decision Compare Move DoLoop Cal Wait PID SQL Run Motion Reset Counters Main Conveyor Shift EEG ees Figure 4 9 Open multiple flow c
310. he block or right click and select Expression to display the Move Block Expression tab Figure 7 6 Move Block Expression D Properties From Data type Move Starting data item Rotate E Ta Data type 2 Starting data item Figure 7 6 The Move Block Expression tab The Move Block Expression tab has From and To groups You must complete the From data fields before completing the To data fields Think amp Do automatically presents only the valid data types in the To group based on the data type selected in the From group If the data types are not the same the Move block performs the necessary data for mat conversion 7 6 2 Moving Between Same Data Types The simplest case is moving data from one data item to another of the same type The fol lowing example uses two data items of the Number type making the tagname Setpoint equal to MaxTemperature FROM TO MaxTemperature Setpoint To perform this type of move follow these steps 1 Double click the Move block to display the Move Expression dialog box 2 Selectthe Data type in the From group 3 Selectthe Starting field and click the Find button to select the tagname from the data item list Select the tag and click the OK button PHOENIX CONTACT 7 17 Think amp Do 4 Select the Data type in the To group 5 Select the Starting data item in t
311. he dynamic Row when selected include set up and set down arrows in the list box object scroll bar Page when selected include page up and page down arrows in the list box object scroll bar Start End when selected include home and end arrows in the list box object scroll bar List wrap when selected continue displaying and scrolling the message list starting at the opposite end after you scroll to the beginning or end of the list Enter Reqd when selected allows users to select messages using the Enter key only It prevents the Tab key from selecting messages Color boxes when selected opens the Color dialog box or the 16 color Color Selec tion dialog box Either dialog box allows you to specify or change colors for the list box object Click a color to select it and then click the OK button to close the dialog box e Highlight Color specifies a color for highlighting messages default is blue e Text Color specifies a color for highlighting message text default is black e Win Color specifies a color for the list box background default is white e Border Color specifies a color for the list box border default is black Smart Message Object Click the Smart Messages tool to create or more smart message objects which you can use to display messages and graphics based on tag values when you execute the ap plication ScreenView provides the following smart message
312. he original data item remains unchanged by the subchart It may be called by value or called by tag When called by value the flow chart simply uses the value at the time of the call When called by tag the flow chart uses a tagname to point to a data item for the subchart to accept as a constant Subchart locals have a default value value at the time the subchart is called The sub chart can subsequently modify that value but all this is transparent to the calling flow chart Therefore a Call Block Expression tab will not show any locals of the subchart being called 5 3 5 Subchart Design Summary The main points of using subcharts in a project are Only a standard flow chart has an Enable block permitting it to run automatically at run time if enable conditions are satisfied A subchart only runs if it is called Either a standard flow chart or another subchart can call a subchart The first block in a subchart is the Begin block and the last one is the Return block The subchart program you write goes between these blocks The Begin Block Expression tab defines parameters and locals for the subchart If a subchart operates only on global tagnames in the project s Data Item grid you do not have to define parameters or locals in the Begin Block Expression tab However this is generally not good design practice since the subchart will be unsuitable for ge neric use by several calling flow charts The subch
313. he tag or expression configured in the Tag Expression field into the property Get Set Executes both actions Get and Set However when opening a screen with the NET Component Think amp Do executes the Get command before exe cuting any Set command That is the tag configured in the Tag Expression field is updated with the value of the property when Think amp Do opens the screen where the NET Component is configured Set Get Executes both actions Get and Set However when opening a screen with the NET Component Think amp Do executes the Set command before exe cuting any Get command That is the property is updated with the value of the tag configured in the Tag Expression field when Think amp Do opens the screen where the Component is configured When the value of the property is Read only cannot by overwritten by the application the Action field is automatically set to Get Scan defines the polling method to get values from the propreties For Compo nents all properties scan Always by default That is Think amp Do keeps polling the value of the property and updating the tag configured in the Tag Expression field with this value 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Configuring Methods Select the Methods tab to configure Framework objects Members Properties Methods Events Method Parameters AutoSizeMode CompareTo AutoSizeMade Equals AutoSizeMode G
314. hem at once 2364 2364 ae Fonts Tool l Line Color Tool Background Color Tool 4 Operator Screen Techniques Fonts Click the Fonts tool to specify the font and color for selected Text objects or to specify a default font and color for new text objects To save development time select several Text objects and use the Fonts tool to specify font and color settings for all of the objects at once You cannot use this function for grouped Text objects however Line Color Click the Line Color tool to specify a line color for selected objects or to set a default color for new objects including the following Open Polygons Closed Polygons Lines Ellipses Rounded Rectangles Rectangles When you click the Line Color tool the Line Selection dialog box see Figure 6 25 dis plays Use this dialog box to specify line styles and color for the selected objects Line Selection Line Solid Line Dashed Line ae Figure 6 25 The Line Selection dialog box To save development time you can select several of the preceding objects and use the Line Color tool to specify a line color for all of the objects at once Background Color Click the Background Color tool to specify a background color for the screen You automatically disable this tool when you check the Enable Background box on t
315. hin a grid cell with only one block per cell PHOENIX CONTACT 4 9 Think amp Do 4 10 PHOENIX CONTACT scroll bars Use the scroll bars to bring portions of the drawing area that are off screen into view To scroll in small increments click the arrows at the end of each scroll bar Status line Provides information about FlowView or selected shapes etc Use multiple flow charts for all but the simplest projects with each flow chart controlling a sin gle process machine or major function A modular approach to developing flow chart pro grams makes it easier to create debug and maintain control projects All enabled flow charts execute in the order they appear in the Standard 123 list The project can programmatically control which flow charts execute during any given scan cycle For more information on enabling flow charts see Enable Block on page 5 4 To create a chart select the File New Standard Chart menu To open a chart do one of the following Select the File Open Flow Chart menu and then select flow chart from the cas caded menu list Todisplay a list of current flow charts in the project use the Flow Chart Explorer in Pro jectCenter Open a flow chart from the list by double clicking it 4 5 1 Adding Flow Chart Blocks to a Flow Chart To add a flow chart block to the current flow chart follow these steps 1 Click the icon in the toolbar for the flow c
316. hoose Restore Defaults from the pop up menu 2364 en B 2364 Math and Data Operations To fill values follow these steps 1 Click the down arrow next to the Initial field to display a table of indexes and initial values see Figure 7 3 2 Single or multiple select using Ctrl or Shift plus left mouse click or drag select elements that you want to fill 3 Right click and choose Fill from the pop up menu 4 Choose Down Up or Series from the cascade menu to do one of the follow ing Down copies the top most element value to all selected elements Up copies the bottom most element value to all selected elements Series displays a dialog box to choose either a Linear or Growth series and enter a Step Value A linear series adds the step value to each succes sive selected element A growth series multiplies the step value times each successive selected element 7 4 Think amp Do System Data Items The Think amp Do Runtime system provides system information to flow charts and screens via System type data items System data types use data item ID numbers SYS 0 to SYS 79 You can view a listing of these in the data table by selecting System in the Data Item Ex plorer Using these data items in the project for example can Display the current system scan time Useabitthat is on every other scan Monitor scan statistic
317. ibed later see Compare Block on page 5 10 and Decision Block on page 5 14 Using just action and branching blocks flow charts can have complete control of I O sys tems or control a machine or process A project may consist of one or several flow charts 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 4 3 Think amp Do 4 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 1 Flow Charts and Subcharts Flow chart programs in Think amp Do provide two chart types for hierarchical structure Stan dard flow charts and Subcharts Their relationship is similar to main program and subroutine in BASIC language programs A flow chart Call block calls a subchart which transfers exe cution to the subchart The subchart does a return to the original flow chart transferring ex ecution back again Figure 4 2 lt gt Subchart Flow Chart Figure 4 2 A Call block calls a subchart which returns to the original flow chart Using subcharts with flow charts provides great flexibility in project design A flow chart can pass variables to a subchart through parameters you define Then the subchart can pass results back to the calling flow chart Well designed subcharts are generic making them easy to re use in future projects This saves time in future project development This aspect of project design is covered in detail in Flow Charts on page 5 3 2364 2364 General Programming Techniques 4 2 Exploring Flow Charts and Subcharts In the ProjectCent
318. ic Sortation Example File view Options Security Tools Help 9 4Sortation Example Project Name Sortation Example Project Path 5 S artation Example CFG Last Built 03 31 39 Thu Jan 24 2008 Build Version 42 3 Hun Status Running Unlocked Force Status Items Forced Status Simulated Error Statue Array Index Error Runtime Computer MAHLER Debug Computer Last Logic Solve Time 0 50 Last Scan Interval ms 50 50 Avg Logic Solve Time 0 50 Avg Scan Interval 50 Peak Scan Interval ms 50 For Help press 1 Figure 9 3 The Think amp Do Runtime Engine window If the Runtime window is not visible it s probably hidden by other windows Click the Think amp Do Runtime Engine button on the Windows task bar to see the window 9 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 l Scan Interval Button Building and Running Projects 9 3 Adjusting the Scan Interval The bar graphs in the Runtime window display scan performance statistics The graph below shows the relationship between parts of the scan You can set the scan interval but the logic solve time depends on project size and the system processing speed Scan Interval Read Solve Write Inputs Logic Outputs _ Logic Solve Time Figure 9 4 Scan Interval is the sum of Logic Solve Time and Pause time Since Thi
319. icking the Color button to open the Color dialog box Click a color to select it then close the dialog box Caption is not enabled for this object 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Button Object m Click the Button tool to create custom sized buttons as follows 1 Click the drawing area and drag the mouse cursor to create the button shape 2 Release the mouse button when the button is the size you want Button Tool 3 Double click on the object to view the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties x EZ Heplace Hint Button aj Caption Estem translation Multiline Wrap Text Auto gray Fonts Align Fill Color Auto Format Figure 6 33 Object Properties Button Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the button Caption specifies a caption by typing the text into the text box Fonts specifies font style for the caption by clicking the Fonts button When the Fonts dialog box displays specify the following parameters e Font typeface e Font style ize e Effects e Color e Script style Weight specifies a border line width by typing a number representing the line width in pixels into the text box Extern translation optional enables translation of the button when a translation file is specified via scripting
320. ied via scripting Fonts specifies font style for the caption by clicking the Fonts button Align specifies the alignment for the caption of the rectangle Fill Color specifies the fill color for the rectangle Multiline permits the caption of the rectangle to be shown in more than one line when checked Wrap Text when checked the object automatically wraps the text when necessary Auto gray out turns the caption of the rectangle to gray when the Command dynamic applied to the rectangle is disabled by the Disable field or due to the Security System 6 3 11 Using the Active Objects Toolbar The Active Objects toolbar provides the following tools which you can use to create dy namic objects Active objects typically require more parameters than static objects i ER Figure 6 37 The Active Objects toolbar The tools in the Active Objects toolbar are described below Alarm Event Alarm Event Control Object Tool Click the Alarm Event Control tool to add an alarm or event control object to your applica tion screen When acknowledging an alarm the Alarm Control object sends a message to the Alarm task with the following information Tagname Type User and Station This is a solution to control acknowledged alarms from a Web Thin Client To create and configure an alarm control object 1 Click the Alarm Event Contr
321. ifies the off set for this data point from the X Axis scale configured for the object This option is useful when you wantto display data from two or more data points using a different X scale period of time value for each one so you can compare them When the X Axis is configured as numeric the value on this field represents a nu meric scalar value If the X Axis is configured as date time the value for this field is giv en in seconds PHOENIX CONTACT 6 79 Think amp Do Cursor Value specify a tag in this field During the runtime the Trend Cursor object updates the value of this tag with the value of the intersection between the data point pen and the vertical cursor if any Axes The Axes button on the Trend Control Object Properties dialog box launches the Axes dialog box A Axis Data Type Period Type Auto f Numeric Duration 00 01 00 55 Scale Format Time rid Divisions 4 Time Bar Cursor Color m Scroll Position Y Axis Grid Scale Divisions 2 Min 8 100 Color m w Multiple Sections Format TN Figure 6 86 Trend Control Axes dialog box This dialog box lets you configure the settings for the X and Y axis Data Type specifies that the X axis can display either Date Time values or numeric values according to this setting e For Date Time the Scale Fromat button displays the following dialog box
322. ight of all selected objects to the height of the last object selected the object with the filled handles You can use the Resize height tool to resize one object by setting its height equal to its width Use the Resize width and Resize height tools to create circles from an ellipse or squares from rectangles Select only one object before using these tools You also can use your cursor mouse and keyboard arrow buttons to resize objects on your screen When you select an object or group of objects with the cursor selection handles black squares display at each corner and at the midpoint of each side You can use these handles as follows Toenlarge an object click on a handle and drag your cursor or pointer in the direction indicated by the arrows that display Clicking and dragging a corner resizes the entire object height and width while clicking on a side resizes the object in one direction only height only or width only 6 60 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques Toenlarge an object with finer resizing control click on a handle and do not release the left mouse button Click the arrow keys to resize the object in the direction indicated by the resizing arrows one pixel at a time Release the mouse button when you are fin ished resizing the object Toselect and resize an open or closed polygon draw a selection box around the poly gon and group it You can then click on a handle and
323. igure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 The Windows OPC Server Settings dialog box 8 14 The Add Tag Link dialog 8 15 The Browse for OPC Server dialog 8 16 Use DDE to communicate with other Windows based programs 8 17 Use Excel and DDE to access a remote Windows CE system 8 17 The DDE Server dialog 8 19 The DDE Server Configure dialog box 8 20 The DDE Server Peek dialog 8 20 Excel can display tag values from a running Think amp Do project 8 22 Excel may prompt to update links to Think amp Do tags 8 22 Remote communication between desktop PCS 8 23 The Think amp Do Project Build dialog box 9 3 The Output Window Build tab displays build messages 9 4 The Think 8 Do Runtime Engine window 9 4 Scan Interval is the sum of Logic Solve Time and Pause time 9 5 Change the scan interval permanently in ProjectCenter 9 6 Runtime Settings in ProjectCenter
324. igure an OPC server or client you must have the same user account on both PCs The OPC Client feature of Think amp Do uses the Tag Link driver OView as the communi cations mechanism To add OPC communications to a project 1 Start Think amp Do and load the desired project for OPC Client capability This will also load its existing I O configuration 2 Launch lOView In lOView select the Drivers Add menu to get the list of I O drivers 4 Choose the Tag Link Driver from the drop down list The Tag Link driver icon appears in the I O configuration This device can link tagnames in the Think amp Do project with tagnames in other applications However you need to connect a device to the Tag Link driver to fully configure the communications mechanism 2364 en B 2364 Communications Highlight the Tag Link Driver in the left pane the right pane is initially clear of devices Select Devices Add from the main menu In the Add Tag Link dialog box choose the T amp D OPC Client Tag Link Module as shown Add Tag Link Link Client Tag Link Module Link Size T 0 READ 50 Tag Read Server Browse Figure 8 14 The Add Tag Link dialog box The types of available tagname communications transactions include T amp D READ 50 50 Tag Read T amp D READ 100 100 Tag Read T amp D WHITE 50 50 Tag Write T amp
325. ime Target Use this drop down list to select the target You can change the target type at any time which makes it easy to switch between targets In fact Think amp Do automatically flags items that are not compatible with the target selection and warns about the possible conse quences of changing the target Build Mode Select whether the project will use actual I O data from a physical device or use flow chart logic to simulate I O behavior when the physical I O is unavailable or when testing See Simulation Flow Charts on page 10 13 Maximum Scan Interval The default is 50 ms Increase or decrease this interval as required by the project The scan interval setting minus logic solve time equals the time for data communications and other Windows based programs when applicable Selected I O The I O configured in lOView is listed in this read only field Windows CE Target Options Run CE Watch on project run Select this check box recommended if you want to monitor and control the Runtime activity of the Windows CE target Watch is the name of the Runtime control utility see Think amp Do CE Watch for Windows CE Targets on page 9 9 2364 9 7 Think amp Do Instant Recall and Password Select this check box to automatically store the project source files on the Windows CE target device during a download The Instant Recall feature is for users who may want to store a
326. implemented when starting the application Graphics WhileRunning The code configured within this subroutine executes contin uously while the graphic module is running The rate at which this subroutine is called depends on the performance of the platform where the application is running Graphics OnEnd The code configured within this subroutine automatically executes just once when the graphic module closes Do NOT change the name of the pre configured subroutines If you do the system will be unable to call them On the system that is running Think amp Do graphic module is the Viewer task Graphics_OnStart subroutine executes once on the system when the Viewer task launches Graphics WhileRunning subroutine executes while the Viewer task is running TheGraphics OnEnd subroutine executes once on the system when the Viewer task shuts down 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 133 Think amp Do 6 134 PHOENIX CONTACT The variables and procedures declared in this interface are NOT available for any other VB Script interface they have local scope only The procedures and or variables created in this interface have local scope they can be accessed only from the graphic script of the local station where they are being executed For an example see the Scripts Graphics topic in the Think amp Do help 6 7 4 Startup Scripts The code on the Startup page executes once
327. ing 4 9 6 5 Diawirig page SIZO sssr 6 5 cp PE 3 3 E 10 10 Editing flow chart block expressions 4 17 Enable eC tC Ic 4 13 5 4 Error Error code interpretation A 5 PIUNTHNG sme eats 7 27 Excel writing tagnames 8 22 Explorer Bal ee cas PEL 2 6 F Fill Effects dialog DOX 5 iioii ria Ea tt ipn Poo Le Eve 6 21 Filldown I O mapping feature 3 12 Find String 7 35 Flag Gala Axton varietal 7 7 FiGal Gata Ty Cts 7 7 Flow chart Calculation 5 5 7 25 Call DIGG 5 7 Communication 5 9 Compare 5 10 ls 4 16 Connecting DIOCKS i Door 4 16 CohlttoOl BIOCK E 5 13 BI lejifefo nio 10 3 DECISION atoian 5 14 Do Loop DIOCK 5 17 Editing block expressions 4 17 Enable blo6k uio 4 13 5 4 E XOCUTION path
328. ing flow chart resumes execution when the subchart executes its Return block Upon return the calling flow chart is free to use the new values set by the subchart Flow chart Subchart Parameter Mapping Tagname x 0 Tagname P 0 Tagname x 1 Tagname P 1 Tagname x 2 Tagname P 2 Tagname x 3 Tagname P 3 Tagname x 4 Tagname P 4 Called by Value lt gt Called by Reference Figure 5 20 Calling flow chart passes values to subcharts via parameters 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 5 27 Think amp Do 5 28 PHOENIX CONTACT The benefits of parameter mapping are many It allows you to create a generic subchart with generic parameter names When used in a project many other flow charts can use their own tagnames and call the subchart As long as the calling flow chart has properly mapped all the parameters defined in the subchart the subchart has all the data it needs to function A subchart has to exist before it can be called In fact it s best to completely write the sub chart and define its parameters before configuring the call block of the calling flow chart 5 3 2 Begin Expression Double click the Begin block to edit the Begin Expression expression dialog shown in Figure 5 21 Begin Block Expression Properties Subchart Parameters Move Down gt i Delete Subchart Locals 1 O co 74 Co Ch 4 wh Cancel Help Figure 5 21 The Begin Block Expression tab de
329. interval A dialog box displays a warning that scan time changes are temporary PHOENIX CONTACT 9 5 Think amp Do To set a new scan interval permanently follow these steps 1 Goto the ProjectCenter and select the Project Explorer button In the Runtime Set tings group select the desired Runtime Target and change the Maximum Scan In terval see Figure 9 5 The statistics in the Runtime window should reflect the changes Runtime Settings Runtime Target Build Mode Certified PC Reall Simulated 120 Maximum Scan Interval ms 50 Figure 9 5 Change the scan interval permanently in ProjectCenter If the peak scan interval ever exceeds the set scan interval increase the set scan interval Clear the Runtime peak statistics after setting the Scan Interval Click the Options Clear CDI Runtime Peak Statistics button 9 4 Stopping a Running Project The project will continue to run all flow charts I O read writes and HMI screens until halted To stop the project click File Close in the Runtime window Any machine or process on the I O network under Runtime control will cease operation when a project is stopped A confirmation box prompts for confirmation before closing Use the Lock feature to prevent an unauthorized run halt of a project Click the Security Lock menu in the Runtime window and enter a password 9 5 Running Remote Proj
330. inute bits16 23 second bits 24 31 day of the week SYS 18 Reserved18 Head only Reserved for internal use SYS 19 PowerFailShutdown When the value is set the logic stops executing I O stops scanning and data items marked as retentive SYS 17 LastShutdown Read only Contains an encoded time stamp of the last time the runtime shut down It is valid only when the runtime is configured for retentive data items Bits are written to disk See online Help for more information A 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 SYS 29 OverScans Is a 32 bit counter containing the number of times the measured scan interval exceeded the desired scan interval This is a 32 bit unsigned number so it will eventually wrap around to zero SYS 30 LastlOTime Read only Is the time the runtime took to read the inputs and write the outputs on the last scan SYS 31 PeaklOTime Is the peak LastlOTime encountered by the runtime Each time the runtime updates LastlOTime it compares it to PeaklOTime if LastlOTime is larger it is written to PeaklOTime Typically the user would set this value to zero to clear the current PeaklOTime to observe the new value This value is in milliseconds SYS 32 ClockMin Read only Toggles between zero and one every minute It is zero for 30 seconds and one for the next 30 seconds It repeats this pattern forever SYS 33 ClockSec Read only Toggles between zero and one every second It is zero for 0 5 secon
331. ion column defines whether the value of this tag will be written to the ActiveX property or if the value of the ActiveX property will be written to this tag or both Configure an expression in this field if you want to write the result of an expression to the property of the ActiveX object However in this case the value of the property cannot be read back to one tag unless you use the XGet function Therefore an expression is configured in this field the Scan field is automatically set to Set Action defines the direction of the interface between the tag or expression configured in the Tag Expression field and the ActiveX property according to Table 6 15 Table 6 15 ActiveX Actions Action Description Get Read the value of the ActiveX property and write it to the tag configured in the Tag Expression field Set Write the value from the tag or expression configured in the Tag Expression field into the ActiveX property Get Set Executes both actions Get and Set However when opening a screen with the ActiveX object Think amp Do executes the Get command before executing any Set command That is the tag configured in the Tag Expression field is updated with the value of the ActiveX property when Think amp Do opens the screen where the ActiveX is configured Set Get Executes both actions Get and Set However when opening a screen with the ActiveX object Think amp Do executes the Set command before exe
332. ions Using OPC Server Using DDE Server Setting up remote communications 8 3 Serial Port ComfnibicallOls Bats iade bu he 8 3 8 1 1 Adding the Serial stk edd acus 8 3 8 1 2 Adding a Seral POE cio c o UE ed REOR 8 4 8 1 3 onal POM 8 6 8 1 4 Creating Status Data 8 7 8 1 5 Mapping the Serial Port essere 8 7 8 1 6 Testing Communications 5 8 8 USING OPC SEVO der 8 10 8 2 1 OPC Client Applications 8 11 8 2 2 OPC Ex plone eee ewe ee 8 12 8 2 3 Configuring Ma Se A Ran 8 13 8 2 4 Configuring a Project as OPC 8 14 DDE AE OMNE CIR Pa pO 8 16 8 3 1 Introduction to DDE Servers i Leere ceni ete espace 8 17 8 3 2 Getting DDE Communications 8 18 8 3 3 DDE 2 8 18 8 3 4 Launching the DDE Server 8 19
333. ions The Microsoft Windows operating system installs a large selection of components by default but additional components are offered by third party providers Consult your NET Com ponent provider for further information about how to install 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques 3 Once the component object is placed double click it to open its Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint MET Control System Windows Forme Button Mame Buttoni Enable Focus Property Pages Members Figure 6 43 Object Properties Control The Object Properties dialog box displays the name of the Component You must as sign a name alias for the component in the Name field e g CheckBox1 You use this name to reference the component when using scripting languages VBScript and built in ScreenView scripting Do not configure two NET Components on the same screen with the same name For in stance if you place two CheckBox components on the same screen and assign the name CheckBox1 to one object Name field you cannot assign the same name to the second object on the same screen You would have to assign the name 2 for example to the second object The Property Pages button opens the standard window for configuring the Static Proper ties if any The layout and the options in this dialog box depend on the implementation of each NET
334. iring connects to the appropriate modules in the I O sub system The process variables gain values and other loop data are stored in the common tagname database Most of the scalar values are floating point numbers type Float Loop configuration is made easy with tabbed dialog boxes that configure each PID Block Analog or Digital Output D Manufacturing process Flow Chart lt gt Figure 7 19 PID Control Analog Input At Runtime the flow chart must execute a loop s PID Block at a rate suitable for stable loop control The I O associated with each loop is read and written during each scan The PID Block s loop calculations use the data only when it does the loop PID calculation The result of the PID calculation is the control output command For a complete description of how the loops operate and what you must do to use them see the PID for Process Control User Manual The tabbed dialog boxes for the PID Block provide an easy to use loop configuring tool After completing the setup the Trend object in HMI screen objects will make a good loop trending tool to help tune the loop s 2364 17 47 Think amp Do The following table provides a feature by feature description of the PID loops Table 7 10 PID Loops Loop update rate time The flow chart executing the PID Block determines the loop up
335. it associated with the data point during the runtime When tags are used the default units are the ones configured for the tag Lo Limit when the data point value is below this limit specifies a different pen style e g color to use See Pen Style dialog box for further information When tags are used the default Low Limit is the Low Alarm value configured for the tag Limit when the data point value is above this limit specifies a different pen style e g color to use See Pen Style dialog box for further information When tags are used the default High Limit is the High Alarm value configured for the tag Scale specifies a tag in this field to control the visibility of the scale Y axis as sociated with this pen during the runtime by changing the value of this tag O Show 1 Hide Break Interval specifies a maximum interval between two consecutive points If the time between two consecutive samples is higher than this number in seconds the Trend Control assumes that there was no data collection in this period and does not draw a line linking both samples When the X Axis is configured as numeric the value on this field represents a numeric scalar value If the X Axis is configured as date time the value for this field is given in seconds This field has some special values e 1 Do not connect the points e 2 Connect only points in ascending order X Axes off set spec
336. it has been successfully added The port and default information are listed in the Module Info tab All of the attributes of the port may be edited in the fields of the Module Info tab The attributes in the Module Info tab are used only by the serial port driver Changes made do not reconfigure the device attached to the serial port If communications prob lems are encountered please consult the documentation for the attached device In most cases a change to one or more the driver settings will correct the problem 8 1 3 Serial Port Settings The serial port settings appear in the Module Info tab Figure 8 5 These configure the driver for the proper speed of transmission and reception and how to structure and interpret the data etc Usually the documentation accompanying the device attached to the serial port will specify the communications settings Attributes Seral Port Device Name Bar Code Reader Serial Port Settings Access Type Genenc Serial Communication Baud Hate 5600 Parity Hone Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Control Click Here Receive Buffer Size 1024 Transmit B Size 512 Figure 8 5 Serial Port Settings Module Info tab Baud Rate The transmission speed in bits per second bps or baud The default speed is 9600 baud Parity The error checking bit Each 8 bit character may optionally have a 9th parity bit The parity setting specifies the polarity and other co
337. itor the application To make this possible create a common tagname database of meaningful names The database contains lists of system inputs outputs and internal variables Project Components Common Tagname Operator Database Screens Figure 2 1 Project components 2 1 Starting a New Project This section provides basic procedures for creating a project and a very simple flow chart program using Think amp Do FlowView It then shows how to create an operator screen with ScreenView Later chapters go into more detail on flow charts and screens 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 2 3 Think amp Do 2 1 1 Creating a New Project To create a new project follow these steps 5 1 From the Windows desktop click Start All Programs Phoenix Contact Think amp Do ProjectCenter to launch ProjectCenter or double click the ProjectCenter icon Think amp Da on the desktop to start 2 Selectthe File New menu and then take a moment to orient yourself to ProjectCen ProjectCenter ter see Figure 2 2 Icon ProjectCenter Project Runtime Runtime Runtime Menus Information Settings Connection Screen Settings L1 TI ak amp Do ProjectCenter untitled pdb Project m File View Project Debug Tools Window Help X fad m x 0 58 ct i lt gt pm ge m H2 n Toolbar Buttons LT Project name MyProject Ie Project folder C ProgrAm Files Phoenix Contac T hinkNDoST emp Proj
338. k amp Do 10 4 PHOENIX CONTACT The Flow Chart Execution Path pane Figure 10 2 is a treeview diagram like the direc tory list in Windows Explorer It shows the heirarchical relationship of flow charts in the run ning project Because it shows every instance of a subchart call some subcharts appear in the list more than once Flowchart Execution Path CF 1_ Main nveyor Shift E Active Process Subconveyor Out Of Scope Process subconveyor Of scope Process subconveyor Of scope 2 Reset Counters Disabled 3 Auto Mode Disabled Figure 10 2 AppTracker Flow Chart Execution Path pane The Status column shows the status of each flow chart in the execution path Active Flow chart is currently executing Enabled Enable criteria have been met The flow chart is ready to execute Disabled The chart is disabled and will not execute Waiting A Wait block has been encountered flow chart is waiting as specified Frozen Freeze criteria have been met flow chart will not execute Outof scope This only applies to subcharts When a subchart is not active the debug ger cannot see inside it The data item values remain as they were when the chart was last in scope The Block number column lists the number of the current block for active flow charts NA is displayed for all other flow charts The Project Explorer pane Figure 10 3 is also a treeview diagram It shows th
339. k the Control block to edit its expression This displays the Control Block Expression tab see Figure 5 8 Control Block Expression D Properties Statements Find Action Type Tagname Delete I ee ps Figure 5 8 The Control Block Expression tab Since actions in the Control block execute in the order in which they appear the Control block permits reordering actions To reorder an action select it it appears highlighted and then use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move the selected action For these but tons to be available there must be more than one action defined in the block The order rarely makes a difference This feature is primarily to improve readability It does however make a difference when starting a timer and then resetting that timer as opposed to the inverse This is applicable if the timer was previously stopped but did not complete elapsed time operations PHOENIX CONTACT 5 13 Think amp Do D Decision Decision block Button 5 14 PHOENIX CONTACT Editing a Control block To edit a Control block s expression follow these steps 1 Double click the Control block to open the Control Block Expression tab 2 Use the Action drop down list to select the action desired 3 Use the Type drop down list to select a data item type that can perform the selected Action
340. l Worksheets The Worksheets folder contains an entry for each worksheet created in the project Avail able worksheets are Alarm Math Recipe Report Scheduler Trend To create a new worksheet do one of the following Right click on the Worksheets folder and select the new worksheet desired from the pop up menu Selectthe File New Worksheet menu and then select the worksheet desired from the cascade menu To open a worksheet double click the entry in the tree To delete a worksheet right click its entry in the tree and then select Delete from the pop up menu 6 6 1 Alarm Worksheets Alarm worksheets let you configure alarm groups and tags related to each group The Alarm task defines the alarm messages generated by Think amp Do The primary purpose of an alarm is to inform the operator of any problems or abnormal conditions during the process so he can take corrective action s Use one of the following methods to create a new Alarm worksheet Right click on the Worksheets folder and then select New Alarm from the pop up menu Select the File New Worksheet Alarm menu PHOENIX CONTACT 6 115 Think amp Do A new Alarm worksheet displays as shown in Figure 6 124 Alarmi Lese muani Colors in Alarm Controls v Group m E nabis Activation Es FG NN On Line History Acknowledgment Display in
341. l calculations and so forth nternal tags are system tags predefined by ScreenView Internal tags have predeter mined functions time date acknowledge alarms storage of the logged on user name and so forth You cannot delete or modify these tags but you can access their values from any ScreenView task Shared tags are created in the Data Items editor and imported into the ScreenView en vironment You cannot edit shared tags in the ScreenView environment but you can modify these tags in ProjectCenter Consequently you can configure shared tags for any ScreenView task just as any other tag Understanding the Screen Tag Syntax Observe the following guidelines when naming a screen tag Youcan use letters numbers and the character underscore Donotuse the following characters G amp 4 lt gt These characters are parsed by the ScreenView scripting language as logic and arith metic operators tag must begin with a letter Maximum tag length is 255 characters Maximum class member length is 255 characters names must be unique You cannot specify the same name for two tags Tagsare not case sensitive though we recommended using uppercase and lowercase characters to make names more readable For example use TankLevel instead of tanklevel Tagnames must be different from internal tag names and math functions Use the Q character at th
342. le in a spreadsheet format The column titles and their meanings are I O Device Description Each bit in an module has a table entry and a descriptive prefix that can be user defined in the I O Device Description field in the Module Info tab Data The data type corresponds to the classification of the tagname in the Data Item grid in ProjectCenter Logical ID This is the number the common database uses to access each point The next section describes how to map Logical IDs Tagname The name of the input or output point This is assigned in ProjectCenter s Data Item grid but lOView displays it here when points are mapped to data items Physical Lists the type of I O network base number slot number and bit number The configuration is determined by mapping physical I O points to logical ID numbers or tagnames Figure 3 8 In this example the first four connections go straight across but the last four connections cross each other You can also choose a straight through mapping or PHOENIX CONTACT 3 11 2364 en B Think amp Do re map points by changing the relative order of logical ID such as 0 I 1 1 2 1 7 1 4 etc to the physical I O You can assign unique tagnames to each logical ID or group of IDs depending on data type lOView I O Configuration Think amp Do Runtime Engine I O device Logical IDs description
343. lecting the Project Settings Zoom Click the Zoom tool to change the cursor to the zoom mode Click and drag the mouse on the screen to select the area where you want to zoom Right click on the screen to change the cursor to selection mode again You can also select the zoom scale from the Zoom combo box Figure 6 10 Zoom drop down selection 6 3 6 Execution Control Toolbar The Execution Control toolbar provides tools shortcuts that duplicate functionality found on the Project menu bum Figure 6 11 The Execution toolbar The tools in the Execution Control toolbar are described below Test Display Click the Test Display tool to run in test display mode which allows you to configure an application while viewing graphical dynamics on line in the development environment Run ning in test display mode does not enable the Command and Text I O dynamic or execute worksheets Using the Test Display tool is the same as selecting the Project Test Display menu Stop Test Display Click the Stop Test Display tool to stop running in test display mode Using the Stop Test Display tool is the same as selecting the Project Stop Display Test menu PHOENIX CONTACT 6 13 Think amp Do Run Application Tool Stop Applicaton Tool Select Area Tool e Flood Fill Tool Hh Fill Color Tool 6 14 PHOENIX CONTACT Run Application Click the Run Application tool to la
344. lete name as a structured data item PHOENIX CONTACT 5 9 Think amp Do lt gt Compare Compare block Button 5 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 2 6 Compare Block The Compare block can make numerical or string comparisons Flow follows one of the two exit paths of the Compare block based on the result of the comparison The type of compar isons available are 55 than equal to greater than not equal to greater than or equal to and ess than or equal to For string comparisons you can further specify if the first string of the compare is considered a substring of the second with the Instr is contained in func tion Optionally you can use the Instr function to perform case sensitive comparisons Double click the Compare block to edit its expression This displays the Compare Block Expression tab see Figure 5 7 This example compares the register with the name NoOfUnits to a Fixed Interger constant of 4 Compare Block Expression D Properties ltem Data Type Register Data Item Comparison Type Equal Data Fixed Integer 4 Cancel Help Figure 5 7 The Compare Block Expression tab When using a constant in the Compare Expression tab the variable operand must be Item1 and the constant must be Item2 When Think amp Do Runtime executes a Compare block control will pass through the Yes path t
345. lip After Flip Horizontally Horizontally Figure 6 68 Flipping objects horizontally Use this tool only with a single selected object or grouped object You cannot use this tool with multiple objects selected 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Flip Vertically Tool Click the Flip Vertically tool to invert the selected object vertically The object rotates around an imaginary line through its vertical center until it is a mirror image of the original object For an example see the following figure Flip Vertically Tool Before Flip After Flip Vertically Vertically Figure 6 69 Flipping objects vertically Use this tool only with a single selected object or grouped object You cannot use this tool with multiple objects selected Rotate Tool Click the Rotate tool to rotate the selected object 90 degrees a quarter turn clockwise JA Rotate Tool Before After Rotate Rotate Figure 6 70 Rotating objects Use this tool only with a single selected object or grouped object You cannot use this tool with multiple objects selected Move to Front and Back Tools ScreenView assigns a unique identification number ID to every object on the screen These ID s always start at zero and range up to the total number of objects on the screen You can click on an object to display its ID in the status bar ScreenView uses ID s to determine whether an object displays in front of or behind an other
346. ll not be permitted to input a number lower than this value Maximum Value defines a maximum value for the tag associated with this text object A user will not be permitted to input a number greater than this value e Password check box when selected this option to hide password text entries by replacing the text with asterisks e Fmt combo box selects a format for the input output field e Disable field disables the tag s data input property when the value entered is greater than zero e Security field specify a value in this field to define the security level for a specific data input object as defined in the Security section E Sign check box when selected prompts the user to enter the Electronic Signature before changing the tag value PHOENIX CONTACT 6 19 Think amp Do Colors Property Tool 6 20 PHOENIX CONTACT VK select the Virtual Keyboard type used for this object You need to enable the Vir tual Keyboard option Project Settings Runtime Desktop tab before configuring the Virtual Keyboard for this interface Colors Property Click the Colors tool to add the color change property to a selected object The Colors dy namic allows you to modify the color of a static object during the runtime based on the value of a tag or expression Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint C
347. locks FlowView has the following types of action blocks in the order they appear in the toolbar Control Control blocks initiate an action such as turning on an output or resetting a tim er One Control block can have up to ten control expressions Control expressions set values for flags turn outputs on and off and control timers and counters Move Move blocks simply move data from one data item to another The source data item remains unchanged Calc Calculation blocks provide comprehensive math capabilities They operate on a variety of data types with either simple arithmetic or transcendental functions such as sine log etc DoLoop Do Loops are a construct that allow blocks to execute more than once during a scan A Call Call blocks call a subchart Call Blocks transfer execution to the called subchart with specified parameters Wait Wait blocks insert a wait period in the execution of the flow chart A Wait block can have a wait period set in milliseconds or hours minutes and seconds If the wait dura tion is zero the block defaults to one scan cycle PID PID blocks perform a mathematical algorithm for process control which is the Pro portional Integral Derivative PID algorithm Think amp Do permits up to 64 PID loops in a project SQL SQL blocks provide a tabbed dialog box that helps you construct SQL queries for database accesses Run Run Program block lets you start other
348. log box see below Click the button again to toggle to the opposite state which in this example is Closed and conform to characteristics specified in the Closed area specifies a tag or an expression to accomplish the following e Type in a tag to receive the Write Value from the appropriate state Open or Closed area in the Configuration dialog box 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 57 Think amp Do e an expression to execute On Down when you press the pushbutton down ScreenView does not write the result of any expression the field into a tag Indicator specifies a tag to define an indicator that causes the button to change to a specified color when the tag value matches one of two specified values You must de fine both the colors and tag values in the Configuration dialog box If you leave this field blank the indicator changes color automatically when you press the button 5 when selected the user will be prompted to enter the Electronic Signature be fore executing the dynamic Reset active for Latched pushbutton type only specifies a tag to control the but ton s latched state as follows e a zero and the button will remain in a latched state after you press it e Type anonzero value and a latched button will become unlatched after you press it You must reset the tag value to zero before you can pr
349. ls provides pre defined symbol folders with symbols that are available for use in any application EE Library Application Symbols 1 Architecture barcode dbserver hmi hub S 2 4 Figure 6 107 Symbol Library In this example Application Symbols and System Symbols folders are open and their sub folders closed In addition the image shows the System Symbols Architecture folder selected and the symbols available in that folder Inserting a Symbol To insert a symbol in a screen follow these steps 1 Open the desired screen or create a new screen Open the Symbol Library by clicking the Symbols button in the bottom toolbar Navigate the folders in the left pane of the Symbol Library to find the desired symbol Select it in the right pane Click the location on the screen where you want the symbol positioned 2 3 4 27 Screeni Figure 6 108 Symbol placed a screen You can also insert symbols using the Edit Paste From menu However when using this menu option the inserted symbol does not keep any link with the Master Symbol it is just a Simple copy of the object or group of objects used to create the Master Symbol Another technique that preserves the linked symbol is to right click in the screen workspace and then select Insert Linked Symbol from the context menu PHOENIX CONTACT 6 105
350. lue specified in the Tri State field If the Feedback field is blank the third state will be displayed when the tag configured in the Tag field assumes the value specified in the Tri State field Feedback specifies a value that indicates the state of the object TRUE FALSE or Third State If the Feedback field is blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be used as the Feedback tag Ext Trans enables translation of the caption when a translation file is specified via scripting Force forces the Tag Database to recognize a tag change when the user clicks on the object even if the value of the tag in question does not change Auto gray out turns the caption of the object to gray when it is disabled by the Disable field in the Object Properties dialog box or due to the Security System Enable Focus when selected the object can receive the focus during the runtime by the navigation keys Push Like when selected the control is displayed as a button instead of the standard check box standard shape Color specifies the fill color for the button This option is enabled only when the Push Like option is checked PHOENIX CONTACT 6 47 Think amp Do There are two main modes of operation for this object Normal Mode and Tri State Mode These modes are described below Normal Mode When the Tri State option is unchecked the object o
351. lues on page 7 5 Up to 65535 arrays can be defined 7 3 2 Initializing Arrays The Data Item grid in ProjectCenter allows setting initial values for any array type You can set a single value that applies to all array elements or you can define individual values for each element Other features permit copying initial values filling a series of elements with the same value and creating an automatic sequence of values To set a single value for all array elements enter the value in the Initial field To set unique values by element follow these steps 1 Click the down arrow next to the Initial field to display a table of indexes and initial values see Figure 7 3 2 Enter a value for each element copy and paste element values follow these steps 1 Click the down arrow next to the Initial field to display a table of indexes and initial values see Figure 7 3 2 Right click the element you want to copy and choose Copy from the pop up menu 3 Select the element you want to paste and choose Paste from the pop up menu To restore default values 0 0 0 or null follow these steps 1 Click the down arrow next to the Initial field to display a table of indexes and initial values see Figure 7 3 2 Single or multiple select using Ctrl or Shift plus left mouse click or drag select elements that you want to restore to their default value 3 Right click and c
352. ly brackets in the Group Selec tion Tagname Message and Username fields to modify the filtering options during runtime Configure integer tagnames for the fields in the Priority group and or on the latest field from the Interval group to modify these values during runtime Configure string tagnames for the Period fields in the Interval group to modify those values during runtime Use wildcards and when specifying values for the Selection Tagname Mes sage and Username fields PHOENIX CONTACT 6 71 Think amp Do Advanced You access the Advanced dialog box from the Alarm Event Control Object Properties dialog box when you click the Advanced button Advanced Dake amp Time Format Month Year Hour Minute Second M5 Sample 11 16 2007 15 12 33 Ack Security All trigger Ack trigger Run time dialog triggers Delete Message Columns Security 0 Filters Confirm Print Trigger PDF Trigger PDF Filename O Total items Auto Format Selected tag First Row Text Summary Changes Navigation Triggers Cancel Multiline Figure 6 78 Alarm Event Control Advanced dialog box Use the parameters in the Date amp Time Format group to control which date and time information displays in the alarm message Click enable a check box to include that eleme
353. ly to the logic solve scans This means flow charts need to verify that the requested move or action has completed before requesting the next move or action from the motion card Think amp Do supports several motion cards that appear in lOView These including Douloi Galil and MEI see the Drivers menu Check the Phoenix Contact website at www phoenixcontact com for the latest and motion card driver information 5 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 A E Move Move block Button Flow Charts 5 2 11 Move Block The Move block simply moves data from one location to another All data items including I O exist as data items Therefore doing a move from one data item to another simply moves copies the data of the first data item into the second data item The value of the first data item is preserved The Move Block Expression tab see Figure 5 14 permits definition of the From and To data fields After selecting the Data Type from the drop down list the Starting data item becomes available The From and To variables may be of types listed in the table below Moves that are valid for individual data items are also valid in arrays You may also move data to Inputs when the flow chart is a Simulation type Move Block Expression Properties From Data type Move CE Starting data item Rotate Data type i a Star
354. m For example a Decision block can test inputs or outputs to determine if they are ON or OFF or transitioning from one state to the other A Decision block can have up to seven decision expressions If there are multiple ex pressions an OR or AND condition links them For example a Decision block could have the following expressions 1 ON AND Input2 OFF PHOENIX CONTACT 4 15 Think amp Do Compare blocks compare two data items For example a Compare block can compare an integer register value to a constant or another register A Compare block can compare val ues using one of the following comparison operators Equal To gt Greater Than lt Less Than lt gt Not Equal To gt Greater Than or Equal To lt Less Than or Equal The Do Loop blocks are similar to Compare blocks The first one at the top of the Do Loop provides a test for a maximum loop count This is primarily to prevent infinite loops and should not be used as a normal exit The bottom Compare block is a standard Compare block It is the normal and only valid exit point from the loop To change the bottom Compare block to a Decision block right click on the block and then select Change this Compare block to a Decision block from the pop up menu 4 8 5 Notes Notes don t actually appear in a block They can appear anywhere on the flow chart page and don t connect to or affect program flow 4 9 Connecting Flow C
355. m s To check for an overflow condition or error use a Compare block in the flow chart Place it immediately after the Calculation block being checked since the execution of other Calcu lation blocks overwrites math error system data items 7 7 4 Basic Math Operators Table 7 6 lists the basic math operators available in Think amp Do Table 7 6 Math Operators Operator Function o mod Modulus Remainder after division 0 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 27 2364 Think amp Do Think amp Do formats results to fit the result data type specified in the Calculation Block Expression tab If the result data item is not a Float Think amp Do truncates any fractional part of the answer For integer division Think amp Do converts operands to an integer before executing the divide operation a The mod operation may have variations in its usage The mod operation returns the re mainder after division Some examples 17 mod 5 2 17 mod 5 2 17 mod 5 2 17 5 2 7 7 5 Bitwise Operators The following table lists bitwise operators Use these operators to perform Boolean opera tions on two data items to produce a third item result or to manipulate bits within a single data item Table 7 7 Bitwise Operators pacten Bitwise AND evaluates the state of corresponding bits in two data items If both bits 1 then it sets the corresponding bit in the result data it
356. m which you can access project worksheets and screens Screens Worksheets Provides an area where you can edit displays and worksheets The following figure shows the development environment areas and windows in their default position You can customize this environment by changing the position of the different ar eas File Edit view Project window Toolbars 11 gx 23 OE 7018 O amp lpnsiT e O Ci Screens acreenl Z MAIN ScreenView _ 70 Screen 0 Screen Groups Explorer Cog Worksheets ie 45 Recipel EX Report 3 Scheduler fd Trend Scripts gt 1 Toolbars lw 631 223 Figure 4 14 ScreenView development environment 2364 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 21 Think amp Do ScreenView Explorer The ScreenView Explorer is a user friendly interface that lets you quickly find application components screens or worksheets The ScreenView Explorer uses a tree view with two main folders one for screens and the other for worksheets Screens Dig MAIN Lad Screen 9 Screen Groups 9 MyGroup MAIN SCREEM Worksheets AlarmnO01 Recipe xz Report Scheduler Trend Scripts Application 5 Global Procedures Graphics 5 Startu
357. mber of rows For instance the user might have 8 points being displayed in the trend object if the maximum size is set to two the legend will have a scroll bar to allow the user to scroll to the other points Number of items specifies the number of points default displayed on the legend You can allow the user to add remove points during the runtime regardless of the value in this field Selected Item specify a numeric tag The object writes in this tag the number of the selected row In addition you can select different rows by writing their values in this tag PHOENIX CONTACT 6 83 Think amp Do 6 84 PHOENIX CONTACT Fonts sets the font for the text displayed in the legend Toolbar The Toolbar button on the Trend Control Object Properties dialog box displays the Tool bar dialog box Toolbar a Command Activation Tag Tooltip Run 5top Period Cancel Window Zoom Window Zoom Horizontal Zoom Horizontal Zoom Vertical Zoom Vertical Zoom zoom In Zoom uk Cancel Zoom Cancel Zoom s s s S s amp S s Legend Properties Legend Properties lt Figure 6 90 The Trend Control Toolbar dialog box Show toolbar when selected the embedded toolbar is displayed during the runtime This interface provides useful buttons to trigger actions associated with the object Configure the following settings for each Command
358. me software to run the com piled project A Runtime target is the intended hardware platform that will control the final application The target may be an industrial PC or an embedded controller When the target is a different plat form from the PC used for development the terms remote and ocal are used with respect to the programmer for differentiation The next section describes typical configurations in these terms 1 5 3 Target Systems Many applications require the PC used for project development to also run the project How ever you can create a project on a PC to run on a different platform at a later time In either case the target system is the PC which has the Think amp Do Runtime software and runs the project If you are developing and running the project on the same PC the target is a Certi fied PC The concept of having a target machine run a project that is different from the development platform provides flexibility for various scenarios In all cases the development system must run on a 32 bit Windows based PC The Runtime may run on a 32 bit Windows based PC 2364 en B Before You Begin or Windows CE system In fact there can be several Runtime platforms attached to a single development system as shown below This allows the targeting of a particular machine from the group to run the project just developed Development Target Runtime Systems System Certified PC Ethernet Network Figure 1 6
359. meric tag in this field which is propor tional to the position of the cursor on the X axis from 0 to 100 When this value is changed the position of the cursor is automatically modified e Value Output specifies a string tag that returns the value of the X axis in which the cursor is currently positioned Position defines the position of the X axis as well as its direction and orientation Position Crientation Placement m Horizontal Direction Left Right f Vertical Figure 6 88 The Trend Control Position dialog box Available parameters in the Position dialog box are e Placement specifies where the X axis will be placed e Direction specifies the direction of the X axis e Orientation specifies the orientation of the X axis Scale defines the properties of the Y axis as follows e Min Max specify default minimum and maximum values displayed in the Y axis Used when more than one pen shares the same scale Multiple Sections disabled and or for the points whose Min and Max fields are not configured left blank e Auto Scaling when checked the Y scale is dynamically and automatically adjusted during the runtime so the values currently displayed fit it 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Multiple Selections when selected the Y scale is divided automatically into section for each pen otherwise all pens share the same Y scale
360. mp Do CE Watch CE Station Selection Following iz list of Think amp CE Runtime s currently available on the network He scan Reset using IP 1 Address IP Address 1 00 62 80 06 1 149 208 181 49 Hunter4finPLC Hunter s WinPLC Select Exit Help Figure 9 10 The Think amp Do CE Watch CE Station Selection dialog box Click the station to work with this highlights the station name 4 Click Select to make it the Watch target Instructions on how to establish a connection to particular Windows CE hardware are in the appropriate Getting Started booklet If the animated Think amp Do logo connection monitor freezes it means that communica tions with the selected station has been interrupted After selecting a particular target station click the CE Watch Think amp Do Project tab to con trol and monitor Runtime activity on the target see Figure 9 7 on page 9 8 Load amp Start This command downloads the Runtime files from the development system to the selected station overwriting the current file in the target s memory If you have enabled Instant Recall in the ProjectCenter s Project explorer window settings clicking this button also downloads the editable source file in compressed format replacing any previous equivalent file in target memory After downloading these files Watch directs the target device to begin runnin
361. ms represent 8 bit binary values These are convenient for l O related bit pat terns or for ASCII character codes in communications Entries can be specified in decimal hexadecimal Ox prefix binary b suffix or a character ASCII Comm Comm data items represent serial port devices that communicate with the Runtime Through lOView they map to the physical COM ports of the target Flag Flags are single bit variables that have a value of either 0 or 1 These are for general use to store a Boolean TRUE FALSE variable Although these are single bit variables they are not associated with discrete I O points Float Float floating point data items use IEEE 64 bit format They are useful when you need to represent decimal fractions Their range provides for extremely small and extremely large numbers 2 225073858507201 6 308 to 1 7976931348623158e 308 The number of sig nificant digits is 17 Input An Input data item is a single bit O or 1 for use with discrete input points for the I O sub system A maximum of 65535 input points are available Note that an input data item only needs a tagname in the Data grid to exist The mapping of an Input data item to physical I O is a separate action performed in lOView You can map input data items in any order to actual physical inputs PHOENIX CONTACT 7 7 Think amp Do 7 8 PHOENIX CONTACT Number The Number data type provides signed 32 bit integ
362. n You can enter negative val ues in the second field destination position Reference combo boxes select a reference point to be used while moving the object on the screen Specifying this option is necessary only if you want to resize the object as you move it e Left is the left corner of the object e Right is the right corner of the object e Center is the center of the object e Top is the upper corner of the object Bottom is the lower corner of the object 2364 2364 Size Property Tool Size Property Tool Operator Screen Techniques Size Property Click the Size tool to increase or decrease the size of a selected object or symbol Dou ble click on the object symbol to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Size Tag Range Size Reference Height el 100 o 100 width dfo 1100 fo 100 LEFT Figure 6 22 Object Properties Resize Use the Object Properties dialog box to specify the following parameters fields specify the Height and Width fields to increase or decrease the objects horizontal and vertical size Range fields specify upper and lower tag limits which Think amp Do uses to increase and decrease the object size Size fields specify a percentage range which Think amp
363. n ProjectCenter are not running 10 1 1 Launching AppTracker start AppTracker do the following 1 Run the project If the project is not running an error message appears AppTracker 2 Clickthe AppTracker toolbar button in ProjectCenter FlowView etc Toolbar Button The AppTracker window Figure 10 1 provides a comprehensive debugging environment for project development The example shown below is a typical view of a project ili Think amp Do AppTracker Sortation Example SEE File Edit Yiew Tools Help 88 nor Flowchart Execution Path Block Status RN Dataltems type m rame Flow Chart List 3 Active canes RedPackagelD d yte ounter edPackage Process Subconveyor Out Of Scope SWR Counter GreenPackageID Process Subconveyor Out Of Scope Flag Counter WhitePackageID Project Diacess Subcanvave Cut nna Float Counter RedDiverterPos EUM GreenDiverterP Explorer 2 Reset Counters Disabled Input WhiteDiverterP 3 Auto Mode Disabled umbe YellowAccumula Output RedAccumulatio Data Item Register GreenAccumula String Counter WhiteAccumula Explorer System Timer w All Mata TFem si Type 0 Tagame 77 Vale Index IO Mapping Description Watch Window bd A Watch A Watch2 A Watch3 A Watch4 For Help press F1 MAHLER MAHLER gt 2 Figure 10 1 AppTracker window 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 10 3 Thin
364. n UNICODE format two bytes per charac ter or disable to save the report in ANSI format one byte per character Lock Value into the Tag Exp length select enable to automatically truncate the val ues of Tags Expressions in the report to fit between the curly brackets as they are po sitioned in the body of the report see below This helps preserve the layout of the report If this option is left unchecked then the full values of Tags Expressions in the re port will be displayed Output File specifies a string or tagname that contains the filename for printing to a file The string may include a tagname that contains part of the filename using the tag syntax For example report day out Where the generated file might be report1 out report2 out and so on according to the value of the day tag A report configuration file uses RCP as the default extension The Output File field is the file where data is stored Double click the field or right click and then select Insert Tag to display the Object Finder dialog box see Object Finder Dialog Box on page 6 7 Typing a new name gives you the opportunity to create the internal tag see Creating ScreenView Tags on page 6 9 Edit RTF file button accesses the report as an RTF file which you can edit 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 125 Think amp Do Use the body portion of this worksheet for report formatting You can con
365. n in Edit mode the development system has a special connection to the Runtime proj ect This connection allows access to data for Watch Windows etc but it also permits mod ification of the Runtime project online Note that new data items cannot be created in this mode To use Edit mode select Debug Edit Mode in ProjectCenter or FlowView After making changes the development and Runtime projects are different If saving the project at this time the edited newest version is active Edit Mode permits updating either flow charts without having to stop the Runtime and do a project build This is a very powerful feature when stopping a production line is not practical After completing the edit s for online changes you re ready to send them to the Runtime target In FlowView select the Debug Update RTE menu In the Runtime Modification dialog box click the OK button After this the Runtime and development projects match Any changes made are offline until sent to the Runtime project For Windows CE targets If you chose to enable Instant Recall Think amp Do re compress es and downloads the source files along with the changes after each Update RTE This keeps the compressed source files synchronized with the running project 10 4 Simulation Flow Charts Process simulation is useful in project development when access to an actual machine or process is restricted or not yet possible It
366. nce such as Number5 Number6 Number7 and so on When defining several data items for a new project or temporary ones for testing using default tagnames can be a time saver Type over the tagname later with a specific mean ingful name as the data items become a permanent part of the project Flow charts l PHOENIX CONTACT screens and mappings will automatically use the new tagnames Editing Data Item Grid Entries The Data Item grid has full editing capability on data items with Cut Copy and Paste functions To delete data item s follow these steps 1 Select a row by clicking its row header number Select multiple rows by doing a click and drag from the first to last row of the group to be selected The highlighted rows are ready for deleting 2 Press the lt Delete gt key To edit tagnames with copy paste functions follow these steps 1 Select the text in the tagname cell 2 Then click the Copy toolbar icon or right click to access the pop up menu and select the button Select the destination tagname cell 4 Clickthe Paste toolbar button or right click and select Paste from the pop up menu Data item tagnames are automatically forced to be unique within a project When pasting an existing tagname to a new cell Think amp Do automatically appends a numeric suffix to the name of the new cell You can then edit the name or number 2364 en B 2364
367. ndow Help 01518 S 88 ct a al i Ethernet lot 0 EtherNet Total Bases Eth 01 Slot2i Ch2 Eth 01 2 Ch3 E 20 fii umber E otate umber Eth 01 2 Ch4 Mapping to 4 Numbers Figure 7 11 Map in lOView To see the analog input values in real time 1 Ensure the analog module exists on the I O network which must be powered on and connected to the PC 2 Click the Connect button on the lOView main toolbar 3 Click the Scan button on the main toolbar When lOView establishes the scan to the analog module the on screen bar graph depicts the current analog value Analog output module on screen graphics can write to outputs as well To view a data sheet ofthe module s specs wiring and jumper settings right click the module and select the part number from the menu list PHOENIX CONTACT 7 31 Think amp Do 7 32 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 8 2 Scaling Analog Data Getting analog values to from number data items is easy enough In many cases the raw binary analog values must be scaled to match the engineering units preferred in the flow chart blocks For operator screens values displayed in engineering units Such as degrees PSI or gallons per minute have much more meaning The Calculation block is the perfect tool to do analog value scaling Analog Inputs Number Data Items Float Data Items Scaled floating point
368. nfigured for data output can read any of the timer variables 2364 en B 2364 Math and Data Operations During project development you can monitor or modify the variables in timer structures To monitor a timer in AppTracker at Runtime 1 AppTracker s Data Item explorer find Timer in the Data Items category 2 Click a Watch tab near the bottom of the AppTracker window 3 Drag the timer data item from the upper right pane to the Watch Window area and re lease The Watch Window displays the current timer value 4 To watch the variables in the Timer s structure click the by the timer in the watch window to expand the display see Figure 7 5 ili Think amp Do AppTracker Sortation Example rdb File Edit View Tools Help see Flowchart Execution Path I Dataltems Type 10 Tamames 1 Main Conveyor Shift Active Sey mu shiftRate Timer 2 Reset Counters Disabled Counter 3 Auto Mode MA Disabled Flag Float Input Number Output Register String System Timer All There 0 Index IO Mapping EFT Timer OQ jShifttRateTimer 299 556 OFF Accumulator D Accumulator Pest preset pe Dm p pee J Enabled 0 Enabled Amy 0 pManCoweyoAmy D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P Amy 2 Green
369. nfirm Label Position Sort E Stgn Extern translation Disable Security Advanced Figure 6 46 Object Properties Combo Box You can use this dialog box to set the following parameters Position specifies an integer tag which corresponds to the label currently displayed in the combo box Changing this tag value changes the label being displayed Label specifies a string tag to receive the value of the label currently displayed in the combo box Input Enabled when selected allows an operator to select a label by typing the con tents of that label into a tag in the Label field Confirm when selected prompts an operator to confirm a command during runtime VK specifies a virtual Keyboard type used for this object You need to enable the Vir tual Keyboard option on the Project Settings Runtime Desktop interface before con figuring the Virtual Keyboard for this interface E Sign when selected the user will be prompted to enter the Electronic Signature be fore executing the dynamic PHOENIX CONTACT 6 41 Think amp Do v Radio Button Object Tool 6 42 PHOENIX CONTACT Disable specifies a tag with a nonzero value to disable this combo box Type a zero or leave the field blank default to enable the command property If you disable the combo box it appears grayed out during runtime Security specifies a security level for the command 0 to 255 I
370. ng track of the project version that s running it s available to be recalled 9 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Building and Running Projects ProjectCenter s Runtime Settings group includes settings specific to Windows CE targets Certified PC PC Windows CE Target Think amp Do Stop Restart ProjectCenter Watch Load amp Start Project Runtime Upload files Project Source Flow Charts Instant Recall Project Source I O Configuration compressed copy Operator Screens Clear Files yp Tagname database Uncompress password L zi Figure 9 8 Runtime settings for Windows CE 9 6 Think amp Do CE Watch for Windows CE Targets This section describes Think amp Do CE Watch in greater detail CE Watch handles a variety of project Runtime and project source file tasks It can manage multiple CE Runtime targets on a network Each Runtime target on the network is a station The Watch window has two tabs with project control and monitoring provisions see Figure 9 9 Think amp Do Project tab for starting and stopping the project on the selected station and for transferring files to from the target station PHOENIX CONTACT 9 9 Think amp Do Think amp Do Station tab for viewing hardware status of the target station and selecting stations me Think amp Do Watch HunterWinPLC File Security Options Tools Help
371. nk amp Do holds the scan interval at a specified rate the Pause time is the time left for the system to handle communications and other program execution The Runtime win dow s bar graph displays average and peak logic solve times While the project runs scan time tasks occur continuously at the scan rate The default scan time is 50 ms The duration of the Read Inputs and Write Outputs tasks depends on the I O sub system size and speed It is the responsibility of the programmer application engineer to specify a scan time that allows enough Pause time for Windows to service other programs The Think amp Do Runtime enforces a Pause time equal to 20 or more of the scan interval The logic solve time for a very small project will register 1 to 2 ms With a default scan inter val of 50 ms the system has about 48 ms of pause time To set the scan interval 1 From the Runtime window s main menu click Options Set Scan Interval menu or click the Scan Interval toolbar button to display the Set Scan Interval dialog box To optimize performance set the scan interval so other Windows tasks have just enough time to perform Minimum allowable scan time settings are e Certified PC systems 2 ms e WinPLC 3ms The ProjectCenter scan time setting is stored with the project If a Windows CE target scan time is set with Watch it is temporary lost after project halt 2 Click the OK button to apply the scan
372. nk specifies that the message text will blink during the runtime FG specifies line color Border for the rectangle behind the message BG specifies the background Fill color for the rectangle behind the message Blink specifies that the rectangle behind the message will blink during the runtime Graphic File specifies the path and name of the bitmap file BMP if any that will be displayed when the message associated with it is selected during the runtime If you do not specify the path the bitmap file must be stored in the application s directory Transparent specifies the color that will be transparent in the graphic file if the En Transparent check box is checked Transparent if selected the color selected in the Transparent field will be set as transparent in the graphic file The properties Graphic File Transparent and En Transparent are not available for the Message Display type You can copy data from this dialog box and paste it into an Excel worksheet and vice versa Source File Format This section describes the format of the text file supported by the Smart Message object when the Data Source is Text File The main advantage of using an external text file in stead of static values is that it gives you the flexibility to change the messages during the runtime by pointing to a different text file or even by changing
373. nt in the display Note MS stands for milliseconds Watch the Sample text to preview how the information will look in the alarm message Use the parameters in the Ack group to control how alarms are acknowledged e Security field specifies a numeric value to specify which security level can acknowlege an alarm message Only those users with the specified level can respond e Ack All trigger field specifies a tag to receive a value When the tag changes value it indicates that all messages in the alarm object have been acknowleged e Ack trigger field specifies a tag to receive a value When the tag changes value it indicates that the message at the top of the alarm object has been acknowleged e Confirm check box when selected displays a confirmation dialog box when the user tries to acknowledge a single alarm e Enable comment individual ack only check box when selected allows the user to enter comments about the alarm just after acknowledging it Use the parameters in the Run time dialog box triggers group to contol e Columns field specifies a tag to receive a value When the tag changes value it opens a dialog box allowing the user to customize the columns visible in the object 6 72 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Operator Screen Techniques e Filters field specifies a tag to receive a value When the tag changes value it opens a dialog box allowing th
374. ntrols to be displayed on the Alarm Event Con trol object see Alarm Event Control Ob ject on page 6 34 On Line When checked the alarms require ac Checkbox gt Ack Required knowledgment In this case the alarms are displayed on the Alarm Event Control object Online mode until they are ac knowledged AND normalized see Alarm Event Control Object on page 6 34 On Line When checked the computer keeps Checkbox gt Beep beeping while there are alarm s to be ac knowledged currently active PHOENIX CONTACT 6 117 Think amp Do 6 118 PHOENIX CONTACT Table 6 21 Alarm Worksheet Header Settings Field On Line gt Send to Printer History gt Save to Disk History gt Generate Ack Messages History gt Generate Norm Message 5 Colors in Alarm Controls gt Enable Colors in Alarm Controls gt FG and When checked the alarm messages are sent to the printer as soon as the alarm event occurs When using this option you must use a matrix printer instead of DeskJet or LaserJet in order to print the message s and feed just one line oth erwise each alarm will be printed in a dif ferent sheet of paper The alarms will be printed in the default printer If you want to send alarms to a printer different from the default printer you can specify the printer path name editing the following parameter in the lt ApplicationName gt APP file AlarmLog Device lt PrinterPath Printe
375. numbers and the character _ underscore Donotuse the following characters amp lt gt These characters are parsed by the ScreenView scripting language as logic and arith metic operators tag must begin with a letter Maximum tag length is 255 characters Maximum class member length is 255 characters names must be unique You cannot specify the same name for two tags Tags not case sensitive though we recommended using uppercase and lowercase characters to make names more readable For example use TankLevel instead of tanklevel Tagnames must be different from internal tag names and math functions Use the Q character at the beginning of a tag name to indicate that the tag will be used as an indirect tag in the application For additional information see the ScreenView scripting language in the online help Some valid tag examples include Temperature pressure1 count X Using Screen Tag Values A screen tag value can be one of the following types Boolean is a Boolean or digital variable 0 or 1 nteger is a number positive negative or zero Equivalent to C type long integer Ex amples 0 5 200 Real is a number internally stored as a double word Equivalent to C type double String ASCII text is a character string up to 1024 characters that holds letters num bers or special characters Exampl
376. nventions about the parity bit if used The setting options are none odd even mark and space Data bits The number of bits used for a character Most modern devices use eight 8 bits per ASCII character transmitted Stop bits The number of bits used to indicate the end of a character The default setting is 1 bit Receive buffer size Specifies the size of the memory space allocated for the storage of incoming data on your Runtime hardware The default size is 1024 bytes Valid options are from 128 to 32767 bytes 2364 Communications Transmit buffer size Specifies the size of the memory space allocated for the storage of data awaiting transmis sion The default is 512 bytes Valid options are from 128 bytes to 32767 bytes Some Windows CE targets such as the WinPLC may not provide all the serial port set tings listed above See the Module Info tab in OView when configured for your particular Runtime device for applicable settings 8 1 4 Creating Status Data Items When properly configured serial communications provide simple inexpensive and reliable communications Occasionally you will need some status information For troubleshooting Think amp Do provides extensive diagnostic information With the serial device graphic se lected in lOView click the Module Status Mapping tab to access the status information 1 Serial_COMO01_ErrorE xists Serial COMO001_PortUnavailable 3 Serial_COMO
377. o specify a specific time to be used by calendar events Date specifies a specific date on which a calendar event must occur day 1 to 31 month 1 to 12 and year 1900 to 2099 If you leave the field blank the event occurs daily This field is used only by the calendar event Tag specifies a tag to receive a new value or expression return in the event Expression specifies an expression with return value that is set to the tag This field is used by all events Disable specifies a disable condition for the specified function Leave this field blank or use an expression value equal to zero to execute the function Use an expression val ue equal to one and the function will not execute Disable 1 In the fields that permit a tagname Trigger Tag Expression and Disable double click the field or right click and then select Insert Tag to display the Object Finder di alog box see Object Finder Dialog Box on page 6 7 Typing a new name gives you the opportunity to create the internal tag see Creating ScreenView Tags on page 6 9 6 6 6 Trend Worksheets Trend worksheets let you configure history groups that store trend curves Use the Trend task to declare which tags must have their values stored on disk and to create history files for trend graphs Think amp Do stores the samples in a binary history file hst and shows both history and on line samples in a screen tren
378. o the next block in that path if the comparison is TRUE If FALSE control passes through the No path to the next block in that path Editing a Compare Block To edit a Compare block expression follow these steps 1 While Selection Mode double click the Compare block to open the Compare Block Configuration tab See Figure 5 7 2 Click the Data Type drop down to select the data item type 3 Enter the Data Item using one of the following techniques Enter the data item name in the Data Item field While typing Think amp Do attempts to auto complete the name 2364 2364 Flow Charts Enter the data item Index for example 01 When tabbing to the next field Think amp Do displays the data item name associated with the index Use the Find menu button or double click the field to display the Data Item Grid 4 Use the Comparison Type drop down list to select the desired comparison 5 Use the Item2 group to select a Data Type and Data Item or fixed Value 6 Click the OK button Yes No path Selection By default the connection that goes out the bottom of the Compare block is the Yes path the exit on the right is the No path The Compare Block Properties tab permits adding a block Description and swapping the positions the Yes and No exit paths another way is to right click a block and then sele
379. o the tagname This prefix is required to access Think amp Do project tags in ScreenView When you select an array the Index button becomes available and you must select an index number for the array Clicking this button displays the Select Index dialog box see Figure 6 5 Select Index Cancel C CH E CO RO c3 Figure 6 5 The Select Index dialog box You can either select an index number from among the valid indexes displayed in the Num ber list or you can click the Tag radio button to display a list of valid tags both screen and Think amp Do Select the tag that will contain the index number at runtime When you select a timer the Member button becomes available and you must select member of the timer Clicking this button displays the Member selection dialog box see Figure 6 6 Either double click the desired member or select it and then click the OK button Member selection Cancel J Enabled La Preset Figure 6 6 The Member selection dialog box 2364 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Creating ScreenView Tags With the Object Finder dialog box displayed see Figure 6 4 on page 6 7 click the New button to display the New Tag dialog box see Figure 6 7 M ame Array Size Integer Description Web Data Server Figure 6 7 The New Tag
380. object types Message Display displays any one of multiple messages within a single screen object Multistate Indicator permists display of any one of multiple messages within a single screen object and also has the ability to display bitmap images with the messages Multistate Pushbutton permits display of messages and bitmap images This object also resembles a multi position switch in that it allows you to switch toggle between messages by clicking on the object during the runtime These smart message object types vary in their ability to display messages and graphics write to a tag and control how many messages and graphics display on the screen How ever all of the object types can receive process input Read Tag value to determine which message to display To add a smart message object to the screen 1 2 3 Click the Smart Message button and position the mouse on the screen Click and drag to create and adjust the size of a rectangle You use the rectangle s size and font size to determine how much text and how large a bitmap image you can display on the screen Later you can change the rectangle s size and font characteristics to allow longer messages to display in a given space 2364 en B 2364 4 Operator Screen Techniques Double click on the object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties E Replace Hint Smart Message Message Display Value Integer
381. ock provides a dialog box that helps construct SQL queries for database access After placing an SQL block in a flow chart double click the block to display the SQL Block General tab SOL Block SAL Statement frat 52 Change DB General Tag Mappings Filters where Sorting Order By SQL Statement SOL Request Type SELECT Type f SELECT Get data from DE Get single record Get first record INSERT Put data in DB Get multiple records Get previous record UPDATE Modify data in DB t Refresh existing recordset Get nest record DELETE Delete data from DB Close existing recordset Get last record C 5l Tables InProcess Flag s Result Number Result String Advanced mner Ok Cancel Validate Figure 7 13 SQL Block dialog box helps construct SQL statements 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 7 37 Think amp Do 7 10 1 SQL Block Overview The SQL Block dialog box has the following tabs General Configures the request type record type and query result data items Tag Mappings Map record fields to project tagnames Filters Where Specify operators and conditions for field names Sorting Order By Specifies field names and the sorting order SQL Statement Displays the resulting SQL statement cannot be directly edited use the tabs to change the SQL statement There are fields and buttons that appear on all t
382. ods Events Parameters Trigger AboutBox lt None gt lt None gt NextMonth lt None gt NextWeek lt None gt lt None gt PreviousDay lt None gt PreviousMonth lt None gt PreviousWeek lt None gt Previous ear lt gt Show hidden methods Figure 6 94 ActiveX Control Configuration Methods tab The columns in this tab are Method lists all methods available from the ActiveX object Parameters specifies tags associated with the parameters of the method of the corre sponding ActiveX object If the method does not support any parameter the fixed text None is displayed in the Parameters field Otherwise you can type the tags associ ated in the parameters of the ActiveX object When the method has more than one pa rameter you can type one tag for each parameter separating them by a comma For PHOENIX CONTACT 6 91 Think amp Do 6 92 PHOENIX CONTACT example TagA TagB TagC When the method is executed either the value of the tags are written to the parameters of the method input parameters or after the meth od is executed the ActiveX writes the value of the parameters to the tags output pa rameters When you click the Browse button it will display the list of parameters supported by the method allowing you to associate one tag with each parameter Trigger when the tag configur
383. of all ActiveX components registered on your com puter Insert ActiveX Control Calendar Control 3 0 CDDBRoxioContral Class Cancel Close COMMS View Class Contents Crystal Report Control Crystal Report Viewer Control CTreeview Control Desaware SpyVVorks 6 Easy Control 35 CAWINDOMW S Figure 6 40 The Insert ActiveX Control dialog box ActiveX controls are components designed according to a standard Because ScreenView is an ActiveX container you can configure and run ActiveX controls in Think amp Do screens ActiveX controls can provide the following interfaces Properties are variables whose values be read and or written for the application e g Object Color FileName URL and so forth Methods are functions from the ActiveX object that can be triggered by the application e g open a dialog box execute a calculation and so forth Events are internal messages that can trigger the execution of expressions in the appli cation e g Mouse Click Download Completed and so forth The name of the properties methods and events supported by each ActiveX depends on its own implementation There are two different ways to interface the application with the ActiveX control By using the ActiveX functions XGet XSet and XRun OR Byusing the Object Properties dialog box to configure the object When using ActiveX controls in your application
384. ol tool 2 Click in the display and drag the mouse to create and adjust the object s shape 3 Double click on the object to open the following Object Properties dialog box Object Properties si Replace Hint Marm Event Control Type s Fants Filters Wn Alarm Online m Columns Advanced E Sign Show gridlines Show header Exttranslation VE Figure 6 38 Object Properties Alarm Event Control 6 34 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques 4 Use the Type parameter to select an alarm or event The choices are e Alarm Online displays current alarm messages e Alarm History displays alarm messages from the history database e Alarm History Event displays alarm messages from the history database and shows the current event e Event displays the current event Available configuration options depend on whether the Type selected is an alarm or event See Configuring an Alarm below or Configuring an Event on page 6 74 Trend Control Object The Trend Control object displays data points values from different data sources in a a graphic format Click the Trend Control tool to add it to your application screen Double click on the object to launch its Object Properties dialog box as follows Trend Control Tool Object Properties a Replace Hint Control Border Data Sources Type Sunker
385. ol to TRUE state and to indicate that the control is in TRUE state For more information about states please refer to the states table Advanced opens the Advanced dialog box see Figure 6 49 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 43 Think amp Do 6 44 PHOENIX CONTACT Advanced Tri State Feedback Ext Trans Auto gray aut Force Enable Focus Push Like Auto Format Figure 6 49 The radio button Advanced dialog box Tri State if selected the control has a third state The third state will be displayed when the tag configured in the Feedback field assumes the value specified in the Tri State field If the Feedback field is blank the third state will be displayed when the tag configured in the Tag field assumes the value specified in the Tri State field Feedback specifies the value that indicates the state of the object TRUE FALSE or Third State If the Feedback field is blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be used as the Feedback tag Ext Trans enables translation of the button caption when a translation file is specified via scripting Force selecting this box forces the Tag Database to recognize a tag change when the user clicks on the object even if the value of the tag in question does not change Auto gray out turns the caption of the objectto gray whenitis disabled by the Disable field in the Object Properties dialog box or due to the Security Sys
386. olean conditions in the expression AND has greater precedence than OR in other words AND expressions are evaluated before OR expressions and then they are evaluated from top down Double click the Decision block to edit its expression This displays the Decision Block Expression tab see Figure 5 9 3 Decision Block Expression D Properties Statements Find Tagname condition Operator Delete MEN 1 2 3 4 5 T ss Cancel Help Figure 5 9 The Decision Block Expression tab Editing a Decision Block To edit a Decision block expression follow these steps 1 While in Selection Mode double click the Decision block to open the Decision Block Expression tab 2 Usethe drop down list to select the data item type Only valid data types appear in the list Available types are Array Comm Flag Input Output and Timer 3 Enter the Data Item using one of the following techniques Enter the tagname in the field While typing Think amp Do attempts to auto complete the name Enter the data item Index for example 01 When tabbing to the next field Think amp Do displays the data item name associated with the index Usethe Find menu button or double click the field to display the Data Item Grid 4 Usethe Condition drop down list to set the condition desired Conditions that appear are
387. olors Type Limit Lirnil Change Limit Color Blink Change Limit Color Blink n 7 NONE NONE Figure 6 19 Object Properties Colors You can use this dialog box to specify the following parameters determines the mode in which this dynamic works e Limit specifies up to four limits Change Limit for this dynamic and a color for each limit When the value of the tag or expression configured in the field reaches the limits the color associated with the respective limit is applied to the object Color specifies the code of the color that must be applied to the object directly in the Tag Expr field Using this code you can apply any color supported by your device to the object You can configure the RGBColor function in the Tag Expr field when Type By Color This allows you to configure the color by its RGB codes See Color Interface for a table with the codes for the most commonly used colors Limit Expr field specifies the name of a tag or expression you want to monitor When is By Limit Think amp Do compares the result of the tag expression with the spec ified Change Limits to determine the proper color for the selected object When Type is By Color the result of this field sets the color that will be applied to the obje
388. ols Wi Scan Disconnect INTERBUS Board 1 Connect Figure 3 10 Connection related buttons available in the toolbar Connect and Disconnect are opposite and alternately available functions Scan works only when the Connect function is active Disconnect while Scan is active automatically makes Scan inactive 2364 en B Drivers Devices and Tags The second set of toolbar buttons make off line editing easier when either the devices are not available to scan or the driver does not support scanning Add Driver and Remove Driver buttons configure adapters motion control boards or serial ports in the target Runtime 3 Configuration dow Help Add Driver Figure 3 11 Add and Remove driver buttons Each driver s controller is shown in the Board view pane of lOView in a tree diagram remaining buttons on the toolbar perform the Add Device Remove Device Insert Device and Replace Device functions For most I O these buttons can configure a de sired network for the project before the actual devices are connected to the PC dow Help L4 b Figure 3 12 Add Remove Insert and Replace device buttons Undocking a toolbar creates a floating window of buttons by clicking and dragging on an empty part of the toolbar You can dock a toolbar window on any window border by dragging the window to the border and rele
389. on 9 Properties Find BS as Find data item P 2 Validate Expression validation Calculation selection Math builder Operators Data items Math operators Basic math Type Add to calculation and delimiters ES Data item Math and string functions Bitwise Functions and a E gt Math String mg Bitwise operators Figure 7 9 The Calculation Block Expression tab 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 7 25 Think amp Do 7 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 7 1 Building a Calculation Expression The default Calculation Block Expression tab Figure 7 9 is ready for an expression en try It lets you build calculation expressions with virtually no typing Typically you begin by selecting a data item to contain the calculation result To specify a calculation expression result follow these steps 1 Select the default Result text will be highlighted when selected 2 Inthe Data Items group choose the data item type for the calculation result from the drop down list 3 Inthe Data Item field do one of the following the tagname reference Double click the field and use the Data Item grid to select a tag Select the field and then click the Find menu button Select either Find Global Data Item or Find Local Data Item These selections display the Data Item grid with the relevant
390. on the object otherwise it is hidden Pen Style The Pen Style dialog box allows you to configure the style of the pen used to draw the data point values on the object during the runtime Also it can be launched during the runtime allowing the user to customize these settings on the fly You have the option of defining a Hi Limit and a Lo Limit for each data point with the Options dialog box The Pen Style dialog box allows you to configure different settings for the pen e g color both when its values are within the limits Normal State and not within the limits Out of Limits state Pen Style Skate Normal Line Settings Expansion ES Marker Marker size 7 Weight Color z cma Figure 6 84 The Trend Control Pen Style dialog box After you select a State Normal or Out of Limits can configure its pen style The properties are Use Normal Settings is available only for the Out of Limits state When checked the pen will always be displayed with the settings for the Normal state even if the data point values are not within the limits configured for it Type specifies the type of the line used to draw the pen Weight specifies the weight thickness of the line used to draw the pen Expansion specifies the algorithm used to link the points as follows Specifies that consecutive poin
391. onfigure your own report text type with data from the system The main purpose of this task is to make report creation easier and more efficient ScreenView sequentially increments the number that identifies the Report worksheet for each newly created worksheet To print a report use a ScreenView scripting language function anywhere an expression is allowed Use one of the following methods to insert a new Report worksheet Right click on the Worksheets folder and then select New Report from the pop up menu Select the File New Worksheet Report menu 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques A new Report worksheet displays as shown in Figure 6 130 Reportl Description Options Disk Append Unicode Output File Edit ATF tile Lack Value into the Tag Exp length Figure 6 130 Report worksheet The Report worksheet is divided into two areas A Header area top section which contains information for the whole group Body area bottom section where you define each tag in the group Use the header parameters on this worksheet as follows Description specifies a description of the worksheet for documentation purposes Disk Append used when printing a file e Check the box to add append the new report to the end of an existing file e Uncheck the box to replace the existing report in that file with the new report Unicode select enable to save the report i
392. op interface before configuring the Virtual Keyboard for this interface Click the Fonts button to open a standard Fonts dialog box where you can specify display properties for the alarm text Click the Columns button to open the Columns dialog box where you can specify dis play properties for columns in the alarm control object see Columns on page 6 70 To filter alarm messages during runtime click the Filters button The Filters dialog box displays so you can specify filtering parameters for the alarm control object see Filters on page 6 71 Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced dialog box where you can specify advanced properties for the alarm control object see Advanced on page 6 72 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 69 Think amp Do Columns You access the Columns dialog box from the Alarm Event Control Object Properties di alog box when you click the Columns button Columns Available Visible Ack Required Activation Time Tag Message Properties Label 5 Width steal Key Align zl 1 Figure 6 76 The Alarm Event Control Columns dialog box The parameters available in this dialog box are The Available list contains all of the column types available for this object The Visi ble list contains all of the column types currently in use for the object Click the gt gt and lt lt buttons to move sel
393. operties dialog box 2 Tochangethe font font size or style click the Font button to display a standard font selection dialog box Set the text alignment by selecting the appropriate radio button Optionally select the Show Border check box to turn on a border for the note Enter the note text in the text entry field Click the OK button To edit a note 1 Double click the note to display the Note Properties dialog box 2 Modify the note and or note properties as desired 3 Click the OK button To delete a note select it and press the Delete key UL aee 2364 en B Communication 2364 ee block Button Flow Charts 5 2 5 Communication Block The Communication block allows a flow chart to communicate directly through a serial port on the Runtime with an external device Each instance of a block handles either a read write or control operation The example shown in Figure 2 5 reads from the serial port into a string named Drill Start The tagname COM 1 CNC Link is a Comm data item that is mapped to a particular serial port using lOView The device sends a single byte of data Communication Block Expression Properties Operation Read write COM control Comm data item co M_1_CNC_Link Data item String Byte array f String array Drill Start Number of bytes Fixedinteger Lata itern Termination Fixed number of b
394. option is disabled if the Show Header option from the Advanced dialog box is not checked Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the display of the columns Configuring Grid Advanced Parameters Configure advanced grid settings by clicking the Advanced button in the Grid Object Properties dialog box This displays the following dialog box Advanced User Enable Selecked values Number of Rows Row Number Condition Print Trigger Multiline Reload PDF Trigger PDF Filename Save Trigger Insert Trigger Inserted Values W Save data change Enable Slider Resize Conditional check bax Show Header Show gridlines Ext translation Disable to navigate Auto refresh after Concatenate Label For through cells insert trigger Picture Export Auto Format Class tag Trigger ca Figure 6 106 Grid Advanced dialog box This dialog box allows you to configure the advanced settings as follows User Enable if the value of this tag is TRUE different from 0 the user can select dif ferent rows of the object by clicking on them during the runtime This field can be con figured with a tag or with a numeric value Selected Values specifies the array tag used to write values from each column of the selected row to each position of the array Moreover you can modify the value of the cells currently selected in the Grid object by chan
395. or reaches the preset value the timer stops and the Timer Done status bit becomes true At Runtime the initial preset value for each timer originates in the Data Item grid definition for each timer in ms units The default preset is zero Flow charts can read write the preset value even while the timer is running Done The Timer Done status is a single bit value O FALSE 12 TRUE Timer Do ne becomes TRUE when the accumulator reaches the preset value staying TRUE un til the timer is reset Enabled The Timer Enabled status is a single bit value O FALSE 1 TRUE Tim er Enabled is TRUE only when the timer is running It becomes FALSE when the timer stops or reaches the preset value PHOENIX CONTACT 7 13 Think amp Do 7 14 PHOENIX CONTACT The following block diagram shows the four Timer data items Various blocks in a flow chart have access to the timer s value controls and outputs The timer s preset value initially comes from the setup in the Data Item grid at Runtime Timer TTT Tyr Data Items Data Dase Timer Preset Timer Actions Start Reset Figure 7 4 Timer data items are available to different blocks The diagram shows that flow chart Control blocks can perform the actions Start Reset and Stop on timers Do not confuse these actions with the four variables in the timer s structure Timer actions are described below Time
396. or the se lected data item You can also right click the data item and use a pop up menu to select these options In the Chart tab the value field for forced values is highlighted in red when a data item is not selected green if selected This serves as a visual reminder that the value is currently forced Force ON or Force OFF PHOENIX CONTACT 10 7 Think amp Do Writing Data Values Once Forcing lets you override Runtime logic indefinitely The Set Value Zero Value Turn ON and Turn OFF functions let you modify values until the project changes them Turn ON and Turn OFF operate on single bit data Set Value and Zero Value are for values that are one byte or larger For string values simply enter the new value Table 10 2 Forcing Data Value Options Set Value Sets the value of the selected data item to the value you enter can be byte wide or larger Zero Value Immediately sets the value of the selected data item to 0 all zeros or blank regardless of the data width Sets a bit wide data item to 1 Turn OFF Sets a bit wide data item to Turn ON and Turn OFF states are not highlighted in the Watch window If selecting Set Value AppTracker displays a dialog box to specify the desired value The default format is decimal To enter the number in hexadecimal type 0x before the number For example to specify 15 in hex format enter OxOF Regardless of how the value is entered it appears in the W
397. orts the data and shows the Cursor column value until the Max Buffer is filled When disabled unchecked the data are not sorted and the Cursor col umn value is not shown Data Source Settings when selected defines the settings for the Source Type The settings for each Source Type are shown in Table 6 10 Table 6 10 Data Source Type Database Text File 6 76 PHOENIX CONTACT Data Source Settings Source Actions Description Batch generated by the Trend task of Think amp Do SQL Relational Database Text file e g CSV file with data point values separated by a specific delimiter X Axis field Disabled The X Axis data will be retrieved automatically on the correct position from the proprietary Batch file generated by Think amp Do Field name that con tains the X axis data Number of the col umn that holds the X Axis data The num ber O refers to the first column 1 referstothe second column and SO On Data Source Settings Use the displayed dialog box to enter the data point values Batch Name for their re trieval You can configure a tag between curly brackets in this field to change this setting dy namically during the runtime Configure the settings to link this Data Source to the SQL Relational Database that holds the data point values See Think amp Do online help for more information on the Database Configuration dialog box Use the
398. p Figure 4 15 ScreenView Explorer Whenever you create a screen or worksheet ScreenView adds the new object to the tree Double clicking an entry in the ScreenView Explorer displays that object in the ScreenView workspace Right clicking an object in the tree not a folder displays a pop up menu with options to Rename Duplicate or Delete the selected object The Screens folder contains screens with finished graphic compilations and working drafts To view a screen expand the Screens folder and double click the desired screen to display it in the Workspace The Worksheets folder contains other worksheet objects that you can create in Screen View Among them are alarm see Alarm Worksheets on page 6 115 math see Math Worksheets on page 6 121 and trend see Trend Worksheets on page 6 127 work sheets 4 12 4 Object Properties Dialog Box The Object Properties dialog box is the interface that allows you to configure the settings for the objects and dynamics designed with ScreenView It can be launched by double clicking on the object or by selecting the object clicking once on it and pressing lt Shift gt lt F2 gt Object Properties Hint Button Caption Estem translation Wrap Text Auto gray out Fonts Align Fill Color Auto Format Figure 4 16 The Object Properties dialog box 4 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Gener
399. perates in Normal Mode Therefore it assume two states only as shown in Table 6 5 Table 6 5 Check Box Normal Mode States When the value of the tag configured in Feedback is equal to the value of the tag config ured in True Value in the Object Properties dialog box the state is set to TRUE Other wise the state is set to FALSE If the Feedback field is blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be used as the Feedback tag When the user clicks on the object the tag configured in the Tag field is updated according to Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Check Box Normal Mode Value Returns Current Value written to the tag configured in the Tag field when the user Status clicks on the object FALSE Value configured in the True Value field TRUE NOT Value configured in the True Value field When the value configured in True Value is a string the tag configured in the Tag field will be toggled between an empty string and the True Value If True Value is blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be toggled between UNSELECTED and an empty string 6 48 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 List Box Object Tool Operator Screen Techniques Tri State Mode When the Tri State option is checked the object operates in Tri State Mode Therefore it can assume three states as shown in Table 6 7 Table 6 7 check box Normal Mode States Shape Pu
400. perties dialog box to specify the following parameters for the ellipse Style specifies the object style by selecting Ellipse Arc Chord or Ring from the drop down list Next for Arc Chord or Ring select Left Bottom Left Top Hight Bottom or Right Top from the Style list to choose the quadrant into which the ellipse is drawn For example to represent a half circle pipe create two Ring objects Specify one as Left Bottom and the other as Right Bottom then join the two objects to create a half pipe Fill specifies whether the ellipse is filled click No Fill or Fill If you select the Fill option specify a fill color by clicking on the Color rectangle When the Color dialog box displays click on a color to select it and close the dialog box Line specifies a line style for the ellipse border by clicking the No Line Solid Line or Dashed Line button Color specifies the ellipse borderline color by clicking the Color button to open the Color dialog box Click the color to select it then close the dialog box Weight specifies a line width for the ellipse border by typing a number representing the line width in pixels into the text box provided Rounded Rectangle Object Click the Rounded Rectangle tool to draw rounded rectangles empty or filled as follows 1 2 Click in the drawing area and drag the mouse cursor to cre
401. pixels in relation to the current Screen Security specifies the security level for the screen Hide whe selected keeps the screen loaded in memory after calling it for the first time which facilitates faster loading when you open the screen Think amp Do exe cutes Screen Logics normally Enabling this feature default is disabled causes a high use of GDI resources con sequently we recommend that during development you monitor these resources using the InfoResources function Runtime Properties area specifies the following parameters to define the window properties when you are running in Run Application mode Titlebar specifies a name to display in the viewing screen s title bar during Run Application mode Click check to activate or uncheck to deactivate the title bar System Menu when selected enables the system menu Minimize Box when selected activates the Minimize button Maximize Box when selected activates the Maximize button Style selects a window style default is Replace Partial Overlapped opens a window without closing any other window Popup opens a window that remains in front of other windows but leaves other windows enabled gialog opens a window that remains in front of other windows but dis ables the other windows until you close the opened window Replace Complete opens a window and closes any other Replace and
402. plattorm requires only minor adjustment 1 1 About This Manual This manual focuses on developing and running control programs and Human Machine In terface HMI operator interface screens using Think amp Do Whats Inside In this manual you ll find the following chapters Section 1 Before You Begin this chapter provides an overview of Think amp Do and this manual Section 2 Creating a Project describes the steps required to create a project and start using Think amp Do It includes a brief introduction to the concept of Think amp Do Runtime tar gets and how to create input output and data items using lOView It also introduces flow charts and operator screens and how to create them using FlowView and ScreenView Section Drivers Devices and Tags provides details on how to configure I O using lOView Section 4 General Programming Techniques describes concepts for both flow charts and operator screens Section 5 Flow Charts provides details of flow chart programming Section 6 Operator Screen Techniques describes how to create operator screens These screens are called the human machine interface HMI Section 7 Math and Data Operations defines the available data types in Think amp Do and how to move data and use mathematical and relational expressions It also defines how to use SQL statements and the PID block Section 8 Communications provides details on how to use
403. ple records Get previous record UPDATE Modify data in DB t Refresh existing recordset Get next record DELETE Delete data from Close existing recordset Get last record C 3l Tables InProcess Flag ae Result Number Result String Advanced Cancel Validate Figure 7 14 SQL Block General tab SQL Request Type These radio buttons represent the top level SQL request types available The types and purposes are SELECT Get data from DB retrieves existing record s from the database or data source and writes the fields data to tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab When selected this radio button enables the SELECT radio buttons INSERT Put data DB adds new records to a database or data source using the fields and respective tag data as defined in the Tag Mappings tab UPDATE Update data in DB changes existing records in the database or data source with the data in the tags as defined in the Tag Mappings tab PHOENIX CONTACT 7 39 Think amp Do DELETE Delete data DB removes records from the database or data source and does not require tag mapping The Delete function removes records from the database Be sure to have a backup image of the data in the event of a programming error 7 40 PHOENIX CONTACT SELECT Type These radio buttons are available after choosing the SEL
404. programming technologies Because ScreenView is container you can configure and run NET Components in Think amp Do screens Components provide the following interfaces Properties are variables whose values can be read and or written for the application e g Object Color FileName URL and so forth Methods are functions from the Component that can be triggered by the applica tion e g open a dialog box execute a calculation and so forth Events are internal messages that can trigger the execution of expressions in the appli cation e g Mouse_Click Download_Completed and so forth The name of the properties methods and events supported by each Component de pends on its own implementation When using NET Components in your application make sure the target station runtime station can support the same components and they are properly installed and registered The Think amp Do application files include links to the NET Components however the in stallation of these components on the target station must be done separately Further more when NET Components are used on screens open in remote Web Thin Clients the To insert a NET Control Object follow these steps 1 Select a component from the NET Framework Components dialog box 2 Click the OK button to place it in your application screen NET Components must also be manually installed on the Web Thin Client stat
405. put or action by the user Highlight Color selects a background color for the selected row during the runtime Text Color selects a text color for the selected row during the runtime Win Color 1 selects a background color for the odd rows Win Color 2 selects a background color for the even rows Fonts launches the Fonts dialog box where you can configure the font settings for the text displayed in the Grid object Columns launches the Columns dialog box where you can configure the settings such as label column width etc for the columns of the Grid object see Configuring Grid Objects on page 6 97 for details Data launches the Data dialog box where you can specify a data source for the Grid object see Configuring Grid Objects on page 6 97 for details Advanced launches the Advanced dialog box where you can configure several set tings for the Grid object see Configuring Grid Objects on page 6 97 for details Combo Box Object Click the Combo tool to select a single label from a combo box list of labels If the list is longer that the space allotted ScreenView enables a scroll bar for the list During runtime if you select a label from the list the combo box hides itself and the selected label displays in the combo box Double click on the Combo Box object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Fonts InputEnabled Co
406. put range for the trigonometric functions cos sin tan is 1e 7 to 1e 7 radians Numbers outside this range will generate a Math Error SYS 39 and have unexpected results PHOENIX CONTACT 7 29 Think amp Do 7 30 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 8 Handling Analog Values Think amp Do has a powerful set of I O drivers that understand the difference between discrete individual points I O data representing numerical values The current set of drivers handle analog values up to 16 bits wide or 15 bits data plus a sign bit see Moving Analog Values on page 7 22 Some controllers impose tedious programming tasks such as han dling sign bits separately from values and time de multiplexing the values for 2 to 8 chan nels from a single data word Think amp Do takes the usual work out of handling analog data 7 8 1 Mapping analog data Analog values typically have 8 12 or 16 data bits Moving analog input values from the I O system to data items occurs automatically during each scan But you must properly config ure map analog channels in lOView Typically each analog channel is mapped to a Num ber data item While a number does have 32 bits analog input data transfers to the least sig nificant 16 bits of a number The 16th can optionally be a sign bit for bipolar inputs MSB LSB IS Optional sign bit Tl purs ie eque ues E MSB v The I O Mapping tab in includes a Sign Extend option
407. r Advanced Data Sources The Data Sources button on the Trend Control Object Properties dialog box launches the Data Sources dialog box Data Sources Data Source TrendData ata Source Text File E Delete X Axis Field OK Reload Cancel Buffer 1024 Load Progress Sort Data Source Settings Figure 6 82 The Trend Control Data Sources dialog box PHOENIX CONTACT 6 75 Think amp Do The data source defines the location of the values from the data point s associated with it Many points can share the same data source you do not need to create one data source for each data point The data source tag is available by default to the Trend Control object You can add addi tional data sources with the New button The name you enter will be used as an alias to link the data points to this new data source The other fields in this dialog box allow you to edit the data source settings Source specifies the source type of the location of the data point values X Axis field specifies the name of the field column from the data source that holds the X axis data Buffer specifies the maximum amount of data in bytes that will be held in run time memory Load Progress specifies the tag to receive a real value 0 100 that represents the per centage of the Data Source load progress when selected s
408. r H2 EEBC Baze 1 Figure 3 9 The on screen images in lOView reflect input and output states Turn on outputs by clicking the LED on the graphic available in several I O drivers A warn ing message appears before the actual I O update Set analog values by clicking on the graphic of the module and channel IOView displays a dialog box to input the desired value for the output channel PHOENIX CONTACT 3 13 Think amp Do 3 14 PHOENIX CONTACT Disconnect Button 3 Saving the I O Configuration After configuring and checking the status of I O it s a good idea to save the I O configuration for the project save a newly scanned configuration 1 Disconnect the I O by selecting the Configuration Disconnect menu or clicking the Disconnect button This automatically makes I O scan inactive 2 The Save dialog box appears Click the Yes button to save the configuration with the project Each project can have only one I O configuration associated with it Edit an I O configuration by using the Devices menu selections Click the Save menu button after any I O config uration edits 3 8 Tips on Toolbar Functions The toolbar in lOView includes special purpose buttons for convenience buttons Connect Disconnect or Scan access the directly from the toolbar Think amp Do lOView Sortation Example tic Configuration View Drivers Devices To
409. r Actions Start A Timer Start causes the timer s accumulator to begin timing It also turns ON the Timer Enabled status bit Reset A Timer Reset sets the timer s accumulator to ms and turns the Timer Done bit OFF It also turns OFF the Timer Enabled status bit After a timer expires you must reset it before you can start it again Stop A Timer Stop causes the accumulator to hold its current value The Timer En abled bit turns OFF but the Timer Done bit remains OFF Using Timers Ways in which project components can interact with a timer include Control block can start stop or reset a timer Decision block can use the Timer Enabled status bit or the Timer Done status bit in a Boolean expression Compare block can compare the Timer Accumulator or Preset with another value Mowe Block can move a value to overwrite the Timer Accumulator value timing continues if the timer was enabled It can move the value from the Timer Accumulator to read the value status bit is read only Writes to it are ignored Move block can move a value to the Timer Enabled bit This overrides the current status of the timer s Start Stop and Reset action controls A screen object configured for data input can write to the same timer variables as a move block with the same response from the timer screen object co
410. r a Boolean tag The value of this tag will determine which message will displayed by the object during the runtime Write Tag optional and available for Multistate Pushbutton only specifies the name of an integer or a Boolean tag The value associated with the message currently dis played by the object is written to this tag Align selects the alignment of the text displayed by the Smart Message object Key optional and available for Multistate Pushbutton only defines a shortcut used to go to the next message step using a keyboard when the Multistate Pushbutton type is selected This option is especially useful when creating applications for runtime devices that do not provide a mouse or touch screen interface when the keyboard is the only physical interface available to interact with the application during the runtime Event available for Multistate Pushbutton only selects the option to use to change the message e Down switches to the next message when you click on the object default e While Down switches to the next message continuously while you hold the mouse button down on the object PHOENIX CONTACT 6 53 Think amp Do 6 54 PHOENIX CONTACT e On Up switches to the next message when you release the mouse button on the object 5 available for Multistate Pushbutton only when selected the user will be prompted to enter the Electronic Signature before executing
411. rName gt When checked the alarm messages are stored in the history log when they be come active When checked the alarm messages are stored in the history log when they are ac knowledged When checked the alarm messages are stored in the history log when they be come normalized When checked the alarms configured in this group will be displayed with the col ors assigned to each alarm state Activa tion Acknowledgement or Normaliza tion according to the colors configured in the Alarm Group You can configure the text foreground color FG and background color BG for the alarms displayed on the Alarms Events Control object see Alarm Event Control Object on page 6 34 Each alarm state can be dis played with a different color schema Activation specifies that the alarm is active and not acknowledged Acknowledgement specifies that the alarm is active and acknowledged Normalization specifies that the alarm is no longer active and not acknowledged Checkbox Checkbox Checkbox Checkbox Color Color 2364 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Body Settings The body settings are at the lower portion of the Alarm worksheet see Figure 6 126 Tag Mame Message Priority Selection Figure 6 126 Alarm body Table 6 22 describes the body settings on an Alarm worksheet Table 6 22 Alarm Worksheet
412. ransition based as in other types of controllers Ways in which project components can interact with a number include AControl block can increment decrement or clear a number Compare block can compare the numbers current value with another variable or constant block can replace the current value with a new value or read the current value Calculation block can use a number as an operand or result in an expression J OView can use a number data item to map analog I O values for more details on ana log I O see Handling Analog Values on page 7 30 7 6 Using the Move Block The purpose of the Move block in a flow chart is to write data from one variable to another Mathematically a move data operation is the same as an assignment statement MOVE from Data Item A to Data Item B or LetB A It is important to see the move as an assignment operation or copy because the move is non destructive That is moving data from A to B does not clear A A still has its original value but B has a new value equivalent to A For readers who are more accustomed to using Load and Out instructions in accumulator based controllers think of the Move block as the Load Out combination 7 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Math and Data Operations 7 6 1 The Move Expression The Move block is a specialized control block in flow chart design because it does a specific kind of action Double click t
413. re Size Location Security Enable Background BMP width 1279 Top 0 Height 997 Lett 2d 0 Hide Runtime Properties Screen Logic Style Replace Partial Border None Don t redraw Focus Heceive focus on open Share tab order with other screens Tab Order Cancel Figure 2 11 Screen Attributes dialog box 2 Enter a description for the screen and make any other required changes 3 Click OK to create the screen For more information on how to use ScreenView see General Programming Techniques on page 4 3 For more information on HMI screen development see Operator Screen Techniques on page 6 3 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 13 Think amp Do 2 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Drivers Devices and Tags 2364 Section 3 This section informs you about 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Specifying inputs outputs and data items Configuring I O Adding drivers and devices Mapping I O Scanning and monitoring I O saving the I O configuration Using a watchdog timout ees 3 3 Specifying Inputs Outputs and Data 3 3 3 1 1 Configuring External 1 enne 3 3 mm P 3 5 Adding an VO qoem 3 7 VO DEVICES 3 8 3 4 1 Manually Adding an
414. re inactive Other fea tures those for debugging are active Locals Window a special Flow Chart Watch window for viewing data item values in blocks Easylrac provides visual assistance and execution logging 8 To access the Locals Window while in Monitor Mode select the Window Locals menu The term locals in the context of a flow chart refers to variables data items that are within scope or are local to a flow chart block Select any block in a flow chart by clicking it The Locals Window lists the state or value of all the tagnames associated with that block To monitor values in more than one block select multiple blocks hold the lt Ctrl gt key down and click the blocks Locals 10 21 EasyTrac helps to debug by providing some visual assistance and execution logging In FlowView select the Debug EasyTrac Active menu Color Codes The EasyTrac feature color codes flow chart blocks The default colors are Green Always executed on every scan Yellow sometimes executed Gray never executed Change the colors by selecting the File Preferences menu Then click the Block Colors tab and scroll down to view the EasyTrac options Figure 10 9 Preferences E dit Do Loop Block Fill Color Freeze Block Fill Color Edit Enable Begin Block Background Edit Move Block Background Edit PID Black Fill Calor Edit Wait Bla
415. reenView provides a full featured HMI or operator interface design package which helps to create screens that really communicate Operator input support includes function keys and data entry 4 12 1 X Screens as Part of a Project The screen s developed using ScreenView become part of a project Then at Runtime the screens appear in an independent window on the desktop Only one screen is visible in the window at a time You can re size or minimize screens just as any window You can also run in full screen mode where screen size adjustment isn t available to the operator Data entry or function key entry requires that the screen be in the active window When a project runs its flow charts not operator screens are the highest priority task During the Pause phase of each scan period see Building and Running Projects on page 9 3 the system executes screen tasks and other applications Adding screens af fects system loading so be sure that the scan time setting is large enough to allow the system to service your operator screen s 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 4 19 Think amp Do 4 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 12 2 Creating Operator Screens To create a new screen in the project follow these steps 1 In ProjectCenter select the File New Screen menu to display ScreenView and the Screen Attributes dialog box see Figure 4 13 Screen Attributes Descriptions Background Picture Size Location Security En
416. res saving The procedures implemented in this interface are only executed by Think amp Do when they are called from another VBScript in one of the other script groups Graphics Startup or one of the Background scripts For an example see the Scripts Global Procedure topic in the Think amp Do help 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 6 7 3 Graphics Scripts To create or edit graphic scripts double click the Graphics icon in the Scripts Applica tion folder This opens the script in a tab in the ScreenView workspace see Figure 6 135 Graphics variables with local scope can be declared and initialized here Procedures with local scope can be implemented here This procedure is executed just ance when the graphic module is started sub Graphics OnsStart End Sub This procedure is executed continuously while the graphic module is running Sub Graphics WWhileRunningr End Sub This procedure is executed just once when the graphic module is closed sub Graphics OnEndr End Sub Figure 6 135 Graphics script page An asterisk following the tab name indicates that the page has changed and requires saving Use graphics scripts based on pre configured subroutines Graphics OnStart The code configured within this subroutine automatically executes just once when the graphic module starts This interface is useful for initializing vari ables or executing logic that must be
417. riggered by the NET Component When you click the Browse button it will display a dialog box with the complete script associated with the event The main dialog box displays only the expression configured in the first line of the script 6 96 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques 6 3 19 Configuring Grid Objects After inserting Grid object see Grid Object on page 6 39 double click the Grid object to open the Object Properties dialog box Object Properties Replace Hint Grid Data Source Fonts Data Highlight Color h Columns Advanced Text Color Security Disable win Color 1 L a pO Wn Color z Figure 6 100 Object Properties Grid Selecta Data Source from the drop down list click the Data button to configure the data used in the grid Data Source Text File Clicking the Data button with Text File as the Data Source displays the Grid Data Text File dialog box shown below Grid Data Text File Delimiters Tab Space Semicolon Comma Other Read only Figure 6 101 The Grid Data Text File dialog box The parameters in this dialog box are File specifies the name of the text file source You can either type the file name and its path or click the browse button to browse for it If the file is stored in the application folder yo
418. rmally draw an application screen using any combination of static and active objects For example three check boxes in a rectan gular pane would look like Figure 6 1 12 Check Check ptiom Figure 6 112 Creating a Master Symbol 2 Select the object s or group that you want to save as a symbol It is not necessary to make a group out of two or more objects before saving them as a symbol Saving the objects together as a symbol effectively groups them as well 3 Right click on the selected object s and choose Create Linked Symbol from the con text menu 2364 6 107 Think amp Do 6 108 PHOENIX CONTACT ScreenView displays a standard Save dialog box Use the dialog box to select a folder and give the new symbol a file name Symbol files sym are saved in the HMI Symbol directory of your project drive Program Files PhoenixContact ThinkNDo Projects project name Click the Save button to save the file The symbol appears in the Symbol Library under Application Symbols The symbol is ready to be reused in your project Every copy will have identical properties You must now define custom properties for the Master Symbol that is the properties you want to be able to customize each time you reuse the Master Symbol Editing Master Symbols Edit a Master Symbol to add or delete objects in the symbol or to define custom propertie
419. runtime Key lets you select a key from the list to associate that keyboard key with the object or group of objects You can then press this key to check uncheck the radio button e Click check the Shift Ctrl or Alt box to create a combination key meaning the Shift lt Ctrl gt or Alt key must be pressed with the key specified in the drop down list e Click the Browse button to open the Key Modifier dialog box that lets you modify your combination keys You can choose Left Right or Left or Right to specify the position on the keyboard of the Shift Ctrl or lt Alt gt key the com bination key If you choose Left or Right the command will be executed any time either of these keys is pressed in combination with the key specified in the drop down list Disable specifies a tag or expression to enable and disable the object You disable the radio button object when you enter a value different from O Security specifies a value to define a security level for the object as defined under Se curity When a user logs on and does not have the specified security level Think amp Do disables the object Tag specifies a tag to update when the user clicks on the radio button during the run time If no Feedback was specified the value of this tag is also used to indicate the current status of the object True Value specifies a value that will be used to change the contr
420. s Work with retentive data Check for Runtime errors For a complete listing of System data items Appendix A 1 System Data Items 7 4 1 Date and Time Although not a listed System data type the real time clock in the Runtime target is accessi ble to projects The names Year Month and Day are reserved names for the real time values that you can access in the following ways Flow chart Move block expression Flow chart Calculation block expression To use the Runtime target s date in a Move block follow these steps 1 Create three consecutive Number type data items named CurrentYear CurrentMonth and CurrentDay example tagnames 2 Create three more consecutive Number type data items named CurrentHour CurrentMinute and CurrentSecond 3 FlowView use the File menu to access a new or existing flow chart 4 Place a Move block onto the drawing area see Adding Flow Chart Blocks to a Flow Chart on page 4 9 5 Double click the Move block to access the Move Block Expression tab 6 Inthe Move Block Expression tab select the Current Date data type in the From field PHOENIX CONTACT 7 11 Think amp Do 7 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 Inthe group s Data type field select Number In the Starting data item field enter CurrentYear In the Ending data item field enter CurrentDay 8 Repeat the above steps for a second Move Block
421. s Any modifications you make to the Master Symbol automatically propagate to every linked copy in every application project To edit a Master Symbol 1 Right click an instance of the Master Symbol that is placed on a screen and then select the Edit Linked Symbol context menu The symbol file opens for editing in its own tab in the ScreenView workspace see Figure 6 113 Use the Symbol Editor as you would for any screen except that every object in the window is part of the Master Symbol If you add move or delete objects in the Symbol Editor then you may change the size or shape of the symbol and disrupt the layout of any screens where it is used CheckBoxes Symbol Figure 6 113 Symbol in Symbol Editor In addition to adding moving or deleting objects in the symbol you can also edit the Ob ject Properties as you normally would You may want some properties to be the same in every instance of the Symbol but other properties need to be customized according to where and how the symbol is used In this example you probably want to customize the captions of the three check boxes and the tags that the check boxes enable disable as well as the caption of the pane itself Select the first object in the Master Symbol and open its Object Properties dialog box For example Figure 6 114 shows the first check box Object Properties dialog box Object Properties da Replace Hint Check Caption Check
422. s inserted into the database or data source For an UPDATE request it holds the number of records updated by the request For a DELETE request it holds the number of records deleted from the database or data Source To select a tag double click the box to receive the tag or single click the button with ellipses to the right of the edit box Each of these actions opens a dialog box from which to choose the appropriate type of tag for this item Manual entry in not allowed in this cell Note that a value of zero is a perfectly valid result code A Close request returns 0 if the recordset is open it returns an error if already closed Requests that are valid but whose filter conditions do not return or affect any records return This Number should be checked after each InProcess flag check It is also prudent but not necessary to use a different Result Number tag for each SQL block Result String This required item must be mapped to a tag Data Type String which receives one of two types of values For successful requests the tag receives Request complete after all mapped tags have been written For unsuccessful requests this tag holds a descriptive string indicating the cause of the failed request To select a tag double click the box to receive the tag or single click the button with ellipses to the right of the edit box Each of these actions opens a dialog box from which to choose the appropriate type of tag for this i
423. s on the same screen with the same name For in stance if you insert two Windows Media Player ActiveX controls on the same screen and assign the name 1 to one object Name field you cannot assign the same name to the second object on the same screen You would have to assign the name MyMP2 for example to the second object The Property Pages button opens the standard dialog box for configuring the Static Prop erties if any The layout and the options in this dialog box depend on the implementation of each ActiveX control Use this interface to set properties that should not be changed dur ing the runtime fixed properties The Configuration button on the Object Properties dialog box opens dialog boxes that allow you to do the following A Associate tags to properties of the ActiveX object Trigger methods from the ActiveX object based on tag change Configure scripts which are executed when Events from the ActiveX object occur See Configuring ActiveX Control Objects on page 6 89 for information on how to configure these interfaces 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 6 37 Think amp Do HET NET Control Tool 6 38 PHOENIX CONTACT NET Control Object Click the NET Control Object tool on the Active Objects toolbar to open the NET Frame work Components dialog box which you can use to place NET Components on your screen When the dialog box opens as in the following figure it con
424. s the Config uration Properties tab shown below Configuration Properties Methods Events Property Tag Expression Action Lar BackColor Gett Set Lar Day Gett Set Lar DayFont Gett Set DayFont Bold m Get Set Lar DayFont Charset Gett Set F DayFont Italic Get Set DayFont Mame Gett Set DayFont 5Size Gett Set r DayFont Strikethrough Get Set Show hidden properties Figure 6 93 ActiveX Control Configuration Properties tab Although the Configuration dialog box displays the list of all properties methods and events you only have to configure the items that you need for your project The screen shots used in the following sections depict the Windows Media Player ActiveX control Although the name of the properties methods and events varies depending on each ActiveX control the configuration interface is the same for any ActiveX control The concepts described here apply to all of them 2364 6 89 Think amp Do 6 90 PHOENIX CONTACT The columns in this tab are Property lists all properties available from the ActiveX object and indicate their types with an icon see Table 6 14 Table 6 14 ActiveX Poperty Icons Property Property Icon Type Integer _ Tag Expression specifies the tag associated with the respective property of the Ac tiveX object The Act
425. screens I O configuration etc PHOENIX CONTACT 1 7 Think amp Do 1 8 PHOENIX CONTACT Think amp Do consists of interrelated development tools ProjectCenter is the top level project management tool and includes a spreadsheet like tool for creating a tagname database FlowView is a development environment for designing flow charts ScreenView provides the environment to create HMI screens and lOView is a tool for creating the I O configura tion for the project You can switch seamlessly from one tool to another during project de velopment During development you open a project and have access to all its components through each tool Programmers may be used to thinking of software development in these steps Write program code Compile the code into an executable object Run the executable Test the program and debug until complete Commission the machine wait for a machine problem or obsolescence start at Step 1 ig Oe oe Think amp Do equivalent activities have these steps Use FlowView to create or edit project flow charts Use ScreenView to create or edit HMI screens Build the project into appropriate Runtime components Run the project Test the project using App Tracker and EasyTrac to debug until complete Commission the machine lee JO A a The word Runtime refers to the system s execution of the project created it runs the project at Runtime When project development is completed use Runti
426. sh Like Check TRUE Check Check TRI STATE 7 Check When the value of the tag configured in Feedback is equal to the value of the tag config ured in True Value the state is setto TRUE When the value of the tag configured in Feed back is equal to the value of the tag configured in Tri State the state is set to TRI STATE When none of these conditions are satisfied the state is set to FALSE If the Feedback field is left in blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be used as the Feedback tag The Tri State field must neither be configured with the same value as the True Value field nor with an empty string value Table 6 8 Check Box Tri State Value Returns Value written to the tag configured in the Tag field when the Current Status user clicks on the object FALSE Value configured in the True Value field TRUE Value configured in the Tri State field TRI STATE Value configured in the True Value field If NOT Value configured in the True Value Field is equal to Tri State the value as signed to the tag configured in the Tag field will be the minimum signed integer value dif ferent from True Value When True Value is a string NOT Value configured in the True Value field will result in an empty string If True Value is an empty string NOT Value configured in the True Value field will result in UNSELECTED List Box
427. signing simulation flow chart s remember to simulate the machine or process for the benefit of the real mode flow charts which will also be running at Runtime The better the simulation the more confident you can be in the design of the real mode flow charts When finished with the simulation flow chart design save it and return to ProjectCenter The Flow Chart Explorer lists the flow chart in the simulation folder You should move any simulation flow charts to execute last in the project Just click and drag the flow charts to the proper list position This order ensures real mode flow charts and simulation charts take turns generating logical outputs without interference 10 4 2 Disabling Simulation for Real I O In the Project Explorer of ProjectCenter click the Real I O radio button in the Build Mode group box see Figure 10 11 on page 10 14 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 10 15 Think amp Do 10 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en A Appendix 2364 1 System Data Items The table in this appendix describes System Data Items that are applicable to Windows based PCs While they also apply to the Think amp Do WinPLC Embedded CE device not all of them apply to all Windows CE based target devices Indicates an error message For information on interpreting errors see Notes on Reading Error Data on page A 5 SYS 0 0 Read only The last runtime scan interval This time is onl
428. ssages will be read the source file See Source File Format for fur ther details about the format of the text file supported by the Smart Message object when the Data Source is Text File e Extern translation enables translation of the message when a translation file is specified via scripting e The following table describes the meaning of the properties associated with each message regardless of the Data Source Text Message defines the message text that will be displayed when selected during the runtime You can concatenate tag values to the message in this field by configuring the tag between curly brackets For example The level value is TagLevel Value specifies a unique value for each message During the runtime the object will display the message associated with the value that matches the value of the tag configured in the Read Tag field If there is no such message the message configured in the first row State is displays during the runtime When the object Type is set as Multistate Pushbutton the value associated with the current message is also written to the tag configured in the Write Tag field if any 2364 en B 2364 a Operator Screen Techniques Text FG is the foreground color for the messages displayed during the run time Text BG is the background color for the messages displayed during the runtime Text Bli
429. t ProjectCenter contains the tools for viewing all parts of the project including the Data Item Explorer To explore or create data items 1 Usethe Project Explorer bars in the left pane of ProjectCenter 2 Click the Data Items Explorer bar The Data Items grid appears in the main docu ment window The Data Items grid displays a list of one data type at a time To selecting a data type to explore 1 Inthe Project Explorer pane click the Data Items Explorer bar 2 Under Data Types click the folder that corresponds to the data type desired If nec essary use the scroll bar to view the entire list of data types With the exception of System data items a new project has blank grids for each data type until you define tags for that data type Figure 7 1 shows the main features of the Data Items grid Each data type appears in the Data Item grid as individual spreadsheets with their own unique lists of data items Each project uses its own subset of data types according to its needs Index Tagname Initial Retentive Description Mapped to c1 iteAccumulationCounter 0 GreenAccumulationCounter 0 RedAccumulationCounter 0 YellowAccumulationCounter 0 WhiteDiverterPosition T GreenDiverterPosition 12 RedDiverterPosition 18 WhitePackagelD 1 11 GreenPackagelD 2 C12 RedPackagell 3 c 23 YellowPackagelD 4 Mapped To I O mappin
430. t it requires and saved it before it appears in this list box The list includes all existing subcharts in a project and pre defined External Modules Standard flow charts in the Unused category do not appear in the list External Modules The External Modules branch includes the following entries AutomationDirect com Ethernet I O includes custom commands for the module Cognex includes the Cognex vision system functions Interbus Special Functions includes the PCP functions Modbus Master includes custom commands for supporting Modbus Master I O Utilities includes array string timer and inverse trigonometric functions For detailed descriptions of these external functions see the online Help Parameter Mapping When you select the subchart name the Mapping group lists all subchart parameters All you need to is use the Mapped field to map equate data items of the calling flow chart to those of the subchart The tagnames you place in the Mapped To field are gener ally different from the subchart parameter names but a difference is not required Call By This field shows whether the parameter is call by reference or call by value If call by value there are two options with as the default Pass a constant value enter the value Click the Tag button to enter a value This tog gles the button title to Val
431. t step block function steps to the next standard flow chart block To step into a subchart use the Debug Step In menu Step In To step through a flow chart normally like Step Block and follow a Call block into a sub chart one block at a time use the Step In menu If that subchart calls another subchart the Step In feature follows the call down to another level When it encounters a Return block it automatically steps out of the subchart back to the calling flow chart Step Out To immediately execute all remaining blocks in a subchart and returns to the calling flow chart use the Step Out menu If the calling flow chart is also a subchart a subsequent Step Out completes execution of the current subchart and goes up another level If in a standard 2364 en B 2364 71 Step Block Debugging Projects flow chart Step Out works like the Step Block Step out in a standard flow chart executes all logic remaining in the standard chart until a loopback or Wait block occurs Then it stops at the first block executed in the next standard flow chart Step To To execute a one time breakpoint setting select the Debug Step To menu When the program is halted select the block to stop execution Then the Step to Block function exe cutes all flow chart blocks up to the selected block A block must be selected before each use of the Step to Block toolbar button 10 3 Edit Mode Whe
432. t the Array folder to display the project s array definition grid 2 Inthe field type the array s tagname Enter a description 4 Inthe Array Type drop down list select the data type of the elements of the array for example Number 5 Inthe Index column the first array has a default index 0 Arr 0 Optionally you can change the index to another value 6 Inthe Size column enter the number of elements Think amp Do automatically adds square brackets around the size when exiting the field For string arrays enter a size number of elements followed by the size of each element The default element size of 255 appears if only a single size value is entered To specify the size of the string ele ments enter the size of the array in square brackets followed by the length of the string elements also in square brackets for example 5 20 creates an array of five string elements each 20 characters long ga 2364_en_B PHOENIX CONTACT 7 9 Think amp Do 7 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 Inthe Initial column enter an initial value for all elements or use the down arrow to enter a unique value for each element Figure 7 3 For more information on initializing arrays see Initializing Arrays below Index Initial Value Humber Figure 7 3 The drop down arrow displays a table with initial values 8 Use the Retentive check box to define a retentive value Initial and Retentive Va
433. ta Source type associated with the data point e Tag specifies the name of the tag with values to display If the tag is configured in the Trend task the history data is automatically retrieved otherwise only the online values are displayed e Batch specifies the name of the tag with values to be retrieved from the Batch His tory file generated by the Trend task and displayed on the object e Database specifies the name of the field column in the SQL Relational Data base that holds the data point values e Text File specifies the number of the column that holds the data point values The number refers to the first column 1 refers to the second column and so on Min is the minimum value displayed in the Y scale for the data point is the maximum value displayed in the Y scale for the data point Style configures the style for the pen color type state etc See Pen Style dialog box for more information PHOENIX CONTACT 6 77 Think amp Do 6 78 PHOENIX CONTACT Options configures optional settings for each data point You can use the dialog box to configure these settings or type their values directly in the Options field using the comma character as the delimiter See Options dialog box for more information about these settings Hide when the tag specified has the value 0 the pen associated with the point is dis played
434. ta items to external I O devices The space character is not valid for tagnames This ensures that tagnames comply with common standards to transfer data items across networks and between different applications 3 1 1 Configuring External I O Think amp Do has many available software drivers that provide the connection between the PC and I O network or scanner cards Each card has a corresponding driver An I O network or scanner card may have one or more nodes For example the Momentum Ethernet and De viceNet cards support multiple nodes each with a single module A module is either an base rack or a field device Some network cards may have nodes that support multiple modules For example Seriplex and INTERBUS cards have a single node that supports multiple modules Finally there are scanner cards that support multiple nodes with multiple modules on each node such as Automationdirect com Ethernet and Opto 22 Optomux 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 3 3 Think amp Do Adding Data Items To add new data items 1 In ProjectCenter click the Data Items Explorer bar The Data Types folder tree ap pears in the Data Items Explorer bar Figure 3 1 5 des Data Items Data Types Array Axis Bute Comm Counter Flag Float Number 2 Output Register String _ System _ Timer Data Logging a Project Docs Figure 3 1 ProjectCenter Data Items 2 Click the data t
435. tains a list of all NET Components registered on your computer HET Framework Components Figure 6 42 Pe Binding avigator Button CheckB Checked istBox Combobox 5 ContainerControl Contexth enuStrip DataGridview 5 DataGridyiewCombob 5 DataGridyiewT extBoxE Tf DateTimePicker Dl iere 4 System Window Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms System Windows Forms Fic sein Mens System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme System Windows Forme Browse Cancel Directory Global amp ssembl Global Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global Assembl Global 4ssembl Global Assan MEN The Framework Components dialog box Components are designed according to the Microsoft Framework which is a standard for modular
436. te the data such as the FileWrite function or the Recipe or Report tasks to save the data in text files e g CSV files 6 3 20 Using and Creating Symbols A symbol is an object or group of objects that is saved to the ScreenView Symbol folder so that you can reuse it again and again in your project Every time you reuse a symbol you actually make a copy that is linked to the Master Symbol file in the Symbol folder These linked copies are also called instances of the symbol Thereafter if you make any changes to the Master Symbol then those changes automati cally propagate to every linked copy in every project You can customize each linked copy of the Master Symbol by defining custom properties For example when you create a gauge that displays tank levels and then save that gauge as a Master Symbol you can define custom properties on the symbol that will allow each linked copy to display the level of a different tank 6 104 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Symbols Toolbar Button Operator Screen Techniques To display available symbols click the Symbols button at the left side of the bottom toolbar This displays the Symbol Library a dual pane panel that appears in the ScreenView work space Figure 6 107 shows the Symbol Library with the two top level folders Application Symbols provides a listing of symbol folders with symbols used in the cur rent applciation System Symbo
437. tem Enable Focus when selected the object can receive the focus during the runtime by the navigation keys Push Like when selected the control is displayed as a button instead of the standard radio button standard shape Fill Color specifies the fill color for the button This option is enabled only when the Push Like option is checked 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques There are two main modes of operation for this object Normal Mode and Tri State Mode These modes are described below Normal Mode When the Tri State option is unchecked the object operates in Normal Mode Therefore it can assume two states only as shown in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Radio Button Normal Mode States Shape Push Like C Radio Radio When the value of the tag configured in Feedback is equal to the value of the tag config ured in True Value in the Object Properties dialog box the state is set to TRUE Other wise the state is set to FALSE If the Feedback field is blank the tag configured in the Tag field will be used as the Feedback tag When the user clicks on the object the tag configured in the Tag field is updated with the value configured in the True Value field Tri State Mode When the Tri State option is checked the object operates in Tri State Mode Therefore it can assume three states as shown in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Radio Button Normal Mode States Shape
438. tem Manual entry in not allowed in this cell This String need not be checked after each SQL block as it is intended to provide diagnos tic information as opposed to error information However it is still a prudent choice though not necessary to use a different Result String tag for each SQL block Other items on the General tab that are not in logical groups are Advanced Select the Advanced check box to display a database s or data source s schema schema is a logical collection of a database s or data source s objects which includes bles and views or queries Not all OLE database providers support or provide this informa tion Microsoft Access for instance does not If this item is checked and the provider sup ports it the schema objects appear in the Schema list PHOENIX CONTACT 7 41 Think amp Do 7 42 Schema List The Schema list is exposed by the Advanced check box item once the database or data source is connected to via the Connect button If the Advanced button is not checked this list is not shown If it is checked and the Provider does not support schemas this list is empty A check mark in the box next to a schema object adds the selected schema s tables and views to the Tables list Tables List This list is filled with tables and views or queries once the database or data source has been connected via the Connect button If the database
439. tems have initial values equal to their previous value before shutdown To configure an initial value 1 Clickthe cell in the Initial column for the desired data item to have a non zero starting value at Runtime To initialize individual array items click the drop down arrow in the Initial column This specifies an initial value for each element of the array For more information on initializing array elements see Initializing Arrays on page 7 10 2 Enterthe initial value in the cell Make sure the data matches the data type For exam ple a Number type cannot have a starting value of 12 57 while a Float type can To configure a retentive data item 1 Select the check box in the Retentive column for the appropriate data item rows Only data items that can be retentive have the Retentive column present in the Data Item grid When making timer retentive only the accumulator and preset are retentive 2 Click the check box again to deselect the retentive setting toggles between reten tive non retentive 7 1 1 1 Inputs It s very important to think about I O in the context of retentive memory Since the state of inputs originates externally the Data Item grid does not present a retentive option for inputs At Runtime the first read of inputs establishes their state This occurs before the first logic solve of the flow charts PHOENIX CONTACT 7 5 Think amp Do 7 1 1 2 Outputs Outputs can be retentiv
440. ternates between 0 and 1 each scan It is useful to perform a task every other scan 2364 en B 2364 Math and Data Operations 7 4 4 Timer Data Items Think amp Do provides up to 65535 timers for use in the project Timers have their own Timer data type with a timing range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 Each timer is actually a collection of related variables organized in a structure that is accessible in various project tools Timer variables include the Accumulator timer value Preset Value Timer Done status bit and Timer Enabled status bit Timer Structures The timer tagname always includes a suffix that specifies a particular timer variable The timer structure syntax is lt Timer tagname gt lt Timer field gt For example a tank mixing flow chart may use mixing timer with the tagname MixTimer The timer s preset value is spec ified with the following syntax MixTimer Preset The timer structures include TimerTagname Accumulator TimerTagname Preset lt gt TimerTagname Enabled The main characteristics of programmable timer variables are Accumulator The Timer Accumulator value has a range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 with a 1 ms resolution each count 1 ms The timing range encompasses approximately 49 7 days Preset Value Timer Preset is a user defined value that the timer compares with its ac cumulator When the accumulat
441. tes dialog 6 112 Insert Screen Group dialog 6 114 Alarm worksheet 6 116 SNC AGING 6 117 c 6 119 Alarm worksheet Advanced settings dialog box 6 120 To qe REUS 6 122 Recipe WOIKSIIGOL Rear etas 6 123 Report worksheet ebat Eo eg ya 6 125 Scheduler 6 126 Trend id aman alae 6 128 Trend Worksheet es e 6 130 Global Procedure script page 6 132 gt 6 133 2364 Section 7 Section 8 2364 Figure 6 136 Figure 6 137 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12
442. that receives the length source is the string data item or expression to be measured 7 36 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Math and Data Operations 7 9 4 Comparing and Sorting Strings The Compare Block is very useful for comparing and sorting strings To compare two string data items 1 Place a Compare block in the flow chart 2 Edit the compare expression in the Compare Block Expression tab specifying the string data items to compare One of the strings can be a string constant 3 Select the comparison type you want to make from the options Equal to gt Greater than lt Less than or Instr is contained in A typical use for string compares is for alphanumeric sorting Consider using two arrays for string sorting one for the original list and one for the sort ed list Set up a flow chart with a Do Loop Inside the Do Loop increment numbers that serve to index the arrays The Instr function returns TRUE if the first string occurs anywhere in the second string Using the Instr function can save a lot of programming time You can avoid using the Mid function and a Do Loop searching flow chart if it does not matter where in the string the substring occurs All string comparison operations may be case sensitive If you select the Case Sensitive check box the comparison can only be true if the upper lower case of each pair of charac ters match 7 10 SQL Database Operations The SQL bl
443. the Save trigger command is executed After the screen where the Trend object is configured is saved the settings are not auto matically loaded from the temporary file when the screen is opened again unless the Load trigger command is executed before the screen is closed Custom Point Selection lets you create a custom dialog box to modify or insert pens to the object as follows e Screen specifies the name of the screen which must be launched when the user triggers a command to modify or insert a new pen to the object during the runtime e Point Number specifies the point number from the Points dialog box indicat ing the point associated with the pen that will be inserted or modified during runtime Add Indicator indicates that the user triggered an action to insert a new pen value 1 in stead of modifying a pen that is already been visualized value 0 specifies the Virtual Keyboard type used for this object Ext Translation enables translation of the text when a translation file is specified via scripting 6 86 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Operator Screen Techniques 6 3 16 Trend Control Runtime Interface When enabled some embedded interfaces can help the user to interact with the Trend Con trol during the runtime This section describes these interfaces Toolbar specifies commands available in the embedded Toolbar Available com mands are described in Table 6 12 T
444. the dynamic Security available for Multistate Pushbutton only defines System Access Level re quired for the object dynamic line when selected the line border of the object is not visible Line Weight defines the thickness of the line drawn around the object the border Fonts launches the Fonts dialog box where you can configure the font settings for the text displayed in the object Config launches the Configuration dialog box where you can configure the mes sages for the object Configuration Data Source Static Value Text Blink gt Im V gt Estem translation I Auto Format Cancel 0 1 2 3 4 Figure 6 55 The smart message Configuration dialog box e Data Source defines where the messages displayed comes from They can either be configured directly on the object Data Source is Static or read from external text file Data Source is Text File When the Data Source is Static the Configuration dialog box is displayed as pictured above and you can config ure all the settings on the grid When the Data Source is Text File the Config uration dialog box displays a field for entering the path and name of the file from which the me
445. the following 1 Open the Map Network Drive dialog box in Windows Explorer click Tools Map Network Drive 2 Select the same drive letter that was used when mapping the drive on the Runtime sys tem 3 Click the Browse button to locate the drive shared in the previous step You may need to expand the My Network Places Entire Network Microsoft Windows Network lt network name gt and station items in the directory tree view by double clicking them 4 Double click the shared drive to complete the mapping 8 4 3 Synchronize PC Time of Day Clocks Set the time of day clocks on the local and remote PCs to the same day of the week AM PM setting and time zone When AppTracker Think amp Do s debugging tool runs remotely it examines the time date stamps on Runtime files to see if the project is synchronized to the local files If the time or date is different it will interpret the project to be out of sync and will not track the project 8 4 4 Connect to the Remote System The remote and local systems are now ready to communicate Use Network Neighborhood in Windows Explorer to view the remote connections The Runtime system PC should be able to view the name assigned to the development system PC To connect to the remote system 1 From the development PC open a project on the shared drive 2 Onthe ProjectCenter toolbar enter the station name of the Runtime PC for example
446. this worksheet as follows Description specifies a description of the worksheet for documentation purposes Save As XML select check to save information in XML format or uncheck to save in the DAT format You can load information in a DAT file into different tags using a second Recipe work sheet but you must load information in an XML file into tags with the same name as the tag from which the data originated As with HTML pages you must be running the Web server to view XML data from the Web Unlike the HTML pages in the runtime system XML pages do not need to have the application running to view the XML data You must be running Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher to view XML data File Name specifies a file name related to the recipe group Use static text File1 or a dynamic tag value FileNameTag Register Number specifies a tag to define the register number to be read or written into a DBF file PHOENIX CONTACT 6 123 Think amp Do 6 124 PHOENIX CONTACT Unicode select enable to save the recipe in UNICODE format two bytes per char acter or disable to save the recipe in ANSI format one byte per character When saving a worksheet you can save it using any name you choose you are not re quired to use a predefined file name A configuration file using the default extension RCP or XSL if you specify Save As XML contains the recipe config
447. ting data item eoe Cancel Help Figure 5 14 The Move Block Expression tab PHOENIX CONTACT 85 21 Think amp Do Valid Moves Table 5 4 REESE SR 2 eee SESS SCS SSS SSS sR SoS ES B BB B LB REFE ESSE SS SS 202221212220 2 SS SSS _ e wide BERR SSS 5 O o S 5 gt 9 gt E Valid move Current Date Fixed Integers 1 Register 1 Counter 1 Number me pep Can move up to 2 4 8 13 32 or 64 data items Invalid move 2 For more information on how the Move block performs powerful data manipulations refer to Using the Move page 7 16 2364 5 22 Flow Charts 5 2 12 PID Block PID The PID block performs a mathematical algorithm for process control which is the Propor tional Integral Derivative PID algorithm Think amp Do permits up to 64 PID loops in a project FID In the block diagram shown in Figure 5 15 the PID loop has two inputs and one output to the outside world the process control application These
448. tion field in the toolbar will display Find CE Runtime 2 Clickthe drop down arrow and then click Find CE Runtime from the drop down list If the network is disconnected or power is removed from target devices the Find CE Run time may display the Target Picker error dialog box If that occurs check the network connections and power supply to target device s The Find Configure CE Runtime dialog box shown in Figure 2 8 appears Review the list of all Windows CE devices found on the network Think amp Do CE Watch CE Station Selection Following is a list of Think amp CE Runtime s currently available on the network He scan Reset using IP Mac Address IP Address Mame Description L 00 62 80 06 1 149 208 181 49 Hunterw inPLU Hunter s WinPLC Select Exit Help Figure 2 8 The Find Configure CE Runtime dialog box For example Figure 2 8 lists a WinPLC at a particular network IP address which Think amp Do uses to identify the device PHOENIX CONTACT 2 9 Think amp Do 4 Highlight the desired Windows CE target device in the list 5 Click the Select button to choose the selected target device and exit the dialog box The Find Configure CE Runtime dialog box in Figure 2 8 provides utilities for resetting and configuring Windows CE Runtime targets The IP address is user configurable but the MAC address media access control is a unique
449. tion flow 10 13 SQL Express Block Database operations 7 37 7 46 SQL Express blocK pes ies 5 25 Starting a new 2 2 2 21 2 3 HAUS INE EN 4 10 Stepped flow chart execution 10 11 B 4 PHOENIX CONTACT Stopping a running 9 6 String data 2222 7 7 Comparing and 7 37 Using in Calculation blocks 7 35 String 7 34 Structured data items tek een E et te 7 13 Structured data types Comm data 5 9 SUDCA 4 4 PE 5 27 a 5 7 DESIGN SUMMA 5 31 Parameter mapping 5 27 Return DIOCK duc 5 27 Runtime 5 31 sing in 97 219 5 32 5 3 System data items Qe S A 5 Monitoring with AppTracker 10 6 System data
450. tioniTag Option2Caption Option 1 2 Option3Caption Option 1 Option3Tag RectangleCaption Caption Display properties from all categories Figure 6 120 The Symbol Properties dialog box for editing tooltips When assigning values to the custom properties of the symbol on the screens the user can read the description as tooltips just by moving the mouse cursor on the property name as illustrated in Figure 6 121 Object Properties 2 Replace Hint Linked Symbol Name OptionCheckBoxes s W Use linked size Category Display properties fram categories Property Figure 6 121 The symbol Object Properties dialog box showing a tooltip PHOENIX CONTACT 6 111 Think amp Do 6 112 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 4 Setting Screen Attributes Use the Screen Attributes dialog box to set Runtime characteristics of the screen To set screen attributes do one of the following Creating new screen opens the Screen Attributes dialog box see Creating Oper ator Screens on page 4 19 For a screen that you ve already created follow these steps 1 Inthe ScreenView Explorer expand the Screens folder 2 Double click the desired screen to display it in the Workspace 3 Right click on a blank area of the screen and select Screen Attributes from the pop up menu Screen Attributes Description Background Picture Size Location Security Enable
451. to a String Data Item above but choose String for both data types 2 Specify the two strings in the From and To group s settings All characters in the first string can move if the length of the second string is the same or greater If the length of the second string is less the move will truncate the right most part that does not fit 7 34 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Math and Data Operations Moving Ranges of String Data Items One of the best uses of the Move block for string handling is to move a range of string data items to another set of data items If these two groups of string data items are in Arrays of type String one array can move into the other array as long as both arrays have the same number of elements For each string moved truncation only occurs if the destination string data item is shorter than the source string 7 9 2 Exchanging Strings With Other Types To use a text string as a number UNICODE data must be converted into numerical digit val ues When using the Move Block to move a string data item into a number data item Think amp Do does this conversion automatically For example the string 1659 can be converted to the number 1659 Conversely a number can be converted to a representative text string by using a Move block In the From group define the tagname and data type for the number In the To group define the destination string data item 7 9 3
452. to find all devices on the network c Monitor inputs with IOView in real time and turn on the outputs by clicking on the graphic devices are not available or the Think amp Do driver doesn t support Auto Dis covery generate the configuration manually using these steps a Add the device or module manually as described in Manually Adding an I O Module on page 3 9 b Mapthe input points to tagnames c Mapthe output points to tagnames 4 Save the configuration 3 3 Adding an Driver You must add a driver for the I O network scanner card or backplane also called an I O adapter connected to the Runtime target The driver is a special piece of software that Think amp Do uses to communicate over the link to physical devices To add driver 1 Either select Drivers Add or click the Add Driver toolbar button 2 From thelist of I O drivers Figure 3 4 select the appropriate one for the I O connected to the target hardware Add Driver Button Add 1 0 Driver Select 1 0 Driver Automationdirect com Ethernet 170 Autematiandirect com Ethernet 1 0 CoProcessor Devicenet 5 5 Technologies Motion Dual Port 10 Port Driver Galil Motion Driver Honeywell 505 1 0 54 Honeywell SOS 1 0 PET Interbus Phaenis Contact Logozol Serial Motion amp 1 0 Motion Modbus Plus 10 Modbus TCP 1 0 Momentum Ethernet 20 Ethernet 0
453. to read and write tagname values in a running Think amp Do project Please consult the documentation for those applications to learn the precise commands and syntax required to open a DDE link or channel Reading From Excel To read a tagname value in Excel type a formula with following syntax into one of the cells in your spreadsheet lt server gt lt topic gt lt tagname gt where server The name of the Think amp Do server TND2DDE lt topic gt depends on the operating system on which the Think amp Do project is running For a Certified PC it is data For Windows CE use the station name for example WinPLC1 lt tagname gt The name of a Think amp Do data tag Do not enter any spaces in the formula The formula has a pipe character 1 after the server name and an exclamation point before the tagname Don t confuse them For example to read the value of the tagnamed ProductionT otal on a Certified PC enter the following into the cell TND2DDEldata ProductionT otal To read the same value from a project running under a remote Windows CE Runtime enter TND2DDEI WinPLC1 ProductionT otal Refer to the Microsoft Excel manual for details on entering remote reference formulas for cells If using another client application please refer to its documentation on the topics DDE links or Remote Data Collection 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 8 21 Think amp Do 8 22 P
454. ts are interpolated directly to each other using a line This option is suitable for analog values 1 specifies that consecutive points are linked through vertical and horizon tal lines only steps This option is suitable for Boolean values Marker specifies the type of marker if any that must be displayed on each specific sample retrieved from the data source and displayed on the object Color specifies the color of the marker if any and line used to draw the pen on the object Marker Size specifies the size of the marker if any When running the application under the Windows CE operating system or on the Web Thin Client any OS the Pen Style dialog box available during the runtime allows the user to change the pen color only 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Options Use this dialog box to configure optional settings for each data point Options Description Eng Units Low Limit High Lirnit Hide Scale Break Interval 200 X Axis off set Cursor Value a Figure 6 85 The Trend Control Options dialog box Description specifies the text that can be displayed in the legend providing a short description about the data point during the runtime When tags are used the default description is the one configured for the tag Eng Unit specifies the text that can be displayed in the legend providing the Engi neering Un
455. u can omit the path in the name PHOENIX CONTACT 6 97 Think amp Do Delimiters specifies the delimiter s used in the data source file For instance if the data will be read from a CSV comma separated values file you would select the Com ma option You can even choose a custom delimiter by checking the Other option and typing the custom delimiter in the field beside it Configure tagnames between curly brackets TagName in the File field Read Only when selected makes the grid read only Data Source Class Tag Clicking the Data button with Class Tag as the Data Source displays the Grid Data Class Tag dialog box shown below Grid Data Class Tag Class Tag Number of Items VIE Figure 6 102 The Grid Data Class Tag dialog box The parameters in this dialog box are Class Tag enter the name of the main class tag source Do not specify a specific member of the class tag You can specify the initial array position in this field e g My tag 10 otherwise O zero will be used as the initial position by default Number of Items enter the number of array positions from the Class Tag that should be displayed View when the tag configured in the optional field changes value e g toggles during the runtime the Grid object launches a dialog box that lets the user show hide each col umn or modify their positions Avail
456. ue Pass the value of a tagname Click the Value button to enter tagname This toggles the button title to tag 5 3 4 Interaction of Call and Begin Blocks The selections you make for each data item in a subchart s Begin block configuration deter mines the available and relevant choices in the calling flow chart s Call block This means you need to specify the Begin block configuration before configuring related Call block s Table 5 5 Begin and Call Block Parameter Relationships Expression choices Call Begin in Subcharts in Flow charts Parameters Pass by Reference N A Call by Reference Pass by Value Default value Call by Value Call by Tag Locals N A Default value N A 2364 2364 Flow Charts An explanation of Table 5 5 line by line follows subchart s parameters allow exchange of data between a subchart and the calling flow chart A subchart s locals are not accessible from any other flow chart The sub chart s locals are not retained remembered from one call to the next call of the subroutine A parameter passed by reference must be called by reference This method of mapping allows a flow chart s data item to reference map to a different subchart tagname So when you change the value of the subchart tagname it changes the value of the calling flow chart s data item A parameter passed by value is a copy of the value of the original data item The value of t
457. ules This requires further definition of the pattern for each module in the base Select the Module Info tab and note the Fail safe I O Pattern attribute with the Click Here prompt The pattern specified applies to either or both Watchdog time out and Startup Shut down categories if pattern is the specified I O state To configure an I O Pattern follow these steps 1 Usethe Click Here button to access the Pattern dialog box The entry field is in hex format and Think amp Do decodes and displays the value in binary MSB to LSB left to right to confirm individual I O point states 2 Click the OK button when finished 3 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B Section 4 This section informs you about General techniques for creating and editing flow charts and subcharts General techniques for creating and editing operator screens General Programming GChniQue s cc xU tes 4 3 4 1 Flow Charts and Subcharts 4 3 4 2 Exploring Flow Charts and 5 4 4 4 3 Creatiig FOW CMA ndi esi d atii ossis 4 5 4 4 Changing Flow Chart eee 4 6 4 4 1 Changing Execution Order 2 22 2 4 6 4 4 2 Changing Flow Chart s Category
458. ult value field assigns a value for the local data item each time the subchart is called During execution the subchart can modify this value as necessary The Move Up and Move Down buttons on the right side of the Begin Expression tab provide extra tools to manage subchart parameters and locals These buttons let you ar range data items in the best order for readability Parameter order does not affect subchart functionality You also can select a data item use the row header and perform cut copy paste operations 5 3 3 Call Expression A flow chart standard or subchart executes a subchart when the control passes to a Call block Double click the Call block to display its expression dialog as shown in Figure 5 22 Call Block Expression Properties Subcharts 5ubcharts Process Subeory Epor External Modules Mapping a Subchart Tagname Type Mapped To Call By j SubconveyorA amp rray Array Reference SubconvevyorkickoutOutput Output Reference SubconvevorkickoutPosition Counter Value SubconvevyorSelectionlD Counter Value SubconvevorExitCounter Counter Reference Cancel Help Figure 5 22 The Call Block Expression tab 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 5 29 Think amp Do 5 30 PHOENIX CONTACT Subchart Name Use the Subcharts tree structure list to select the subchart you want to call You must have previously created the subchart named it specified any parameters tha
459. unch any runtime modules specified as Automatic Using the Run Application tool is the same as selecting the Project Run menu Stop Application Click the Stop Application tool to stop all runtime tasks Stop Application affects the ap plication on the target station Be sure you know which target station is configured local or remote before executing Stop Application Using Stop Application is the same as select ing the Project Stop menu 6 3 7 Using the Bitmap Toolbar Use the Bitmap toolbar to access the Bitmap Screen Editor tools This toolbar is available only when the Background Picture layer is active You can enable the Background Picture layer in the Screen Attributes dialog box Figure 6 12 The Bitmap toolbar The tools in the Bitmap toolbar are described below Select Area Click the Select Area tool to select an area within the Bitmap Screen Editor Flood Fill Clickthe Flood Fill tool then click on the screen to paint the surrounding area with the color you specified with the Fill Color tool 2364 en B 2364 e Pixel Editing Tool Erase Area Tool Change Colors Tool Select Transparent Color Tool Select Transparent Color Tool Operator Screen Techniques Pixel Editing Click the Pixel Editing tool to open an Edit Image dialog box where you can draw de tailed bitmaps pixel by pixel Edit Image Picture
460. uration and the File Name field contains the data file name to be read or written Use the body parameters on this worksheet as follows field specifies tagnames to update with file contents or with values to write to a file If the tag is an array you must specify the first position to use Double click the field or right click and then select Insert Tag to display the Object Finder dialog box see Object Finder Dialog Box on page 6 7 Typing a new name gives you the oppor tunity to create the internal tag see Creating ScreenView Tags on page 6 9 If the tag is an Array or a Class or both then Think amp Do automatically enables every array position and class member by default To configure a specific array position and or class member type it in the Tag Name field as normal For example TND level 3 member Number of Elements specifies how many positions of the array tag are in use When you define an array tag its initial position is zero You can configure a tagname between curly brackets TagName in this field allowing the user to change the Number of Elements configured in the recipe for each array tag dy namically during runtime To read or write a recipe group use the ScreenView scripting language function 6 6 4 Report Worksheet The Report worksheet contains a definition of reports text type to be sent to a printer or disk The Reports task allows you to c
461. ut 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 How to use variables and constants Think amp Do Details on math functions and string handling How to use SQL and PID blocks Seneca E 7 9 Exploring Data 7 3 7 1 1 Initial and Retentive 7 5 Tagname Data Types and Formats 7 6 7 2 1 Data Type DescripliOnis dois oo od au n 7 7 Understand NO 5 e aa a aa EAEE techy 7 8 7 3 1 Definihne ATOyS SUN 7 9 7 3 2 MM 7 10 Think amp Do System Data 7 11 7 4 1 ANG TIME 7 11 7 4 2 Fixed Timers or 7 12 7 4 3 SCAM COCKS ett ee wh seca eed 7 12 7 4 4 mmer HI PETER IET 7 13 Counting with Number Data 7 15 USMO MING BOC Ct 7 17 7 6 1 7 17 7 6 2 Moving Between Same Data
462. ut tool is the same as selecting the Edit menu or typing the lt Ctrl gt X key combination Copy Click the tool to duplicate a selected object and store it on the clipboard You can then use the Paste tool to move the copied object to another location on the same screen or to another screen Using the tool is the same as selecting the Edit Copy menu or typing the lt Ctrl gt lt C gt key combination Paste Click the Paste tool to place the contents of the clipboard into upper left corner of the active screen You can Paste a cut or copied object multiple times to a several screens work sheets Using the Paste tool is the same as selecting the Edit Paste menu or typing the lt Ctrl gt V combination 2364 en B Undo Tool Project Settings Tool Zoom Tool Test Display Tool Stop Test Display Tool 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Undo Click the Undo tool to cancel the last action performed while working on a screen or work sheet You can cancel up to 20 actions taken before your last action The actions in object properties do not increase Undo steps Using the Undo tool is the same as selecting the Edit Undo menu or typing the lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt key combination Project Settings Click the Project Settings tool to display the Project Settings dialog box Using the Proj ect Settings tool is the same as se
463. variables are the Setpoint SP PID Block the Process Variable PV and the Output Variable These data items also appear in the Button PID Expression tab see Figure 5 16 PC Process Control ee Se eh Sr et Se euer ee Se 1 Application Output Variable Loop Calculation Card Process Variable Base Figure 5 15 PID loop block diagram PID Block ne Advanced w Algorithm w Limits Properties General Ke Tuning Status PID loop name Find Bake Conveyor Process variable source data item Oven_Temp Output Variable Data item Lower spar Upper span Heater_Signal 1 00 Lower limit Upper limit Set Point Data item Lower span Upper spar ake_Setting 1 00 Auto Manual Cascade data item Cancel Help Figure 5 16 The PID Block Expression tab You must design your flow chart to execute PID Blocks at a frequency suitable for the pro cess control application This frequency or loop sample rate can often be much slower than the normal scan interval The proper value conserves system processing power while 2364 5 23 Think amp Do Run Program Block Button still guaranteeing loop stability Therefore the PID Block must generally be placed inside a timing loop in your flow chart It is a good idea to put your PID Block in a subchart and call it when needed
464. ved for internal use SYS 50 LastExtended Read only Execution time microseconds of the last FunctionBlockTime Extended Function Block call SYS 51 PeakExtended Peak execution time microseconds of all Extended FunctionBlockTime Function Block calls SYS 52 AvgExtended Read only Average execution time microseconds FunctionBlockTime of all Extended Function Block calls SYS 53 Reserved for internal use SYS 54 Reserved for internal use SYS 55 Reserved for internal use A 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 SYS 56 Reserved for internal use SYS 57 LiveCaptureStatus Status of the Live capture set s Do not write to this data item See Live capture in help for more details SYS 58 MajorBuildVersion Read only Major build version number read only SYS 59 MinorBuildVersion Read only Minor build version number read only SYS 60 MaximumFlowchart Read only The maximum flow chart execution time one component of the time reported in SYS 1 This value is stated in milliseconds 2 Notes on Reading Error Data Error data contains the error code and the block and flow chart where the last error occurred The bits in the error data can be read as follows Bits 0 15 contain a reference to the flow chart that has the error If the error occurred in a standard flow chart you can find the number in the Standard 1 2 3 folder of the flow chart Explorer in ProjectCenter If the error occurred in a subch
465. w chart execution through menu selections Starting and Stopping Execution You must halt the project or stop at a breakpoint before stepped execution is available To halt execution click the red button select the Debug Halt RTE menu or press lt F6 gt This freezes variable values and stops program execution To continue execution click the green button select the Debug Go menu or press lt F7 gt Stopping a running project have serious effects on moving equipment Be sure you understand the possible consequences of your action Breakpoints Breakpoints force execution to halt at specified locations to give you time to view and or change Force see Forcing on page 10 7 tag values You can set breakpoints with the project running or halted To set a breakpoint 1 Click on a block in the flow chart at the desired execution halt point 2 Select the Debug Toggle Breakpoint menu to set a breakpoint Note that the back ground color changes to indicates a set breakpoint To clear a breakpoint do the following 1 Select a program block that has a breakpoint set 2 Selectthe Debug Toggle Breakpoint menu A breakpoint halts execution of a running project can have serious effects on moving equipment Be sure you understand the possible consequences of your action PHOENIX CONTACT 10 11 Think amp Do Step Block h Step In Step Out 10 12 P
466. waitfor a specified period of time enter the number of milliseconds to wait in the field If the duration is zero the Wait block defaults to one scan cycle The Wait block automat ically selects the One Scan Wait check box upon clicking the OK button 3 Click the OK button During the wait period many scan periods may pass However the flow chart with the Wait block will not execute further until the wait period ends On the scan when the wait time ex pires flow chart execution resumes at the next block following the Wait block The Wait block is easier to use than constructing a timing loop for a delay in the flow chart since there is no need to create a timer data item or create the flow chart loop When a Wait block is executing no other blocks in the current flow chart execute until the wait completes Other flow charts continue to execute normally as long as they are enabled 5 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en Flow Charts 5 3 Using Subcharts A flow chart can call a subchart which transfers execution to the subchart The subchart re turns to the original flow chart transferring execution back again A subchart can also call another subchart However a subchart cannot call itself recursion is not allowed Flow charts can nest subchart calls up to 16 levels for tremendous flexibility and support for large projects To start a new subchart 1 Doone of the following From the ProjectCenter main menu select the
467. way To unlock the target click the Security Unlock menu and enter the password The locked buttons become active again 9 7 Instant Recall for Windows CE Target ProjectCenter provides a method to upload editable source files from a CE target expand ing uncompressing the files into a project directory A particular Windows CE target may or may not have the editable source in memory since that is an optional setting see Pro jectCenter s Project explorer window click the Enable Instant Recall check box To use Instant Recall to access CE target files 1 In ProjectCenter select the File Launch Instant Recall menu 2 Inthe Runtime Target field select the target type Such as Windows Phoenix Contact CE using the drop down list 2364 Building and Running Projects 3 Inthe Windows CE Station field use the drop down list to select the particular target on the network or you can type its name 4 lf the target station is not listed select Find CE Runtime to search for targets on the network and to update the list Figure 9 11 Instant Recall Runtime Target Windows CE Phoenix Contact CE Cancel Help Windows CE Station I Find CE Runtime Project File Project M ame Build Date Figure 9 11 The Instant Recall dialog box 5 Select the Runtime station name 6 Select the target The Open button enables if the target has
468. with Indicator Figure 6 58 Pushbutton styles Button Color specifies a default color for the button area of a pushbutton object that includes an indicator and a faceplate When the Color dialog box displays click on a color to select it and close the dialog box Legend Plate Color specifies or changes a default color for the legend plate area of a pushbutton object that includes an indicator When the Color dialog box displays click on a color to select it and close the dialog box Alegend plate encloses a button and indicator light This field becomes inactive if the pushbutton Style does not include an indicator PHOENIX CONTACT 6 59 Think amp Do Resize Width Tool Resize Height Tool and Closed areas configure the appearance of a pushbutton object its open and closed states e Color specifies a default color for an indicator in each State When the Color dia log box displays click on a color to select it and close the dialog box e If you selected a pushbutton style that does not include an indicator you can use this field to specify a button color for each State e Blink specifies whether the color you specified in the Color box blinks and how fast it blinks for each state no blinking default Slow and Fast e fyousetthe color to blink it alternates between the color specified in the Color
469. x which allows you to change the characteristics style size and so forth of the message font User Enable specifies a tag expression or a nonzero number to select a message in the runtime application The default is 1 true enabled Control Enable specifies a tag expression or a nonzero number to select a mes sage in the runtime application depending on the current value of the Read Search Tag The default is 1 true enabled ScreenView bases this parameter on the Value field Messages Configuration dia log box you associate with the selected message Enabling this field allows tag chang es triggered by the process to affect which messages you can select Tag specifies an integer or a Boolean tag to point to a selected message based on the message Value field Messages Configuration dialog box You can use the Control Enable and User Enable fields to control whether the operator or a pro cess can alter this tag Write Tag optional specifies a string tag to receive the Message value of the last selected message When you close and reopen the screen containing a list box object ScreenView uses this tag value to determine the last message selected in the list box PHOENIX CONTACT 6 51 Think amp Do Smart Message Object Tool 6 52 PHOENIX CONTACT E Sign when selected the user will be prompted to enter the Electronic Signature be fore executing t
470. y The last runtime scan interval This time is in milliseconds PeakScanlnterval The peak or largest scan interval encountered by the runtime Each time the runtime updates Scaninterval it compares it to PeakScanlnterval if Scanlnterval is larger it is written to PeakScaninterval Typically you would set this value to zero to clear the current PeakScanlnterval and observe the new value This value is stated in milliseconds SYS 2 AvgScanlnterval Read only The average scan interval of the runtime This value is stated in milliseconds OverScanRatio Read only The ratio of scan intervals that are over the desired scan time for the application This value is stated in tenths of a percent For example a value of 12 means that 1 2 percent of the scan intervals were over the specified scan interval SYS 4 LogicTime Read only The time taken by the runtime system to read the inputs execute the flow charts and write the outputs for the last scan This value is stated in milliseconds PeakLogicTime The peak or largest logic time encountered by the runtime Each time the runtime updates LogicTime it compares it to PeakLogicTime if LogicTime is greater PeakLogicTime is updated with the new value Typically you will set this value to zero to clear the PeakLogicTime and observe the new value This value is stated in milliseconds runtime This value is stated in milliseconds PHOENIX CONTACT A 1 Think amp Do SYS 11
471. y in the com bination key If you choose Left or Right the command will be executed any time either of these keys is pressed in combination with the key specified in the drop down list Disable specifies a tag or expression to enable and disable the object You disable the check box object when you enter a value different from O 6 46 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 Operator Screen Techniques Security specifies a value to define a security level for the object as defined under Se curity When a user logs on and does not have the specified security level Think amp Do disables the object Tag specifies a tag that updates when the user clicks on the check box during runtime If no Feedback was specified the value of this tag is also used to indicate the current status of the object True Value specifies a value that will be used to change the control to TRUE state and to indicate that the control is in TRUE state For more information about states please refer to the states table Advanced opens the Advanced dialog box Advanced Tri State Feedback Ext Trans Auto gray aut Force Enable Focus Push Like Auto Format Figure 6 51 The check box Advanced dialog box Tri State specifies that the control has a third state The third state will be displayed when the tag configured in the Feedback field assumes the va
472. y in the top cell in the Logical ID column Fill Down 3 Click and drag the cursor downward releasing it over the bottom row This selects the Button remaining logical ID cells and highlights them in black This enables the Fill Down but ton that appears above the grid 4 Click the Fill Down button lOView automatically fills in the selected cells increment ing the logical ID number for each cell The associated tagnames appear automatically Think amp Do ensures tagname changes are only made once For example changing a tag name in ProjectCenter s Data Item grid is reflected automatically in IOView or in any other part of Think amp Do Edit the default I O Device Description field to create a meaningful input output point name for the application located in the Module Info tab 3 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Connect Button Scan Button Drivers Devices and Tags 3 6 Scanning and Monitoring lOView has the ability to monitor actual inputs and turn on outputs to test wiring independent of control logic To monitor I O from lOView 1 Click the Configuration Connect menu or use the Connect toolbar button 2 Click Configuration Scan menu or use the Scan toolbar button To check an input point 1 Turn an input ON or OFF 2 Watch the on screen image of the input module as the physical input changes to mon itor its status Baze Control le
473. y of flow charts they contain in alphabetical order 2364 en B PHOENIX CONTACT 4 7 Think amp Do 4 4 2 Changing a Flow Chart s Category To change a flow chart to from Simulation or Unused category 1 Select the flow chart name in the Flow Chart explorer window 2 Dooneofthe following Inthe main ProjectCenter window click the check box for the desired setting as shown in Figure 4 6 T Flowchart M ame Flowchart Type Standard Reset Counters Execution order 2 Version Creation date 08 17 00 Thu Nov 23 2007 Modification date 10 38 24 Thu amp ug 16 2007 Description Parameters Modes Mot used Simulated Data XREF Figure 4 6 Select the Unused or Simulation check box to move a flow chart Drag the flow chart to the appropriate folder 4 4 3 Renaming Copying Deleting or Printing Flow Charts To rename duplicate delete or print an existing flow chart 1 Move the cursor over the name of the flow chart in the Flow Chart Explorer pane 2 Right click to get the pop up menu and select the desired action Before creating a new flow chart in a new project it s best to name the project first by sav ing it to a new directory each project must be in a unique directory 4 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en 2364 Status line General Programming Techniques 4 5 FlowView Orientation When you create a new flow c
474. ype folder for the data type desired to display the Data Item grid The Data Item grid shown in Figure 3 2 is for Counter data types The Data Item grid has a fixed C for Counter in the left most column of each row I hiteAccumulationCounter L GreenAccumulationCounter RedAccumulationCounter i4 YellowAccumulationCounter WhiteDiverterPosition GreenDiverterPosition E C10 WhtePakageID 1 Co C23 WellowPackageD a Figure 3 2 The Data Items grid for Counter data types 3 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 2364 en B 2364 H Save Button lOView Icon Drivers Devices and Tags 3 Inthe main Data grid type the tagname desired Press the lt Enter gt key or click out side the tagname field to enter By default Think amp Do increments the Index as tagnames are entered in the Data Item grid You can however change these values to non sequential numbers The data type and index uniquely identify each tagname throughout Think amp Do 4 Click the Save button in the toolbar or select File Save to save the data items added Deleting Data Items To delete a row in the Data Item grid 1 Select a row Move the mouse cursor to the left most column in the row to delete The cursor changes to a right pointing arrow 2 Clickto select the entire row which will then be highlighted
475. ytes Carriage return Line feed Copy termination character s to data item Figure 5 6 The Communication Block Expression tab Double click the Communication block to edit the Communication expression This displays the Communication Block Expression tab Read Write and COM control opera tions are independently selectable In the Communications Read block you must select at least one of the check box options in the Termination group for a valid operation You can also access an ASCII character chart of hex codes using the ASCII Chart button to select a special character as a terminator When you select a Write operation you can optionally choose terminators that you want appended to the data output Selecting COM control provides a choice of Control Flags that let you cancel read or write operations clear buffers or set modem control signals Structured data types Comm data items are structured in that they have associated flags The purpose of these flags is to indicate transmission reception completion or an error condition Each flag is identified in the Data item grid in the Structured Fields column The three available flags are HeadDone WriteDone and Error The data item name includes the flag name as a suffix separated by a dot for example GetMessage ReadDone The flags are not inde pendent flag data items You can use them in Decision blocks by referencing their comp
476. ze serial communications for a variety of I O systems In this section we will focus on communications with a typical pe ripheral such as a bar code reader Figure 8 1 10110001001 100 MM 05928 COENA Bar Code Reader Figure 8 1 Think amp Do can communicate with many different devices Serial Communications To configure serial communications details provided in subsequent sections 1 Add and configure the serial driver in lOView 2 Create a data item for the COM port 3 Create Byte array data items or String data items to store data that is being sent or re ceived 4 Use a Communications Block in a flow chart to communicate through the driver and comm port with the external serial device 8 1 1 Adding the Serial Driver Project flow charts require configuring the Think amp Do serial driver to communicate through a serial port to external devices To add the serial driver to a project 1 Launch lOView 2 Click the Add Driver button on the Configuration toolbar to open the Add I O Driver dialog box 3 Select Serial Driver from the list PHOENIX CONTACT 8 3 Think amp Do 4 Click the OK button to close the dialog box and complete the addition A graphical representation of the driver appears in the Board View upper left pane of the lOView window Figure 8 2 The graphic identifies the driver and indicates that it has been successfully added A table appears

UM SWD EN Think & Do

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

UM SWD EN Think &amp; Do

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

UM SWD EN Think & Do